GHG14 DDEC13ddc SVC Man 0127

DDC-SVC-MAN-0127
GHG14 DDEC13 Electronic Controls

Application and Installation
Specifications are subject to change without notice. Detroit Diesel Corporation is registered to ISO 9001:2001.
Copyright © Detroit Diesel Corporation. All rights reserved. Detroit Diesel Corporation is a Daimler company.
Printed in U.S.A.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 California Proposition 65 Warning and Engine Idle Notice............................................................................................... 4

2 Attention................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
3 Abstract.................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
4 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................. 7
4.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................... 7
5 Safety Precautions................................................................................................................................................................... 8
5.1 Safety Precautions........................................................................................................................................................... 8
6 Hardware and Wiring........................................................................................................................................................... 12
6.1 Motor Control Module 2.1............................................................................................................................................ 12
6.2 Common Powertrain Controller 4................................................................................................................................. 30
6.3 Aftertreatment Control Module2.1................................................................................................................................ 56
6.4 Vehicle Interface Wiring............................................................................................................................................... 64
6.5 On-board Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................................... 86
6.6 Wires and Wiring.......................................................................................................................................................... 90
6.7 Conduit and Loom....................................................................................................................................................... 102
6.8 Tape and Taping.......................................................................................................................................................... 103
6.9 Sensors and Actuators................................................................................................................................................. 103
6.10 Lamps........................................................................................................................................................................ 114
7 Inputs and Outputs.............................................................................................................................................................. 139
7.1 Digital Inputs Overview - CPC4................................................................................................................................. 139
7.2 Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link.......................................................................................................... 155
7.3 Digital Outputs Overview - CPC4.............................................................................................................................. 158
7.4 ACM2.1 Input Sensors and Output Actuators............................................................................................................ 184
8 Features................................................................................................................................................................................ 186
8.1 Auto-Elevate Idle........................................................................................................................................................ 186
8.2 Clean Idle Limiting Feature........................................................................................................................................ 187
8.3 Common Driver Reward............................................................................................................................................. 189
8.4 Cruise Control............................................................................................................................................................. 191
8.5 Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................................................. 202
8.6 Dual Speed Axle.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
8.7 Engine Brake Controls................................................................................................................................................ 204
8.8 Engine Protection........................................................................................................................................................ 215
8.9 Engine Ratings............................................................................................................................................................ 216
8.10 Engine Starter Control............................................................................................................................................... 219
8.11 Fan Control................................................................................................................................................................ 223
8.12 Fleet Management..................................................................................................................................................... 233
8.13 Fuel Economy Incentive............................................................................................................................................ 242
8.14 Green House Gas Emission....................................................................................................................................... 243
8.15 Idle Adjust................................................................................................................................................................. 244
8.16 Idle Shutdown Timer and PTO Shutdown................................................................................................................ 245
8.17 Limiters..................................................................................................................................................................... 251
8.18 Low Gear Torque Reduction..................................................................................................................................... 253
8.19 Optimized Idle........................................................................................................................................................... 255
8.20 Parked DPF Regeneration......................................................................................................................................... 263
8.21 PasSmart.................................................................................................................................................................... 265
8.22 Passwords.................................................................................................................................................................. 267
8.23 Progressive Shift....................................................................................................................................................... 268
8.24 Starter Lockout.......................................................................................................................................................... 271
8.25 Tachometer Drive...................................................................................................................................................... 273
8.26 Throttle Control/Governors....................................................................................................................................... 274
8.27 Transmission Interface.............................................................................................................................................. 292
8.28 Vehicle Speed Limiting............................................................................................................................................. 294
8.29 Vehicle Speed Sensor Anti-Tampering..................................................................................................................... 296
8.30 Vehicle Speed Signal Evaluation in Case of Split Gear PTO................................................................................... 297
2 All information subject to change without notice.

Copyright © 2014 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION DDC-SVC-MAN-0127
GHG14 DDEC13 Electronic Controls Application and Installation
9 Communication Protocols................................................................................................................................................... 299

9.1 Communication Protocols - Overview........................................................................................................................ 299
9.2 SAE J1939 Supported Messages................................................................................................................................. 305
10 Appendix A: Harness Wiring Diagram........................................................................................................................... 353
10.1 GHG14 Aftertreatment Control Module (ACM2.1)................................................................................................. 353
11 Appendix B: Parameter Lists........................................................................................................................................... 355
11.1 PARAMETER LIST................................................................................................................................................. 355
12 Appendix C: Acronyms..................................................................................................................................................... 377
12.1 ACRONYMS............................................................................................................................................................ 377
All information subject to change without notice. 3

DDC-SVC-MAN-0127 Copyright © 2014 DETROIT DIESEL CORPORATION
1 California Proposition 65 Warning and Engine Idle Notice
1 California Proposition 65 Warning and Engine Idle Notice

2 Attention
This document is a guideline for qualified personnel. It is intended to be used by vehicle manufacturers and contains Detroit
Diesel Corporation’s recommendations for the ancillary systems supporting the Detroit™ engines covered by this document.
The vehicle manufacturer is responsible for developing, designing, manufacturing and installing these systems, including
component qualification. The vehicle manufacturer is also responsible for furnishing vehicle users complete service and
safety information for these systems. Detroit Diesel Corporation makes no representations or warranties regarding the
information contained in this document and disclaims all liability or other responsibility for the design, manufacture or
installation of these ancillary systems, or the preparation or distribution to vehicle users of appropriate information regarding
these systems. The information contained in this document may not be complete and is subject to change without notice.
TRADEMARK INFORMATION
DDEC®, Optimized Idle® and ProDriver® are registered trademarks of Detroit Diesel Corporation. Allison Transmission®
is a registered trademark of Carlyle Group and Onex Corporation. BorgWarner® is a registered trademark of Borg-Warner
Corporation. Jake Brake® is a registered trademark of Diesel Engine Retarders, Inc. Smart Cruise® is a registered trademark
of Eaton Vorad Technologies. SmartMedia® is a registered trademark of Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba DBA Toshiba
Corporation.Viton® is a registered trademark of DuPont Dow Elastomers L.L.C. Voith® is a registered trademark of JM
Voith GmbH. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

3 Abstract
3 Abstract
DDEC13 offers engine controls and an extensive range of engine and vehicle options.
The detail provided will facilitate the following:
• The selection of features and settings, based on individual applications
• The fabrication and installation of a vehicle interface harness, based on individual applications
• The communication of messages & data between sensors and various electronic control modules within the installation
• The use of industry standard tools to obtain engine data and diagnostic information, as well as to reprogram key parameters
The manual is arranged as follows:
• The initial portion covers the installation, beginning with an overview and safety precautions, followed by hardware and
wiring requirements, inputs and outputs, and available features.
• The second portion covers communication protocol.
• The third portion covers the tools capable of obtaining engine data and diagnostic information from the MCM2.1 and the
CPC4, as well as reprogramming of its key parameters.
• The final portion, the appendix, summarizes detailed information on codes, parameters, acronyms used, and harness
drawings.
This manual does not cover the installation of the engine or Aftertreatment System into various applications. For this, the
reader should refer to the specific engine application and installation manual.
This manual is intended for those with an electrical background. A simple installation may require a basic understanding of
electrical circuits while a more comprehensive electrical/electronics background is required to access all the capability of the
EPA DDEC13.

4 Introduction
4.1 Introduction
DDEC13 is a system that monitors and determines all values required for the operation of the engine and aftertreatment
system. A diagnostic interface is provided to connect to an external diagnosis tester. The DDEC13 system includes the engine
related sensors and the motor control module (MCM2.1), a cab-mounted control unit for vehicle engine management, the
Common Powertrain Controller4 (CPC4) and an Aftertreatment Control Module (ACM2.1). The Aftertreatment Control
Module (ACM2.1) has primary control for many of the exhaust gas aftertreatment functions.

5 Safety Precautions
5.1 Safety Precautions

The following safety measures are essential when installing DDEC13 in a vehicle equipped with a Detroit™ engine.
Stands
Use safety stands in conjunction with hydraulic jacks or hoists. Do not rely on either the jack or the hoist to carry the load.
Glasses
Select appropriate safety glasses for the job. Safety glasses must be worn when using tools such as hammers, chisels, pullers
and punches.
Procedures
The following warning must be read before performing a parked or active regeneration.
WARNING: HOT EXHAUST

During parked regeneration the exhaust gases will be extremely HOT and could cause a fire if
directed at combustible materials. The vehicle must be parked outside.
Welding
Consider the consequences of welding.
NOTICE: When welding, the following must be done to avoid damage to the electronic controls or the engine:
• Both the positive (+) and negative (-) battery leads must be disconnected before welding.
• Ground cable must be in close proximity to welding location - engine must never be used as a grounding point.
• Welding on the engine or engine mounted components is NEVER recommended.
Wear welding goggles and gloves when welding or using an acetylene torch.
WARNING: FIRE
To avoid injury from fire, check for fuel or oil leaks before welding or carrying an open flame near
the engine.
Insure that a metal shield separates the acetylene and oxygen which must be chained to a cart.
Work Place
Organize your work area and keep it clean.
WARNING: PERSONAL INJURY

To avoid injury from slipping and falling, immediately clean up any spilled liquids.
Eliminate the possibility of a fall by:

• Wiping up oil spills
• Keeping tools and parts off the floor

A fall could result in a serious injury.

After installation of the engine is complete:

To avoid injury from rotating belts and fans, do not remove and discard safety guards.
• Reinstall all safety devices, guards or shields

• Check to be sure that all tools and equipment used to install the engine are removed from the engine
Clothing
Wear work clothing that fits and is in good repair. Work shoes must be sturdy and rough-soled. Bare feet, sandals or sneakers
are not acceptable foot wear when installing an engine.

To avoid injury when working near or on an operating engine, remove loose items of clothing and
jewelry. Tie back or contain long hair that could be caught in any moving part causing injury.
Electric Tools
Improper use of electrical equipment can cause severe injury.
WARNING: ELECTRICAL SHOCK

To avoid injury from electrical shock, follow OEM furnished operating instructions prior to usage.
Check power tools before using.
Air
Use proper shielding to protect everyone in the work area.
WARNING: EYE INJURY

To avoid injury from flying debris when using compressed air, wear adequate eye protection (face
shield or safety goggles) and do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) air pressure.
Diagnostic Tools
For mobile applications, the vehicle operator must maintain control of the vehicle while an assistant performs the diagnostic
evaluations using a diagnostic tool.

To avoid injury from loss of vehicle/vessel control, the operator of a DDEC equipped engine must
not use or read any diagnostic tool while the vehicle/vessel is moving.
Fluids and Pressure

Fluids under pressure can have enough force to penetrate the skin.


To avoid injury from penetrating fluids, do not put your hands in front of fluid under pressure. Fluids
under pressure can penetrate skin and clothing.
WARNING: HOT COOLANT

To avoid scalding from the expulsion of hot coolant, never remove the cooling system pressure cap
while the engine is at operating temperature. Wear adequate protective clothing (face shield,
rubber gloves, apron, and boots). Remove the cap slowly to relieve pressure.
These fluids can infect a minor cut or opening in the skin. See a doctor at once, if injured by escaping fluid. Serious infection
or reaction can result without immediate medical treatment.
Batteries
Electrical storage batteries give off highly flammable hydrogen gas when charging and continue to do so for some time after
receiving a steady charge.
WARNING: Battery Explosion and Acid Burn

To avoid injury from battery explosion or contact with battery acid, work in a well ventilated area,
wear protective clothing, and avoid sparks or flames near the battery. If you come in contact with
battery acid:
• Flush your skin with water.
• Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
• Flush your eyes with water.
• Get medical attention immediately.
Always disconnect the battery cable before working on the Detroit Diesel Electronic Controls system.
Fire
Keep a charged fire extinguisher within reach. Be sure you have the correct type of extinguisher for the situation. The correct
fire extinguisher types for specific working environments are listed below.
Table 1.
The Correct Type of Fire Extinguisher
Fire Extinguisher Work Environment
Type A Wood, Paper, Textile and Rubbish
Type B Flammable Liquids
Type C Electrical Equipment
Paint
Mask off the MCM2.1 and or ACM2.1 prior to applying any paint.
NOTICE: Do not apply paint to the MCM2.1 or ACM2.1. The application of paint may affect the performance of
the MCM2.1 or ACM2.1.

Fluoroelastomer
Fluoroelastomer (Viton®) parts such as O-rings and seals are perfectly safe to handle under normal design conditions.
WARNING: CHEMICAL BURNS

To avoid injury from chemical burns, wear a face shield and neoprene or PVC gloves when
handling fluoroelastomer O-rings or seals that have been degraded by excessive heat. Discard
gloves after handling degraded fluoroelastomer parts.
A potential hazard may occur if these components are raised to a temperature above 316°C (600°F) (in a fire for example).
Fluoroelastomer will decompose (indicated by charring or the appearance of a black, sticky mass) and produce hydrofluoric
acid. This acid is extremely corrosive and, if touched by bare skin, may cause severe burns (the symptoms could be delayed
for several hours).
Transmission
The following caution applies to the transmission Shift-Stalk lever:

To avoid injury from unintended vehicle movement, do not leave the driver’s seat without placing
the Shift Stalk Lever in the Neutral position and applying the Parking Brake.
The following caution applies to the Power Take-off Incompatibility:
WARNING: Power Takeoff (PTO) Incompatibility

To avoid injury, do not install a PTO that is not Detroit Diesel approved onto Detroit®
Transmissions. Use of a non-Detroit Diesel approved PTO with a Detroit® Transmission could
result in unintended operation which could lead to severe personal injury.

6 Hardware and Wiring
6.1 Motor Control Module 2.1

The engine mounted Motor Control Module2.1 (MCM2.1.1) includes control logic to provide overall engine management.
1. 21-Pin Connector (OEM Responsibility) 2. 120–pin Connector (Detroit™ Responsibility)

Figure 1. Motor Control Module 2.1
NOTE: Do NOT ground the MCM2.1.1 housing. This can result in false codes being logged.
Table 2.
Electrical Limits
Operating Range
Full Functionality 11 V ≤ VBatt ≤ 30 V
Restricted Functionality 6.5 V ≤ VBatt ≤ 11 V
Operating Range for Injection 8 V ≤ VBatt ≤ 32 V
Restricted Operating Range for Injection 6.5 V ≤ VBatt ≤ 8 V
Over Voltage Shutdown 35 V
Under Voltage Shutdown of Micro Controller 4V
Maximum DC Voltage 55 V
Reverse Battery Protection Unlimited
Current Consumption
Quiescent Current 2 (Current w/ign OFF) <1 mA
Maximum Average Current (normal operation) 40 A
Typical Current Consumption (engine stalled, not actuators driven) 300 mA
Maximum Power Dissipation (normal operation) 50 W

Table 3.
Power Supply
System Inputs Description Current Demand (max. Avg. DC)
Terminal 30 Voltage supply (+) 40A
Terminal 31 Voltage supply ground 40A
Terminal 15 Ignition 110mA
Terminal 50 Starter 100mA (max 4A during cranking)
Table 4.
CAN-Bus
Description Transmission Rate Signal Voltage Termination Remarks
CAN 1 125kBaud VBatt None Powertrain CAN
667kBaud 5V None Powertrain CAN
CAN 2 500kBaud 5V None Aftertreatment /
Calibration CAN
CAN 3 500kBaud 5V 60R Actuator / Sensor CAN
Environmental Conditions
The Environmental Conditions for the MCM2.1 and ACM2.1 are as follows:
• The MCM2.1 is water and road spray resistant.
• The MCM2.1 has to be protected from impacts.
• The ACM2.1 is water and road spray resistant.
• The ACM2.1 requires battery power at all times.
• The ACM2.1 must not be wired through to disconnect switch.
6.1.1 Engine Harness

The MCM2.1 has a 120–pin connector Engine Harness which is factory installed. It also has a 21–pin connector which is the
responsibility of the OEM.
6.1.1.1 MCM2.1 120–pin Connector for Heavy Duty Engines

The pinouts for the MCM2.1 120–pin connector for the DD13, DD15, DD15 Evolution and DD16 engines are listed in the
following tables:

Figure 2. MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector
Table 5.
MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector - DD13
Pin Signal Type Function Notes
IMV / FMU Highside supply
1 RPU_H
metering unit (PWM)
IMV / FMU Lowside supply
2 RPU_L
metering unit (S / W)
3 H_OUT1 Not Used
APCRS: Amplifier; Bosch
4 MV_B5F
PLD; E3: Spill valve
5 MV_B5 Not Used
6 MV_B5D
Spill control valve /
7 MV_B5
Amplifier / PLD (EUP)
8 MV_B5B
9 MV_B5 Not Used
10 MV_B4E
11 MV_B4 Not Used
12 MV_B4C
13 MV_B4
14 MV_B4A


15 MV_B4 Not Used
16 MV_B2F Needle control valve
17 MV_B2 Not Used
18 MV_B2D Needle control valve
19 MV_B2 Needle control valve
20 MV_B2B Needle control valve
21 MV_B2 Not Used
22 MV_B1E Needle control valve
23 MV_B1 Not Used
24 MV_B1C Needle control valve
26 MV_B1A Needle control valve
27 MV_B1 Not Used
28 START_B Not Used
29 KN1_1 Not Used
30 A01_S Not Used
31 PWM_5 Not Used
32 PWM_7 Jake brake med/high
33 PWM_6 Actuator fan 2
34 PWM_8 Not Used
35 PWM_10 Wastegate Position
36 PWM_09 Not Used
Variable Speed Water
37 PWM_11
Pump
38 PV_M Wastegate GND
39 HSW2 Not Used
40 PCV_H Not Used
41 HSW1 Not Used
42 LSU_LS Not Used
Input for inductive sensor
crankshaft [analysis of the
43 DYN3_S
falling edge from the sensor
signal]
44 LSU_V Not Used
camshaft (2PINs) or hall
45 DYN2_S sensor (3PINs) [analysis of
the falling edge from the
sensor signal]
EvoBus Start/Stop rear
46 D3_V
switch
Sensor fan speed (hall
47 DYN4_S
sensor)
Cam Sensor Signal ground
48 DYN2_M
GND
Electrostatic Oil Separator
49 DYN5_S
Speed
50 SGND Turbo Speed GND


51 DYN1_S Turbo Speed
52 SGND_P Sensor ground
53 A23_S Not Used
54 A09_S Oil pressure switch
56 KN2_2 Not Used
57 A05_S Water level fuel filter
58 SENS1_V Sensor Power Supply 1
59 KN1_2 Not Used
60 A02_S Not Used
61 PWM_1 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
62 PV_B2
Supply Output (high side)
63 H_OUT2 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
64 PV_B2
65 PWM_12 HC dosing valve
66 PWM_13 Jake brake low/high
67 PV_M Prop Valve Group Ground
68 PCV_L Not Used
Fuel cut off valve HC
69 PWM_18
Metering Unit
70 PWM_16 Not Used
12V Power supply
71 LIN_V (Vbatt-0.25V max.15V) for
LIN sensors
72 LIN Not Used
Crank Position Signal
73 DYN3_M
ground GND
74 CAN3L Actuator CAN: CAN-Low
75 CAN3H Actuator CAN: CAN-High
EvoBus Start/Stop rear
76 D3_S
switch signal in
77 A29_S Fuel temperature
78 A15_S Rail pressure
79 D1_S Not Used
80 A27_S Coolant inlet temperature
81 A13_S Not Used
82 SENS2_V Sensor Supply 2
83 A24_S Not Used
84 A10_S HC doser fuel pressure in
85 SENS2_V Sensor Supply 2/10 way
86 A21_S Not Used
Charge air pressure
87 A06_S [directly after intake air
throttle]
88 SGND Not Used


89 KN2_1 Not Used
90 A03_S Position intake air throttle
SW and PWM Power
91 PV_B1
92 PWM_3 Not Used
93 PV_B1 Wastegate Power Supply
94 PWM_4 Not Used
95 PV_M Not Used
96 PWM_2 Not Used
97 PWM_15 Not Used
98 PWM_14 Actuator Fan 1
99 PWM_17 Not Used
100 H_OUT1 H-bridge output for intake
101 H_OUT2 air throttle
102 SGND
103 SGND
Sensor ground
104 SGND
105 SGND
Intake manifold temperature
106 A30_S
[EGR and fresh air mixed]
107 D2_S Not Used
108 A28_S Engine oil temperature
109 A14_S Differential pressure EGR
110 A26_S Coolant outlet temperature
111 A12_S HC doser fuel pressure out
112 A25_S Not Used
113 A11_S Low Fuel PSI
114 SGND Sensor ground
115 A22_S Not Used
116 A08_S Not Used
118 A07_S Not Used
Charge air temperature
119 A19_S
[directly after intercooler]
120 A04_S Not Used
The pinouts for the MCM2.1 120–pin connector for the DD15 engine are listed in the following table:

Table 6.
1 RPU_H
metering unit (PWM)
2 RPU_L
3 H_OUT1 Not Used
4 MV_B5F
5 MV_B5 Not Used
6 MV_B5D
7 MV_B5
8 MV_B5B
9 MV_B5 Not Used
10 MV_B4E
11 MV_B4 Not Used
12 MV_B4C
13 MV_B4
14 MV_B4A


15 MV_B4 Not Used
17 MV_B2 Not Used
21 MV_B2 Not Used
23 MV_B1 Not Used
27 MV_B1 Not Used
28 START_B Not Used
29 KN1_1 Not Used
30 A01_S Not Used
31 PWM_5 Not Used
34 PWM_8 Not Used
35 PWM_10 Not Used
36 PWM_09 Not Used
37 PWM_11 Not Used
38 PV_M Not Used
39 HSW2 Not Used
40 PCV_H Not Used
41 HSW1 Not Used
42 LSU_LS Not Used
43 DYN3_S
signal]
44 LSU_V Not Used
sensor signal]
46 D3_V Start/Stop
47 DYN4_S
sensor)
48 DYN2_M Cam Sensor Signal ground
49 DYN5_S
Speed
50 SGND Not Used
51 DYN1_S Not Used


53 A23_S Not Used
56 KN2_2 Not Used
59 KN1_2 Not Used
60 A02_S Not Used
61 PWM_1 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
62 PV_B2
63 H_OUT2 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
64 PV_B2
68 PCV_L Not Used
69 PWM_18
Metering Unit
70 PWM_16 Not Used
71 LIN_V WIF Pin 1
72 LIN Not Used
73 DYN3_M
ground
76 D3_S Start/Stop
79 D1_S Not Used
81 A13_S Not Used
83 A24_S Not Used
86 A21_S Not Used
Charge air pressure
throttle]
88 SGND Not Used
89 KN2_1 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
91 PV_B1


92 PWM_3 Not Used
93 PV_B1 Not Used
94 PWM_4 Not Used
95 PV_M Not Used
96 PWM_2 Not Used
97 PWM_15 Not Used
99 PWM_17 Not Used
102 SGND
103 SGND
Sensor ground
104 SGND
105 SGND
106 A30_S
107 D2_S Not Used
112 A25_S Not Used
115 A22_S Not Used
116 A08_S Not Used
118 A07_S Not Used
119 A19_S
120 A04_S PWM Fan Clutch Switch

Table 7.
MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector - DD15 Evolution
1 RPU_H
metering unit (PWM)
2 RPU_L
3 H_OUT1 Not Used
4 MV_B5F
5 MV_B5 Not Used
6 MV_B5D
7 MV_B5
8 MV_B5B
9 MV_B5 Not Used
10 MV_B4E
11 MV_B4 Not Used
12 MV_B4C
13 MV_B4
14 MV_B4A


15 MV_B4 Not Used
17 MV_B2 Not Used
21 MV_B2 Not Used
23 MV_B1 Not Used
27 MV_B1 Not Used
28 START_B Not Used
29 KN1_1 Not Used
30 A01_S Not Used
31 PWM_5 Not Used
34 PWM_8 Not Used
35 PWM_10 Wastegate Position
36 PWM_09 Not Used
Variable Speed Water
37 PWM_11
Pump
38 PV_M Wastegate VPOD
39 HSW2 Fuel Filter Water Separator
40 PCV_H Not Used
41 HSW1 Not Used
42 LSU_LS Not Used
43 DYN3_S
signal]
44 LSU_V Not Used
sensor signal]
46 D3_V Start/Stop
47 DYN4_S
sensor)
49 DYN5_S
Speed
50 SGND Turbo Speed GND
51 DYN1_S Turbo Speed Sensor


53 A23_S Not Used
56 KN2_2 Not Used
59 KN1_2 Not Used
60 A02_S Not Used
61 PWM_1 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
62 PV_B2
63 H_OUT2 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
64 PV_B2
68 PCV_L Not Used
69 PWM_18
Metering Unit
70 PWM_16 Not Used
71 LIN_V Not Used
72 LIN Not Used
73 DYN3_M
ground
76 D3_S Start/Stop
79 D1_S Not Used
81 A13_S Not Used
83 A24_S Not Used
Turbo Inlet Temperature
86 A21_S
Sensor
Charge air pressure
throttle]
Turbo Inlet Temperature
88 SGND
Sensor Ground
89 KN2_1 Not Used


SW and PWM Power
91 PV_B1
92 PWM_3 Not Used
93 PV_B1 Wastegate VPOD
94 PWM_4 Not Used
95 PV_M Not Used
96 PWM_2 Not Used
97 PWM_15 Not Used
99 PWM_17 Not Used
102 SGND
103 SGND
Sensor ground
104 SGND
105 SGND
106 A30_S
107 D2_S Not Used
112 A25_S Not Used
115 A22_S Not Used
116 A08_S Not Used
118 A07_S Not Used
119 A19_S
120 A04_S Not Used
Table 8.
1 RPU_H
metering unit (PWM)
2 RPU_L
3 H_OUT1 Not Used
4 MV_B5F
5 MV_B5 Not Used


6 MV_B5D
7 MV_B5
8 MV_B5B
9 MV_B5 Not Used
10 MV_B4E
11 MV_B4 Not Used
12 MV_B4C
13 MV_B4
14 MV_B4A
15 MV_B4 Not Used
17 MV_B2 Not Used
21 MV_B2 Not Used
23 MV_B1 Not Used
27 MV_B1 Not Used
28 START_B Not Used
29 KN1_1 Not Used
30 A01_S Not Used
31 PWM_5 Not Used
34 PWM_8 Not Used
35 PWM_10 Not Used
36 PWM_09 Not Used
37 PWM_11 Not Used
38 PV_M Not Used
39 HSW2 Not Used
40 PCV_H Not Used
41 HSW1 Not Used
42 LSU_LS Not Used


43 DYN3_S
signal]
44 LSU_V Not Used
sensor signal]
46 D3_V Not Used
47 DYN4_S
sensor)
49 DYN5_S
Speed
50 SGND Not Used
51 DYN1_S Not Used
53 A23_S Not Used
56 KN2_2 Not Used
59 KN1_2 Not Used
60 A02_S Not Used
61 PWM_1 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
62 PV_B2
63 H_OUT2 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
64 PV_B2
68 PCV_L Not Used
69 PWM_18
Metering Unit
70 PWM_16 Not Used
12V Power supply
71 LIN_V (Vbatt-0.25V max.15V) for
LIN sensors
72 LIN Not Used
73 DYN3_M Signal ground
76 D3_S Not Used


79 D1_S Not Used
81 A13_S Not Used
83 A24_S Not Used
86 A21_S Not Used
Charge air pressure
throttle]
88 SGND Not Used
89 KN2_1 Not Used
SW and PWM Power
91 PV_B1
92 PWM_3 Not Used
93 PV_B1 Not Used
94 PWM_4 Not Used
95 PV_M Not Used
96 PWM_2 Not Used
97 PWM_15 Not Used
99 PWM_17 Not Used
102 SGND
103 SGND
Sensor ground
104 SGND
105 SGND
106 A30_S
107 D2_S Not Used
112 A25_S Not Used
115 A22_S Not Used


116 A08_S Not Used
118 A07_S Not Used
119 A19_S
120 A04_S Not Used
6.1.1.2 Connector Brackets

The harnesses on MCM2.1 must be bracketed and held secure. The bracket design will change for different engines as the
routing is different. The 120-pin connector and the 21-pin connector must be tie-wrapped to the brackets as shown in the
following drawing:
1. 21-Pin Connector Bracket 3. 120-Pin Connector Bracket

2. Tie Wrap
Figure 5. 120-Pin Connector & 21-Pin Connector Tie-Wrapped to Brackets
6.1.1.3 MCM2.1 21-Pin Connector

The wiring for the VIH 21-pin to the MCM2.1 is listed in the following tables. The side of the connector shown is looking
into the pins.

Table 9.
MCM2.1 21-pin Connector - DD13, DD15, DD16
Pin Signal Type Function Connector
21/1 CAN2L Not Used
21/2 CAN2GND Not Used
21/3 CAN2H Not Used
21/5 KL31 Battery (-) (current demand 40A)
21/7 KL15 IGN
21/10 CAN1GND IES Motor CAN HF Ground
21/11 KL30 Battery (+) (current demand 40A)
21/13 CAN1H Powertrain CAN High Front
21/14 KL30 Battery (+) (current demand 40A) Looking into the Pins on
the Harness
21/16 CAN1GND Powertrain CAN Ground
21/17 — Not Used
21/18 KDiag_S Not Used
21/19 CAN1L Powertrain CAN Low
21/20 KL50 Crank Start Input
21/21 START_B Start Enable Output
Table 10.
21-Pin Connector to the MCM2.1 Part Numbers
Part DDC Part Number
Connector 1-1355222-8
1.0 - 2.5 mm Contact (single) 014 545 82 26
0.5 - 1.0 mm Contact (single) 014 545 83 26
Seal (2.2 -3.0 mm² insulation diameter) 000 545 29 39
Seal (1.2 -2.1 mm² insulation diameter) 000 545 28 39
Backshell 13940501
Cavity Plug 000 545 62 80
6.2 Common Powertrain Controller 4

The Common Powertrain Controller 4 (CPC4) has three 18-pin connectors and one 21-pin connector. The following sections
contain the connector pin-outs for truck, vocational, and fire truck applications.
The CPC4 is the interface between the MCM2.1 and the vehicle/equipment for engine control and manages other vehicle/
equipment functions.

Figure 6. Common Powertrain Controller 4 (CPC4)

The OEM is responsible for mounting this part in an enclosed, protected environment. The mounting bracket is the
responsibility of the OEM. There must be maximum physical separation of the VIH from other vehicle/equipment electrical
systems. Other electrical system wires should ideally be at least three feet away from the VIH and should not be parallel to
the VIH. This will eliminate coupling electromagnetic energy from other systems into the VIH.
Figure 7. CPC4 Dimensions
NOTE: The CPC4 should be mounted with the connectors pointing down.

Table 11.
Power Supply
Input voltage range BATT+ (U30) BATT+ Switched (IGN)
Operating Voltage 8 V .. 32 V acc.
Min voltage without RESET 5V
Max. Voltage 36V for 5min.
Jump start 48V for 5min.
Test voltage 24V variant: 28V; 12V variant: 14V
Stand by current at U30 < 1 mA; 12...24V
Max allowed current Batt+ 8A (2,5 mm² cable needed)
Max allowed current Batt- 10A (2,5 mm² cable needed)
Max allowed current IGN 1A
Qulescent Current (Sleep Mode) <1 mA
Temperature, vibration, and water intrusion must be considered.
• Temperature -- The ambient operating temperature range is -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F).
• Water Intrusion -- The CPC4 is not watertight and cannot be subject to water spray. It must be mounted in an enclosed,
protected environment.
6.2.1 CPC4 Vehicle Interface Harness

The following criteria are to be used when designing the VIH.
• The four vehicle connectors are designed to accept 18 AWG wires for all circuits.
• The conductor must be annealed copper, not aluminum, and must comply with the industry standard SAE J1128 document.
• Color code the wires as shown in the schematics. If the wires used are all one color, hot stamp the cavity number on the
wires.
NOTE: The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) wires must be a twisted pair. The twists are a minimum of 39 turns per
meter and are required to minimize electromagnetic field coupling.
NOTE: J1939 cable is required for the J1939 datalink wires. Refer to SAE J1939-11 spec for specific
requirements.
The proprietary Powertrain-CAN link between the MCM2.1, CPC4, and the ACM2.1 must be a twisted shielded cable with
0.75 mm diameter wire (approximately 20 AWG), bundle shielded with drain wire and 30 twists per meter (12 twists per
foot). The insulation is rated to 105°C (221°F). Termination resistors for the Powertrain-CAN link are located in the CPC4
and ACM2.1.
• The ACM2.1 requires battery power to power down after ignition is OFF.
• ACM2.1 must not be wired through to disconnect switch.
Frequency Input
The CPC4 has one frequency input on the VIH that can accept a variable reluctance sensor. A typical frequency input
functions is the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS). Requirements for a variable reluctance signal interface are listed in the
following table.

Table 12.
Variable Reluctance Signal Interface
Parameter Range
Input Amplitude Range V Peak to Peak
Input Frequency Range 0 to 10,000 Hz
Digital Inputs
These inputs are in low state by providing a connection to battery ground and placed in high state by providing an open
circuit.
Table 13.
Digital Input Requirements
High State: V in ≥ 2/3 Battery (+)
Low State: V in≤ 1/3 Battery (+)
Isink: Capable of sinking 5-20 mA
NOTE: Use switches that will not oxidize with the passage of time and environmental factors due to the low
source current.
Digital Outputs
There are 15 digital outputs located on the CPC4. The high power and low power outputs are listed in the following tables.
Table 14.
High Power Outputs
Connector Pin High Power Outputs Application
4 9 DO_HP_LS_03 OI Active Lamp/Water-in-Fuel

Indicator
3 17 DO_HP_LS_04 OI Alarm
3 7 DO_HP_FLEX_01 Top2 Lockout Solenoid/Allison

Modulation Valve
3 8 DO_HP_FLEX_02 Top2 Shift Solenoid
4 10 DO_HP_FLEX_03 Vehicle Power Shutdown/Ignition

Relay
3 9 DO_HP_LS_01 Water-in-Fuel Indicator
4 7 DO_HP_LS_02 High Exhaust System

Temperature Lamp

Table 15.
Low-side High Power Output Characteristics:
Resistance: 12 V - vehicle power: R > 8 ohms
Inductivity: ≤ 800 mH (if valve or relay load)
Capacity: ≤ 10 nF
Isink: Capable of sinking less than or equal to 2.0 A
Table 16.
Low Power Outputs
Connector Pin Low Power Outputs Application
1 13 DO_LP_FLEX_01 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
3 10 DO_LP_FLEX_02 DEF Low lamp
2 10 DO_LP_LS_05 Amber Warning Lamp (AWL)
3 12 DO_LP_FLEX_04 Fuel Filter Restriction Lamp
3 16 DO_LP_FLEX_05 Red Stop Lamp (RSL)
4 6 DO_LP_FLEX_06 Wait-to-Start Lamp
1 4 DO_LP_LS_02 Throttle Position Sensor Ground
1 5 DO_LP_LS_01 DPF Regeneration Lamp
Table 17.
Low-side Low Power Output Characteristics:
Resistance: 12 V - vehicle power: R > 64 ohms
Inductivity: < 1.3 H (if relay load)
Capacity: < 10 nF
Inrush Lamp Current: < 2.5 A
Isink: Capable of sinking less than or equal to 0.25 A
6.2.2 VIH Wiring

The OEM is responsible for the following wiring connectors to:
• Four CPC4 connectors
• One 21-pin connector to the MCM2.1
• One 10-pin connector to the Engine Harness
• One ACM2.1 120-pin connector
• One ACM2.1 21-pin connector
• Two 14-pin connectors to the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF/SCR) / or one 47-Pin
• One DEF doser valve connector
• One DEF pump connector
• One DEF Tank connector

6.2.2.1 VIH Wiring - Truck Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC4) #1 connector (18-pins) for truck applications and the
part numbers for the #1 connector, Key B and terminals are shown in the following tables. (The side of the connector shown
is looking into the pins.)
Table 18.
Connector #1 Pin Assignments - Truck Application
1/1 Digital Input_FLEX_01 Dual-speed Axle
1/2 Digital Input_FLEX_02 Park Brake Interlock
1/3 Digital Input_SFP_05 Not Used
1/4 Digital Output_LP_LS_02 Accelerator Pedal Sensor 1 Ground
1/5 Digital Output_LP_LS_01 DPF Regeneration Lamp
1/7 SFP_08 Accelerator Pedal Sensor 1
1/8 SFP_07 Accelerator Pedal Sensor 1 Supply
1/9 PWM_FPO_02 Tachometer
1/10 Digital Input_FLEX_20 Stop Engine / Aux Shutdown #1
Front
1/11 Digital Input_FLEX_08 Limiter 0
Looking into the Pins on the Harness
1/12 Digital Input_FLEX_03 Set / Coast Enable
1/13 Digital MIL Lamp
Output_LP_FLEX_01
1/14 Digital Input_FLEX_04 Cruise Control Enable
1/15 Digital Input_FLEX_05 Stop Engine Override
1/16 Digital Input_FLEX_06 Resume / Accel Enable
1/17 Digital Input_FLEX_07 Throttle Inhibit
1/18 SFP_01 Run Start
Table 19.
Connector #1, 18-pin Connector, Key B
CPC4 - 18 Pin Connector - B Key 018 545 67 26
CPC4 - socket 0.5-1.0mm wire (single) 013 545 76 26
part numbers for the #2 connector, Key A and terminals are shown in the following tables. (The side of the connector shown

Table 20.
2/1 Battery (+) PSU (KL_30) Main Battery +12 V
2/2 Battery (-) PSU (KL_31) Main Battery Ground
2/3 Battery (+) Switched PSU Ignition
2/4 LIN1 J 2602 Gear Selector
2/5 Not Used Not Used
2/7 Digital Input_FLEX_15 Service Brake Released Switch
2/8 Digital Input_FLEX_16 Remote Throttle Select Switch
2/9 Digital Input_FLEX_09 Remote PTO Switch
2/10 Digital Output_LP_LS_05 Amber Warning Lamp
Front
2/12 Digital Input_FLEX_11 A/C Status
2/13 Digital Input_FLEX_12 Fan Override
2/14 Digital Input_FLEX_13 Engine Brake Low
2/15 Digital Input_FLEX_14 Engine Brake Medium
2/16 VCAN_L_C J1939 (-)
2/17 VCAN_GND_C J1939 Shield
2/18 VCAN_H_C J1939 (+)
Table 21.
Connector #2, 18-pin Connector, Key A
CPC4 - 18 Pin Connector - A Key 013 545 64 26

Table 22.
3/1 Analog_In_01 OI Thermostat
3/2 Analog_GND Sensor Return
3/3 Analog__SUP_5V Sensor Supply
3/4 Analog_In_02 PTO
3/5 Analog_Out_01 Not Used
3/7 Digital Output_HP_FLEX_01 Top2 Lockout Solenoid
3/8 Digital Output_HP_FLEX_02 Top2 Shift Solenoid
3/9 Digital Output_HP_LS_01 WIF Lamp
3/10 Digital Output_LP_FLEX_02 DEF Low Lamp
Front
3/11 SFP_14 Low Coolant Level Sensor
3/12 Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04 Fuel Filter Restriction Lamp
3/13 SFP_09 Vehicle Speed (+)
3/14 SF_VGND Vehicle Speed (-)
3/15 Analog_In_SFP_13 Ambient Air Temp Sensor
3/16 Digital Output_LP_FLEX_05 Red Stop Lamp
3/17 Digital Output_HP_LS_04 OI Alarm
3/18 Digital Input_FLEX_22 Not Used
3/19 PTCAN_L 5V Powertrain CAN (-)
3/20 PTCAN_GND 5V Powertrain CAN Shield
3/21 PTCAN_H 5V Powertrain CAN (+)
Table 23.
CPC4 - 21-Pin Connector - A Key 013 545 65 26
part numbers for the #4 connector, Key C and terminals are shown in the following tables. (The side of the connector shown

Table 24.
4/6 Digital Output_LP_FLEX_06 Wait-to-Start Lamp
4/7 Digital Output_HP_LS_02 High Exhaust Temperature Lamp
4/8 Digital Input_FLEX_23 Clutch Released
4/9 Digital Output_HP_LS_03 OI Active Lamp / WIF
4/10 Digital Output_HP_FLEX_03 Vehicle Power Shutdown / IGN
Relay
Front
4/11 Not Used Not Used Looking into the Pins on the Harness
4/12 PWM_FPO_01 Vehicle Speed Output
4/13 Digital Input__FLEX_19 DPF Inhibit Switch
4/14 Analog Input_AI_03 Accelerator Pedal Sensor 2
4/16 Digital Input_FLEX_17 Trans Neutral Switch
4/17 Digital Input_FLEX_21 DPF Regeneration Switch
4/18 Digital Input_FLEX_18 Hood Tilt Switch
Table 25.
Connector #4, 18-pin Connector, Key C
CPC4 - 18-Pin Connector - C Key 018 545 68 26
6.2.2.2 VIH Wiring - Vocational Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC4) #1 connector (18-pin) for vocational applications and
the part numbers for the #1 connector, Key B and terminals are shown in the following tables. (The side of the connector
shown is looking into the pins.)

Table 26.
Connector #1 Pin Assignments - Vocational Application
1/1 Digital Input_FLEX_01 Dual-speed Axle
1/4 Digital Output_LP_LS_02 Accelerator Pedal Sensor
1 Ground
1/7 SFP_08 Accelerator Pedal Sensor
1
1/8 SFP_07 Accelerator Pedal Sensor
1 Supply
Front
1/10 Digital Input_FLEX_20 Stop Engine / Aux
Shutdown #1
1/13 Digital Output_LP_FLEX_01 MIL Lamp
Table 27.
The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC4) #2 connector (18-pins) for vocational applications and
the part numbers for the #2 connector, Key A and terminals are shown in the following tables. (The side of the connector

Table 28.
2/4 LIN1 K-line
2/7 Digital Input_FLEX_15 Service Brake Switch
2/8 Digital Input_FLEX_16 Remote Throttle Select Switch
2/9 Digital Input_FLEX_09 Remote PTO Switch
Front
2/16 VCAN_L_C J1939 (-)
2/18 VCAN_H_C J1939 (+)
Table 29.
the part numbers for the #3 connector, Key A and terminals are shown in the following tables. (The side of the connector

Table 30.
3/1 Analog_In_01 Not Used
3/7 Digital Output_HP_FLEX_01 Not Used
3/9 Digital Output_HP_LS_01 Not Used
Front
3/12 Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04 Fuel Filter Restriction Lamp
3/17 Digital Output_HP_LS_04 OI Alarm
Table 31.
the part numbers for the #4 connector, Key C and terminals are shown in the following tables. (The side of the connector

Table 32.
4/7 Digital Output_HP_LS_02 High Exhaust Temperature Lamp
4/9 Digital Output_HP_LS_03 Deceleration Lamp
4/11 Not Used Not Used Front
4/12 PWM_FPO_01 Vehicle Speed Output Looking into the Pins on the Harness

4/14 Analog Input_AI_03 Accelerator Pedal Sensor 2
4/18 Digital Input_FLEX_18 Engine Brake Disable
Table 33.
6.2.2.3 VIH Wiring - Coach Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC4) #1 connector (18-pin) for coach applications and the

Table 34.
Connector #1 Pin Assignments - Coach Application
1/1 Digital Input_FLEX_01 Transmission Retarder
Active
1/3 Digital Input_SFP_05 Idle Validation Switch 2
(throttle active)
1/4 Digital Output_LP_LS_02 Throttle Position Sensor
Ground
(idle active)
1/7 SFP_08 Throttle Position Sensor
1/8 SFP_07 Throttle Position Sensor Front
Supply Looking into the Pins on the Harness
1/10 Digital Input_FLEX_20 Retarder Level Stage 0
Table 35.
The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC4) #2 connector (18-pins) for coach applications and the

Table 36.
2/4 LIN1 K-line
2/7 Digital Input_FLEX_15 Service Brake Released Switch
Front
2/16 VCAN_L_C J1939 (-)
2/18 VCAN_H_C J1939 (+)
Table 37.

Table 38.
3/9 Digital Output_HP_LS_01 Not Used
Front
3/12 Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04 Low Battery Voltage Lamp
3/17 Digital Output_HP_LS_04 Starter Lockout/Run Signal
Table 39.
CPC4 - socket 1.0-2.5mm wire (strip) —

Table 40.
4/7 Digital Output_HP_LS_02 High Exhaust Temperature
Lamp
4/9 Digital Output_HP_LS_03 Deceleration Lamp
4/10 Digital Output_HP_FLEX_03 Vehicle Power Shutdown /
IGN Relay Front
4/11 Frequency_SFP_10 Not Used
4/12 PWM_FPO_01 Not Used
4/14 Digital Input_AI_03 Not Used
Table 41.
6.2.2.4 VIH Wiring - Fire Truck Applications

The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC4) #1 connector (18-pin) for fire truck applications and the

Table 42.
Connector #1 Pin Assignments - Fire Truck Application
1/1 Digital Input_FLEX_01 Transmission Retarder
Active
(throttle active)
1/4 Digital Output_LP_LS_02 Throttle Position Sensor
Ground
(idle active)
1/7 SFP_08 Throttle Position Sensor
1/8 SFP_07 Throttle Position Sensor Front
Supply Looking into the Pins on the Harness
Table 43.
The pin assignments for the Common Powertrain Controller (CPC4) #2 connector (18-pins) for fire truck applications and the

Table 44.
2/4 LIN1 K-line
2/8 Digital Input_FLEX_16 Remote Throttle Select
Switch
2/9 Digital Input_FLEX_09 Remote PTO Select Switch
2/10 Digital Output_LP_LS_05 Amber Warning Lamp Front
2/16 VCAN_L_C J1939 (-)
2/18 VCAN_H_C J1939 (+)
Table 45.

Table 46.
3/9 Digital Output_HP_LS_01 Water in Fuel
Front
3/12 Digital Output_LP_FLEX_04 Low Oil Pressure Lamp
3/17 Digital Output_HP_LS_04 Low Coolant Lamp
Table 47.

Table 48.
4/7 Digital Output_HP_LS_02 High Exhaust Temperature
Lamp
4/9 Digital Output_HP_LS_03 Cruise Active Lamp
4/10 Digital Output_HP_FLEX_03 Engine Brake Active
Front
4/11 Frequency_SFP_10 Not Used Looking into the Pins on the Harness
4/12 PWM_FPO_01 Not Used
4/14 Digital Input_AI_03 Not Used
4/16 Digital Input_FLEX_17 Neutral Switch
Table 49.
6.2.2.5 Wire Resistances

VIH power terminals require 14 AWG wire. The total resistance of the power harness cannot exceed 60 mΩ. The
characteristics for Teflon coated and GXL type wire gauges are shown in table below.
Table 50.
Wire Characteristics
SAE Wire Gauge Metric Gauge # Area mm² Resistance Resistance mΩ /ft. Resistance mΩ /ft. Diameter mm
mΩ/m @ 20°C (68°F) @120°C (248°F)
16 1 1.129 15.300 4.66 6.50 0.72
14 2 1.859 9.290 2.83 3.94 1.18
12 3 2.929 5.900 1.80 2.50 1.86
10 5 4.663 3.720 1.13 1.58 2.97
8 8 7.277 2.400 0.73 1.02 4.63

Total power harness resistance is determined by shorting together the eight terminals in the ECU connector, and then
measuring the resistance from the battery (+) to battery (-) terminal at the maximum operating temperature of 105°C (221°F).
Disconnect the harness from the batteries before measuring the resistance.
6.2.2.6 Communications - SAE J1939 Data Link

SAE J1939 Data Link+, SAE J1939 Data Link-, and SAE J1939 Data Link Shield are used as the J1939 communication link.
J1939 cable is required for the J1939 data link. Termination resistors are required per the SAE specification. Refer to SAE
J1939-11 for specific requirements.
Communications to a Scan Tool: All OBD control modules (e.g., engine, auxiliary emission control module) on a single
vehicle shall use the same protocol for communication of required emission-related messages from on-board to off-board
network communications to a scan tool meeting SAE J1939 network requirements.
The OBD system shall use the following standardized protocol: SAE J1939. This protocol may only be used on vehicles with
diesel engines.
Vehicle Identification Number: All vehicles shall have the vehicle identification number (VIN) available in a standardized
format through the standardized data link connector in accordance with SAE J1939 specifications. Only one electronic
control unit per vehicle shall report the VIN to an SAE J1939 scan tool.
If the VIN is reprogrammed, all emission-related diagnostic information identified shall be erased in conjunction with
reprogramming of the VIN.
NOTICE: The communication system operation will degenerate if the wrong cable is used.
The CPC4 connector pin assignments for SAE J1939 are listed in the following table.
Table 51.
J1939 CPC4 to VIH Connector Pin Assignments
Pin Signal Type Function
2/18 Data Link SAE J1939 (+)
2/17 Data Link J1939 Shield
2/16 Data Link SAE J1939 (-)
The following SAE documents cover the SAE J1939 Data Link. Contact the Society of Automotive Engineers to obtain
documents.
Table 52.
SAE Document Numbers
SAE J1939 Top Layer (Overview)
SAE J1939/11 Physical Layer
SAE J1939/21 Data Link Layer
SAE J1939/71 Vehicle Application Layer
SAE J1939/01 Truck and Bus Applications
SAE J1939/73 Application Layer — Diagnostics
J1939 cable is available from the following sources:

Table 53.
Belden Electronics Division Tyco Electronics Corporation
2200 U.S. 27 South Raychem Wire & Harnessing
Richmond, IN 47374 300 Constitution Drive
Phone: 1-650-361-3333 Menlo Park, CA 94025
www.belden.com www.raychem.com
6.2.2.7 Communications - Proprietary Powertrain-CAN Data Link

The proprietary Powertrain-CAN link between the CPC4, TCM, MCM2.1, and ACM2.1 must be a twisted shielded cable
with 0.75 mm diameter wire (approximately 20 AWG), bundle shielded with drain wire and 30 twists per meter (12 twists per
foot). The insulation is rated to 105°C (221°F). Termination resistors for the Powertrain-CAN link are located in the CPC4
and ACM2.1. See figure below for typical PT CAN inter connections.
Figure 8. Typical Quad Star-Point Bus

Table 54.
Proprietary Powertrain CAN Data Link Connections
TCM Pin No. (Detroit CPC4 Pin No. MCM2.1 Pin No. ACM2.1 Pin No.
Trans Only)
Powertrain-CAN Data 1/10 3/21 21/13 21/10
Link (+)
Link (-)
Link (Ground/Shield)
Link (Ground/Shield)
120 OHM Termination NO YES NO YES
Resistor
(Internal to ECMs)
NOTE: PTCAN1 Baud rate is increased to 667K for 2013.
6.2.3 Power Supply - 12 Volt System

Normal operating voltage on a 12 V system for the CPC4, ACM2.1 and MCM2.1 is 11-16 VDC.
NOTICE: Operating the CPC4, ACM2.1 or MCM2.1 over the voltage limits of 16 volts will cause damage to the
CPC4, ACM2.1 or MCM2.1.
Operating the CPC4 and/or MCM2.1 between 8 and 11 volts may result in degraded engine operation. (Transient operation in
this range during engine starting is considered normal for 12 volt systems.)
NOTICE: Reversing polarity will cause damage to the CPC4 and/or MCM2.1 if the Power Harness is not properly
fused.
NOTE: All output loads, ignition and CPC4, ACM2.1 and MCM2.1 power must be powered from the same battery
voltage source.
Average Current Draw

The maximum average current draw is listed in the following table. This information should be used to size the alternator.
Table 55.
System Maximum Average Current Draw (12 V Nominal Supply)
Crank Idle Full Load/Rated Speed
MCM2.1 - Engine Loads 4.0 A avg 21.0 A avg 25.0 A avg
CPC4 - Vehicle Loads* 1 (one) Avg 120ma Avg 8 A avg
*Vehicle loads are controlled by the OEMs who can best determine the total maximum current draw for their installation.
The current draw for a CPC4 configuration is listed in the following table.

Table 56.
Current Draw for CPC4 Configuration
Configuration Condition Current
CPC4 Ignition Off <1 mA
Ignition On and Engine Stopped 120 mA
The current draw for an MCM2.1 is listed in the following table.
Table 57.
Current Draw for MCM2.1 Configuration
Configuration Condition Current
MCM2.1 Ignition Off <1 mA
Ignition On and Engine Stopped 400 mA
Overall maximum ACM2.1 current capability is 50.0 amps.
Table 58.
Loads ACM2.1 Current Capability - amps
Actual Load ACM2.1 Capability
Imax (avg) Imax (pk) Imax (avg) Imax (pk)
ACM2.1 Quiescent Draw 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Sensors 0.2 0.2 0.3 0.3
NOx1 — engine out 1.0 12.0 8.0 16.0
NOx2 — tailpipe out 1.0 12.0 8.0 16.0
Pump 0.5 1.0 2.0 2.0
Injector 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Diffuser Heater 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Engine Coolant Solenoid 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Electric Line Heaters 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0
Total 19.2 41.7 34.8 50.8
6.2.3.1 Battery Isolator

A battery isolator is not required. However, some applications require a battery that is dedicated to the engine and completely
isolated from the rest of the vehicle. Commercially available battery isolators can be used.
6.2.3.2 Main Power Shutdown

The main power supply shutdown schematic shows the DDC-approved method for main power switch implementation.

Figure 9. Main Power Supply Shutdown
NOTE: Switches must remain closed for 30 seconds after ignition is off for the MCM2.1 and CPC4 to write non-
volatile data.
NOTE: It is recommended that both the positive (+) and negative (-) battery leads be disconnected.
NOTE: Disconnecting positive power is not sufficient to isolate the CPC4 for welding purposes.
NOTICE: When welding, the following must be done to avoid damage to the electronic controls or the engine:
• Both the positive (+) and negative (-) battery leads must be disconnected before welding.
• The welding ground wire must be in close proximity to welding location; the engine must never be used as a
grounding point.
• Welding on the engine or engine-mounted components is NEVER recommended.
NOTE: The alternator should be connected directly to the battery for isolation purposes.
6.2.4 Fuses
A Battery (+) fuse and an ignition circuit fuse must be provided by the vehicle wiring harness. Blade-type automotive fuses
are normally utilized; however, manual or automatic reset circuit breakers which meet the following requirements are also
acceptable. The fuse voltage rating must be compatible with the CPC4 - MCM2.1’s maximum operating voltage of 16 volts.
The ignition fuse current rating must be sized for the loads utilized in each application; however, a rating of between 5 and 10
amps is usually sufficient.
The Battery (+) fuse current rating must satisfy two criteria:
• Must not open during normal operation
• Must open before the MCM2.1 or CPC4 is damaged during a reverse battery condition
Bussmann ATC-30 and Delphi Packard Electric Systems MaxiFuse 30 amp rated fuses or equivalent will satisfy these
requirements. Acceptable blow times versus current and temperature derating characteristics are listed in the following two
tables:

Table 59.
Fuse Current and Blow Time
% of Rated Fuse Current Minimum Blow Time Maximum Blow Time
100% 100 hours —
135% 1 minute 30 minutes
200% 6 seconds 40 seconds
Table 60.
Fuse Temperature and Current
Temperature % of Rated Fuse Current
-40°C (-40°F) 110% max
+25°C (77°F) 100%
+120°C (248°F) 80% min
6.3 Aftertreatment Control Module2.1

The Aftertreatment Control Module (ACM2.1) is a further development of the current frame module with increased capacity
for inputs, outputs, and up to four CAN interfaces. The ACM2.1 controls the DEF dosing for exhaust gas aftertreatment as an
independent ECU of Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) functionality.
1. 21-pin Connector 2. 120-pin Connector

Figure 10. Aftertreatment Control Module 2.1
All power supply lines from the vehicle and powertrain CAN are connected with the 21-pin connector. The sensors and
actuators use the 120-pin connector
Cooling
The ACM2.1 does not use a liquid cooler so the cover of the cooler has been removed. The power dissipation depends on the
mounting location and the maximum ambient temperature. Mounting locations and ambient conditions are important.
Temperature Conditions
The ACM2.1 is designed for working with a housing temperature between -40°C (-40°F)and +105°C (221°F).

In maximum mode, the ACM2.1 can drive 19 outputs and five high side supplies with peak current up to 40 Amps. This
means a maximum power dissipation of approximately 100 W. In this case there is a high risk of thermal overstress. OEM
must control ambient temperature to meet (histogram) requirements. Environmental mounting space temperature around
ACM2.1 must not exceed-40°C (-40°F) to +85°C (185°F).
NOTICE: The maximum temperature of the ACM2.1 housing must not exceed 105° C (221° F). Exceeding the
ACM2.1 maximum temperature under full load will cause irreversible damage inside the ECU.
ACM2.1 Max Vibration Threshold: Acceleration levels in each axis should not exceed the limit profile below.
Table 61.
ACM2.1 Max Vibration Threshold
Frequency (Hz) Displacement (mm) Acceleration (g)
5 10 1.0
10 10 4.0
400 — 4.0
ACM2.1 Mounting
The ACM2.1 is mounted with four screws and requires ISO mount damping elements.
When mounting the ACM2.1, follow these tips:
• Headers or harness bundles should not point up to prevent potential water pooling.
• Protect against mechanical damage to the maximum extent possible.
• Isolator mounts are required for electrical, thermal, and vibration isolation from the chassis.
• Harness bundle strain relief must be provided via the housing bosses.
• ACM2.1 mounting space must protect the ACM2.1 against stone impact, using as a step, or similar forces.
• ACM2.1 must be mounted no more than 60° from vertical as illustrated.

Figure 11. ACM2.1 Mounting
NOTE: Do NOT ground the ACM2.1 housing. This can result in false codes being logged.
• The ACM2.1 requires battery power at all times.

• The ACM2.1 must not be wired through to disconnect switch (unless required).
• The ACM2.1 is water and road spray resistant.
ACM2.1 Electrical Limits

The Electrical Limits for the ACM2.1 are found in the following table.
Table 62.
Operating Range
Full Functionality 10.5 V ≤ VBatt ≤ 30V
Restricted Functionality 9 V ≤ VBatt ≤ 10.5 V
30 V ≤ VBatt ≤ 35 V
Over voltage shut down of Micro controller > 35 V
Maximum DC Voltage 55 V
Reverse battery protection V < 35 V
Current consumption maximum ~ 40A

Operating Range
Quiescent current < 1 mA
(Current after IGN OFF)
Typical current consumption ~ 0.5 A
(no actuators driven)
Maximum power dissipation ~ 100 W
Temperature range (housing) -40 to 105°C (-40°F to 221°F)
Table 63.
21-Pin Connector to the ACM2.1
21/3 Vbatt_MINUS Battery (-) Ground
21/10 Powertrain CAN_H Powertrain CAN High
21/11 Vbatt_PLUS Battery (+)
21/13 Powertrain CAN_GND Powertrain CAN Ground
21/16 K15 Ignition Front

21/20 Powertrain CAN_L Powertrain CAN Low
6.3.1 Aftertreatment and SCR System

The exhaust Aftertreatment System (ATS) is designed for use in heavy duty commercial vehicles, which are in compliance
with the EPA 2013 exhaust emission standards. ATS electronic functions are regulated by the ACM2.1.
The ATS includes a Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) for pretreatment of the gas and active regeneration oxidation of
injected HC, a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) for particulate matter filtration and regeneration, a vanadium-free Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) subsystem for nitric oxides (NOx) conversion and an ammonia slip catalyst (ASC).

Figure 12. 1-BOX™ System
Figure 13. 2013 1-BOX™ Unit

Figure 14. Two-BOX System
Figure 15. Two-BOX Unit (Vertical Mount)
Figure 16. Two-BOX Unit (Vertical Mount)

The ATS design will include either a modular system which consists of one separate DOC + DPF and SCR + Slip unit or an
integrated system where both DPF and SCR subsystems are contained in a single housing. The two subsystems will be
connected by a pipe when modular. In an effort to reduce system back pressure, the SCR unit is to have a minimum of two
parallel paths for the exhaust gas to flow through. The DPF subsystem will require HC injection into the exhaust gases for
active regeneration of the filter.
NOTE: Personnel who will come in contact with DEF must read the Material Safety Data Sheet that should
accompany its delivery.
The functions of the DPF unit are:

• Filtration of the particulate emission
• Regeneration of the DPF via conversion of the HCs on the pre-DOC

• Possibility of DPF ash-cleaning within the scope of the service interval

• Oxidation of the possible HC-slip after the DPF on the DPF coating (or post-DOC) and generation of a sufficient quantity
of NO2 for the demanded SCR performance
The functions of the SCR unit are:
• Conversion of the NOx emission to harmless nitrogen (N 2and water vapor (H 2O)
• Oxidation of the possible ammonia-slip after the SCR catalysts on the DOC-S3
• Noise reduction
Figure 17. 1-BOX™ System

System Responsibility
The system responsibility for system components is shown in the following table:
NOTE: OEM is responsible to procure ALL components listed for proper system function. Also, OEM is
responsible to obtain from supplier those components listed.
NOTE: DDC is responsible to obtain only those components listed.

Table 64.
System Responsibility for Aftertreatment
DDC Responsibility OEM Responsibility
DEF Pump DEF Tank
DEF Metering Unit DEF Tank Level Sensor
ACM2.1 DEF Tank Temperature Sensor
ATS DEF Coolant Lines
— ATS Frame Mount
— Vehicle Interface Harnesses
— Coolant Water Valve
— DEF Line Electric Heaters
— Mechanical Interface Connectors
— DEF Quality Sensor

Figure 18. 2013 Aftertreatment Wiring Definition
6.4 Vehicle Interface Wiring

The OEM-supplied VIH power wiring (shown in the following graphic) supplies 12 volts to the CPC4, ACM2.1, and
MCM2.1. The system must be sourced directly from the battery. The terminals are designed to accept 14 AWG wire with an
insulation diameter of 3.2 mm minimum and 5.6 mm maximum.
• ACM2.1 requires battery power at all times
• ACM2.1 must not be wired through the disconnect switch
NOTICE: Powering the ACM2.1 module through the cut-off switch is not recommended, as the module may not
be able to complete the DEF purge cycle. If a negative disconnect switch is required for safety reasons, a Post
Run Indicator lamp must be used.

Figure 19. Power Wiring

Power and ground must be sourced directly from the battery. An electrically solid connection to the battery or bus bar is
required so the battery can filter electrical noise from the power lines. Power for other vehicle systems must not be sourced
from the VIH power wires. Do not use chassis ground.
NOTE: The ground wire must be electrically separate from chassis ground.
Power and ground bus bars may be used. The bus bar must be connected to the battery posts with 0 AWG or larger wire
depending upon the total vehicle current requirement. The connecting wires must be as short as possible to minimize circuit
resistance. Do not connect the ground wire to the chassis ground. The bus bar and all related ACM2.1, MCM2.1 and CPC4
ground circuitry must not be any part of the chassis ground circuit.
Provide maximum physical separation of the VIH power wiring from other vehicle electrical systems. Other electrical system
wires should ideally be at least three feet away from the VIH power wiring and should not be parallel to the VIH power
wiring. This will eliminate coupling electromagnetic energy from other systems into the VIH power wiring.
NOTICE: Connection to reverse polarity will damage the system if not properly fused.
A 40-amp fuse must be used and installed as close to the battery as possible.
The conductor must be annealed copper not aluminum and must comply with the industry standard, SAE J1128 .Contact the
Society of Automotive Engineers to obtain documents.

Splices must be soldered and sealed with a waterproof insulator. Alpha FIT-300, Raychem TAT-125 or any equivalent heat
shrink - dual wall epoxy encapsulating adhesive polyolefin is required.
Detroit Diesel Corporation recommends color coding. Alternatively, wires may be hot stamped with the cavity number.
6.4.1 VIH to MCM2.1 Connector Wiring

The wiring for the 21-pin MCM2.1 connector and the 10-pin engine harness connector are listed in the tables below. The side
of the connectors shown are looking into the pins.
Table 65.
21-pin Connector to the MCM2.1
21/1 CAN2L Not Used
21/3 CAN2H Not Used
21/7 KL15 IGN
21/10 CAN1GND IES Motor CAN HF Ground
21/13 CAN1H Powertrain CAN High Front
21/14 KL30 Battery (+) (current demand 40A) Looking into the Pins on
the Harness
21/16 CAN1GND Powertrain CAN Ground
21/17 — Not Used
21/18 KDiag_S Not Used
21/19 CAN1L Powertrain CAN Low
21/20 KL50 Crank Start Input
21/21 START_B Start Enable Output
Table 66.
21-Pin Connector to the MCM2.1 Part Numbers
Connector 1-1355222-8
1.0 - 2.5 mm Contact (single) 1–968859–3
0.5 - 1.0 mm Contact (single) 1–968855–3
Seal (2.2 -3.0 mm² insulation diameter) 1–828905–1
Seal (1.2 -2.1 mm² insulation diameter) 1–828904–1
Backshell 1–394050–1
Cavity Plug 1–828922–1

Table 67.
10-Pin Engine Controller-OEM
Pin Circuit MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector
1 Supply of the SW and PWM- 91
output (High side)
2 Fan 1 98
3 Fan 2 33
4 Sensor fan speed (hall sensor) 47
5 Sensor Ground 114
6 Sensor Power Supply 85
7 Not Used 120
8 Not Used Not Used
9 Not Used Not Used
10 Not Used Not Used
Table 68.
10-Pin Vehicle Chassis Connector
Part FCI Part Number
10-Pin Connector 54201009
Terminal (18 & 20 AGW) 54001803
Terminal (14 & 16 AGW) 54001403
Cavity Plug 54200005
6.4.2 VIH to ACM2.1 Connector Wiring

Figure 20. ACM2.1 120-Pin Connector
Table 69.
ACM2.1 120-Pin Connector
1 HS1_SCR High Side Digital Output 1 (+12V)
2 RO_Pin02_DPF Not Used
6 Elect_1_heating DEF Line Htr 1 Cont Sig
8 RO_Pin08_SCR DEF Tank Cool Vlv Cont Sig
10 VLS_soot Not Used
11 SGND_RSa_02_DPF Not Used
12 SV_APS Not Used
14 RO_Pin14_SCR Not Used
16 Elect_5_heating Gen Heater
17 HS2_SCR Not Used
19 HS4_SCR DEF Tank Cool Vlv Sply (+12V)
20 Pump_AdB DEF Pump Cont Sig
21 HS2_DPF Not Used


22 MH_MDU Diff Heater
23 HS2_DPF Not Used
25 HS2_DPF Not Used
26 CV_APS Comp Air Vlv Cont Sig
27 T1V_DPF DOC Temp Out Sig
28 DV_MDU Dosing Valve
29 T1b_DOC2 Not Used
30 SGND_T1b_DOC2 Not Used
31 KI.15_out Not Used
33 KI.15_out Not Used
34 CV_Heat_AdB DEF Tank Cool Vlv Cont Sig
36 1939_CAN_H Not Used
37 RO_Pin37_SCR Not Used
38 1939_CAN_GND Not Used
40 Sensor_CAN_H NOx Snsr 2 CAN 4-H
41 Sensor_CAN_L NOx Snsr 2 CAN 4-L
42 Sensor_CAN_GND_VS NOx Snsr 2 SPLY (+12V)
43 Sensor_CAN_GND NOx Snsr 2 GND
44 Sensor_CAN_H Not Used
45 Sensor_CAN_L Not Used
46 Sensor_CAN_GND_VS Not Used
47 Sensor_CAN_GND DEF Tank Ground (Digital DEF Tank)
48 Sensor_CAN_H CAN Sensor High (Digital DEF Tank)
49 Sensor_CAN_L CAN Sensor Low (Digital DEF Tank)
50 Sensor_CAN_GND_VS NOx Snsr 1 Sply (12+V)
51 Sensor_CAN_GND NOx Snsr 1 GND
52 Sensor_CAN_H CAN 4-H
53 Sensor_CAN_L CAN 4-L
54 Sensor CAN_GND_VS Not Used
55 Sensor_CAN-GND Not Used
58 Sensor_CAN_GND_VS Not Used
59 Sensor_CAN_GND Not Used
62 Sensor_CAN_GND_VS DEF Tank Power (Digital DEF Tank)
63 RH_T_T Not Used
65 1939_CAN_L Not Used


66 1939_CAN_GND_VS Not Used
67 RH_T_H Not Used
72 P2_DPF DPF Press Out Sig
73 SGND_T1_DPF DOC Temp Out Gnd
74 P_Air_MDU Dosing Unit Air Press Sig
75 SGND_T1_SCR SCR Temp IN Gnd
76 T1_SCR SCR Temp IN Sig
77 SGND_T21_SCR SCR Temp OUT Gnd
78 T2_SCR SCR Temp OUT Sig
79 SGND_RSp_01_SCR Not Used
80 RSp_01_SCR Not Used
81 SGND_RSp_01_DPF Not Used
82 SGND_RSp_02_SCR Not Used
83 RSp_02_SCR Not Used
84 V_SENS2 DEF/Air Press Sply (+5V)
85 T_AdB_MDU Dosing Unit Air Temp Sig
86 SGND_T_AdB_MDU Dosing Unit Air Temp Gnd
87 P1_DPF DOC Press IN Sig
88 SGND_P DPF Press Sens Gnd
89 RSp_02_DPF Not Used
90 RH_T_H_GND Not Used
91 RSa_01_DPF Not Used
92 Sensor_CAN_GND Not Used
95 RSa_02_DPF Not Used
97 T2_DPF DPF Temp OUT Sig
98 SGND_T1_DOC_2 DPF Temp OUT Gnd
99 SGND_P_AdB_MDU DEF/Air Press Sig Gnd
100 P_AdB_MDU DEF Press Sig
102 SGND_T_AdB_Tank DEF Tank Temp / Lvl Gnd (Analog DEF
Tank)
103 T_AdB_Tank DEF Tank Temp Sig (Analog DEF Tank)
104 SGND_Soot Not Used
105 Soot Not Used
106 HS4_SCR Not Used
107 T1_DOC_1 DOC Temp IN Sig
108 SGND_T1_DOC_1 DOC Temp IN Gnd


109 L_AdB_Tank DEF Tank Level Sig (Analog DEF Tank)
110 HS4_SCR Not Used
111 T1b_DPF Not Used
112 SGND_T1b_DPF Not Used
113 RSa_01_SCR Not Used
114 SGND_RSa_01_SCR Not Used
117 SENS1_V DPF Press Sens Sply (+5V)
118 RSp_01_DPF Not Used
Table 70.
120-Pin ACM2.1 Vehicle Harness Connector
Part Supplier TYCO Part Number
120-Pin Connector 1418421– 1
Terminal (18 & 20 AGW) 1241380–3
Cavity Plug 963531–1
Cable Seal 963530– 1
ACM2.1 21–pin Connector

The wiring for the ACM2.1 21-pin connector is shown in the following table. The side of the connector shown is looking into
the pins.

Table 71.
21-Pin Connector to the ACM2.1
21/10 Powertrain CAN_H Powertrain CAN High
21/16 K15 Ignition Front

21/20 Powertrain CAN_L Powertrain CAN Low
Table 72.
21-Pin ACM2.1 Vehicle Harness Connector
Part Supplier TYCO Part Number
21-Pin Connector 1-1355222-8
Terminal (18 & 20 AGW) 1- 968876- 1
Cavity Plug 828922- 1
Seals 828905-1
ACM2.1 to ATS
The wiring for the Aftertreatment System (ATS) to the VIH is shown below in the following diagrams:

Figure 21. 2V2 Two-Can Wiring System Schematic

Figure 22. Boxless 1US System Schematic

Figure 23. 2HV Two-Can Wiring System Schematic

Figure 24. 2HH Two-Can Wiring System Schematic

Table 73.
14-PIN (A KEYING) DPF / DOC Connector
Pin Signal Type ACM2.1 Pin Connector
1 DOC Inlet Temp 107
2 DOC Inlet Temp GND 108
3 DOC Outlet Temp 27
4 DOC Outlet Temp GND 73
5 DPF Outlet Temp 97
6 DPF Outlet Temp GND 98
7 GND (DPF PSI) 88
8 5V Sensor Supply (DPF PSI) 117
9 DOC Inlet Pressure 87
10 DPF Outlet Pressure 72
11 12V NOx Sensor Supply 50
12 CAN H 52
13 CAN L 53
14 NOx GND 51
Table 74.
14-PIN (B KEYING) SCR Connector
1 Not Used —
2 12V Sensor Supply 42
3 CAN H 40
4 Not Used Not Used
5 CAN L 41
6 GND 43
7 Not Used Not Used
8 GND 75
9 SCR Inlet Temp 76
13 GND 77
14 SCR Outlet Temp 78

Table 75.
Pierce 2HH Level Box 14-PIN (A KEYING) DPF/DOC/SCR Connector (OEM Responsibility)
1 DOC Inlet Temp 107
2 DOC Inlet Temp GND 108
3 DOC Outlet Temp 27
4 DOC Outlet Temp GND 73
5 DPF Outlet Temp 97
6 DPF Outlet Temp GND 98
7 GND (DPF PSI) 88
8 5V Sensor Supply (DPF PSI) 117
9 DOC Inlet Pressure 87
10 DPF Outlet Pressure 72
11 SCR Inlet Temp GND 75
12 SCR Inlet Temp 76
13 SCR Outlet Temp GND 77
14 SCR Outlet Temp 78
Table 76.
14-Pin DOC/DPF Vehicle Harness A Connector
Part FCI Part Number
14-Pin Connector 54201412
Terminal (18 & 20 AGW) 54001803
Cavity Plug 54200005
Table 77.
47-Pin Connector
1 Not Used Not Used
2 DOC Temp IN Sig 107
3 DOC Temp IN Gnd 108
4 Not Used Not Used
5 Not Used Not Used
6 Not Used Not Used
7 DOC Temp OUT Sig 27
8 DOC Temp OUT Gnd 73
9 SCR Temp IN Sig 76
10 SCR Temp IN Gnd 75

47-Pin Connector
11 DPF Press Sens Gnd (2HH & 88

2HV)
12 DOC Press IN Sig 87
13 DPF Press Sens Sply (+5V) 117

(2HH & 2HV)
14 NOx Snsr 1 Sply (+12V) 50
15 CAN 4-H 52
16 CAN 4-L 53
17 NOx Snsr 1 Gnd 51
18 DPF Temp OUT Gnd 98
19 DPF Temp OUT Sig 97
20 DPF Press Sens Gnd (2V2 & 88

1US)
21 DPF Press OUT Sig 72
22 DPF Press Sens Sply (+5V) 117

(2V2 & 1US)
23 NOx Snsr 2 Sply (+12V) 42
24 NOx Snsr 2 CAN 4-H 40
25 NOx Snsr 2 CAN 4-L 41
26 NOx Snsr 2 Gnd 43
27 SCR Temp OUT Gnd 77
28 SCR Temp OUT Sig 78
29 DEF Press Sig 100
30 DEF / Air Press Sig Gnd 99
31 DEF / Air Press Sply (+5V) 84
35 High Side Digital Output 1 3

(+12V)
36 Dosing Valve 28
37 Not Used 33
38 Diff Heater 22

47-Pin Connector
Table 78.
47–Pin Connector Part Numbers
Part Part Number Manufacturer
DPF/SCR Side 47-Pin Connector HDP24–24–47PE Deutsch
Vehicle Side 47-Pin Connector HDP24–24–47SE Deutsch
16 AGW Terminal Pin 0460–202–1631 Deutsch
16 AGW Terminal Socket 0462–201–1631 Deutsch
20 AGW Terminal Pin 0460–202–2031 Deutsch
20 AGW Terminal Socket 0462–201–2031 Deutsch
16 AGW Plug 0413–217–1605 Deutsch
20 AGW Plug 0413–204–2005 Deutsch
Nut 2411–001–2405 Deutsch
Lock Washer 2414–002–1886 Deutsch
16 AGW Terminal Removal Tool 0411–310–1605 Deutsch
20 AGW Terminal Removal Tool 0411–240–2005 Deutsch
ACM2.1 to Coolant Valve and DEF Line Heaters - OEM Sourced
Table 79.
DEF Coolant Valve Specification
Parameter Value Remark
Nominal Current 1.5A 2.0A-Max@12V
Output Voltage 0V ... 0.6V On Status
Output Clamping Voltage 50V ... 60V Off Status
Supplied from HS4_SCR ACM2.1 Pin 19
C1 15nF EMC-Cap
PWM frequency 1kHz —
PWM range 0%, 5% ... 95%, 100% —
Located in Low Side Driver I0502
Input Protection Short to Ground and VBatt
Diagnosis Short to Ground, Short to VBatt, overloaded, open load

DEF Coolant Valve Specification
Threshold Open Load U min=2.3V U typ=3V U max=3.7V Diagnostic Current < 2mA
Threshold Short to GND U min=1.6V U typ=2.0V U max=2.5V Diagnostic Current < 2mA
Threshold short to UBatt/Overloaded I min+4.5A I typ=6A I max=9A Self Limited
Signal Name Signal Pin Description
HS4_SCR Supply 19 13/23 Gal DEF Tank - Coolant VLV (+12V)

Pin 4
6 Gal DEF Tank - Coolant VLV (+12V) Pin 3
RO_Pin08_SCR 34 13/23 Gal DEF Tank - Coolant VLV Control

Signal Pin 1
6 Gal DEF Tank - Coolant VLV Control
Signal Pin 1
NOTE: DEF Coolant Valve and Connectors are OEM Responsibility

Table 80.
DEF Line Heaters
Nominal Current ACM2.1 1.5A 2.0A max @ 12V
Nominal Current ACM1 3.0A 3.0A max @ 12V
Output Voltage 0V ... 1.0V On Status
Output Clamping Voltage 45V ... 60V Off Status
Supplied from HS3_SCR ACM2.1 Pins 9 and 15
C1 15nF EMC-Cap
Located in Low Side Driver I0517
Input Protection Short to Ground and VBatt
Diagnosis Short to Ground, Short to VBatt, overloaded, open load
Threshold Open Load U min=2.3V U typ=3V U max=3.7V Diagnostic Current < 2mA
Threshold Short to GND U min=1.6V U typ=2.0V U max=2.5V Diagnostic Current < 2mA
Threshold short to UBatt/Overloaded I min+4.5A I typ=6A I max=9A Self Limited
Signal Name ACM2.1 Signal Pin Description
Elect_1_heating 6 3A Line heater 1 pin 1
HS3_SCR Supply 9 Line heater 1 pin 2
HS3_SCR Supply 15 Line heater 3 pin 2

Line heater 4 pin 2
NOTE: Maximum allowable Amperage for each circuit must not be exceeded.
NOTE: The DEF Coolant Valve and Connectors are OEM responsibility.
ACM2.1 to DEF Tank - OEM Sourced

Any deviation from the DDC specification must be approved and reviewed by DDC Engineering.

Table 81.
DEF Tank Level Sensor
Signal Name ACM2.1 Signal Pin Description
A25_S X120 / 109 Sensor signal: L_AdB_Tank
SGND 102 Sensor ground
Measuring accuracy ≤ 2.5% Voltage between input pin and SGRD
Measuring range 0.1V - 2.9V 3V pull-up
Resolution 5% —
Table 82.
DEF Tank Level Sensor Range
% DEF Available (Usable) Voltage Nominal [V] Resistance
100% 2.70 19804
100% 2.59 13764
95% 2.47 10284
90% 2.36 8074
85% 2.24 6534
80% 2.13 5384
75% 2.01 4497
70% 1.90 3799
65% 1.79 3237
60% 1.67 2767
55% 1.56 2375
50% 1.44 2035
45% 1.33 1748
40% 1.21 1493
35% 1.10 1272
30% 0.99 1076
25% 0.87 902
20% 0.76 744
15% 0.64 601
10% 0.53 471
5% 0.41 353
0% 0.30 240
DEF Tank, Level Sensor and Connector - OEM RESPONSIBILITY
DEF Tank Temp Sensor and Connector requirements are as follows:

• Any deviation from the DDC specification must be approved and reviewed by DDC Engineering.

• The DEF temperature sensor must be installed such that it is always submerged in DEF and located as close as possible to
the DEF pick-up tube.
Table 83.
DEF Tank Temp Sensor
Resistance Value at 25 °C (77°F) 1 kΩ +/- 1%
Beta Value 3528 K +/- 0.5%
Maximum Dissipation 500 mW
Response Time 1.2 s
Operating Voltage 12 V
Operating Temperature Range - 40 °C to + 125 °C (-40°F to 257°F)
DEF Tank, Temp Sensor and Connector - OEM RESPONSIBILITY
DEF Quality Sensor

This sensor is integrated with concentration, level and temperature direction.
• The concentration and temperature measurement can be detected at the tip of the DEF Level Sensor.
• The sensor is designed conceptually to install from the top of the Urea tank.
DEF concentration will be detected by means of the thermal conductivity of DEF liquid.
Accuracy
• Operating Temperature: -30° to 80°C (-22°F to 176°F)
• Target Temperature Accuracy: within +/-3°C (5.4°F)
• Target Concentration Accuracy: within +/-5 wt%
ACM2.1 to Doser Valve
Figure 25. 2013 Metering (Doser) Unit

Table 84.
8-Pin Metering (Dosing) Valve
8-Pin Circuit ACM2.1-Pin Connector
1 Metering Valve Low side 28
2 Metering Valve High side 33
3 Heating Low side 22
4 Heating Supply 3
5 Sensor Supply 5V 84
6 Not Used Not Used
7 Sensor Ground 99
8 DEF Pressure Signal 100
Table 85.
2013 Metering (Doser) Unit Harness Connector Part Numbers
Connector Components Supplier Part # Supplier
Connector 1-1418479-1 Tyco
Terminal 1241381 Tyco
ACM2.1 to Pump
The pump module draws DEF out of the DEF tank, filters it and pumps it to the metering unit/dosing valve.
Figure 26. 2013 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Pump Module

Table 86.
4-Pin Pump Supply Unit Connector
4-Pin Circuit ACM2.1-Pin Connector
1 Pump RPM Feedback 95
2 Pump Supply 1
3 Pump RPM Control 20
4 Pump GND 31
Table 87.
DEF Pump Harness Connector Part Numbers
Connector Components Supplier Part# Supplier
Connector 2-1418390-1 Tyco
Terminals 1-968875-1 Tyco
6.5 On-board Diagnostics

On-board Diagnostics (OBD) requires a standard data link connector conforming to SAE J1939-13 specifications
incorporated in each vehicle. Any pins in the connector that provide electrical power shall be properly fused to protect the
integrity and usefulness of the connector for diagnostic purposes.
Transmissions supporting transmission output shaft speed via J1939 must also support both error and unavailable status to be
considered compliant with Detroit™ engines.
6.5.1 Data Link Connector Location

The connector shall be located in the driver's side footwell region of the vehicle interior in the area bound by the driver's side
of the vehicle and the driver's edge of the center console (or the vehicle centerline if the vehicle does not have a center
console). The location of the connector should be no higher than the bottom of the steering wheel when in the lowest
adjustable position.
NOTE: The connector may not be located on or in the center console. The connector may not be located on the
horizontal faces near the floor-mounted gear selector, parking brake lever, or cup holders nor on the vertical faces
near the car stereo, climate system or navigation system controls.
The location of the connector must be easily identified and accessed (e.g. to connect an off-board tool). For vehicles equipped
with a driver's side door, the connector must be easily identified and accessed by a technician standing or crouched on the
ground outside the driver's side of the vehicle with the driver's side door open.
If the connector is covered, the cover must be removable by hand without the use of any tools and be labeled "OBD" to aid
technicians in identifying the location of the connector. Access to the diagnostic connector must not require opening or
removing any storage accessory (e.g., ashtray, coin box).
The label shall be submitted to Detroit™ for review six months prior to planned production implementation. Detroit™ shall
approve the label upon determining that it complies with OBD requirements. In order to comply with OBD requirements, the
label must clearly identify that the connector is located behind the cover and be consistent with language and/or symbols
commonly used in the automotive industry.

Manufacturers may equip vehicles with additional diagnostic connectors for manufacturer-specific purposes (i.e., purposes
other than the required OBD functions). However, if the additional connector conforms to the specifications of SAE
J1939-13 and is located in the vehicle interior near the required connector, the connector(s) must be clearly labeled to identify
which connector is used to access the standardized OBD information.
Data Link Connector Wiring

The SAE J1939 OEM-supplied nine-pin data link connector is required.
Table 88.
REQUIRED: The J1939 data link must be wired to this
connector.
The components listed in the following table are required to incorporate an SAE J1939 Data Link in a VIH for diagnostic and
reprogramming devices.
Table 89.
VIH Components to Incorporate an SAE
J1939 Data Link
Component DDC Part Number Deutsch Part Number
Nine-pin Deutsch Connector 23529496 HD10-9-1939P
Connector Cover 23529497 HDC 16-9
Cavity Plugs 23507136 114017
Terminals 23507132 0460-202-16141
The following illustration shows the wiring for the nine-pin connector.
Figure 27. Wiring for Nine-pin Data Link Connector

The SAE J1939 Data Link must be twisted pairs. The twists are a minimum of 12 turns per foot (305 mm). The maximum
length for the SAE J1939 Data Link is 130 ft. (40 m).
The following industry standard Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) documents can be used as a reference:
• SAE J1939/71, Vehicle Application Layer
• SAE J1939, Top Layer (Overview)
• SAE J1939/01, Truck and Bus applications
• SAE J1939/11, Physical Layer
• SAE J1939/21, Data Link Layer
• SAE J1939/73, Application Layer Diagnostics
To obtain a copy of the above documents, contact the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)–SAE International 400
Commonwealth Drive Warrendale, PA 15096 –Attention: Publications (724) 776-4841 (http://www.sae.org).
6.5.2 Lamp Requirements
Table 90.
2013 Lamp Status Support
Lamp Output Lamp Source Source Address Lamp Circuit
Malfunction Indicator CPC4 0x00 Continuity detection is
Lamp (MIL) recommended
The MIL is to be located on the driver’s side instrument panel and must be of sufficient illumination and location to be
readily visible under all lighting conditions. The MIL is to be amber in color when illuminated. There is to be only one MIL
used to indicate all faults detected by the OBD system on a single vehicle.
NOTE: The MIL may not be used for any purpose other than that specified in this manual.
Multiplexed Lamps
If the MIL is multiplexed, it must default to ON if communication is lost between the module physically illuminating the
MIL (e.g. Instrument Cluster) and the module commanding the MIL ON (e.g. CPC). In order to multiplex the MIL with
Detroit Engine applications, you must use PGN 64775 SPN 5080 - (DLCC1) Direct Lamp Control Command (See Section
Chapter Communication Protocols, section SAE J1939 Supported Messages for more details). If the sending device indicates
the data is in error, the MIL shall be illuminated. A bulb check is to be performed with the Key ON, Engine OFF, whether the
MIL is hardwired, or multiplexed. For applications in which the CPC4 controls the lamp, the bulb must be of sufficient
resistance to allow for detection of a circuit continuity error.
2013 Lamp Status Support

All of the below are transmitted within DLCC1 (0xFD07) message from SA 0x00.

Table 91.
Lamp Status Support
Direct Lamp Control Command 1 (DLCC1)
Parameter Name SPN
Engine Amber Warning Lamp Command 5078
Engine Red Stop Lamp Command 5079
OBD Malfunction Indicator Lamp Command 5080
Engine Brake Active Lamp Command 5081
Compression Brake Enable Switch Indicator Lamp Command 3987
Engine Oil Pressure Low Lamp Command 5082
Engine Coolant Temperature High Lamp Command 5083
Engine Coolant Level Low Lamp Command 5084
Engine Idle Management Active Lamp Command 5085
Engine Air Filter Restriction Lamp Command 5086
Engine Fuel Filter Restriction Lamp Command 5469
J1939 Multiplexed
Parameter Name SPN
Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Rate 3481
Cruise Active Lamp 596
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low Lamp 5245
DPF Regeneration Lamp 3697
High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp 3698
Low Battery Voltage Lamp 5087
Water-in-Fuel Lamp 97
Hardwired Only
Parameter Name CPC4 PIN
Deceleration Lamp 4/9
DEF Post Run Indicator Lamp – (ACM) ACM 14/120
Engine Fuel Filter Restricted 3/12
Engine Protect Lamp 3/16
Optimized Idle Active Lamp 4/9
Wait-to-Start Lamp 4/6
While each controller will broadcast an individual DM1 message with the periodic update rate of once per second with the
lamp and fault content, it is expected that for lamp status, the Dashboard must ignore lamp content from DM1 and instead use
J1939 PGN 64775 (DLCC1) to obtain lamp status for all (MCM2.1, ACM2.1, and CPC4).
J1939 PGN 64775 (DLCC1) will be broadcast from the CPC4 only (Source Address 0), at a frequency of once per second or
upon update (but no faster than 100ms). The CPC4 will take into account all Powertrain ECUs in setting the appropriate lamp
status.
Given the formatting constraints of several other DM messages such as DM2, DM3, DM6, DM12, DM23, DM27, DM28,
and DM31 DDEC13 ECUs will populate lamp information in these messages as well, but the dashboard is expected to rely
on and control lamps with the DLCC1 message only.

• Diesel Particulate Filter Lamp Command (DPF Lamp) - DPFC1 (0xFD7C) SPN_3697 (PT-CAN 0x18FF003D) Broadcast
once per second and on change from SA_0x3D
• Exhaust System High Temperature Lamp Command - DPFC1 (0xFD7C) SPN_3698 (PT-CAN 0x18FF003D) Broadcast
once per second and on change from SA_0x3D
• Water-in-Fuel Indicator (Lamp) - WFI (0xFEFF) SPN_97 (PT-CAN message presently undefined) Broadcast once every
10 seconds from SA_0x01
• DEF Lamp - (PT-CAN 0x14FF013D) SPN 5245 - this is supported - PGN65110
• Optimized Idle Lamp- Presently it is not anticipated to broadcast the state of this lamp as the standard SAE message is not
defined. This lamp will remain hard-wired to the CPC4 controller.
6.5.3 Electronic Transmission Requirements

The requirements in this section pertain to applications in which transmission output shaft speed broadcast on J1939 (SPN
191 PGN 61442 (ETC1 Bytes 2-3) is used to calculate vehicle speed in order to be considered compatible with Detroit™
engines.
J1939 Message Support

Transmissions supporting transmission output shaft speed via J1939 must comply with SAE J1939 requirements including
support of both Error and Not Available status.
6.6 Wires and Wiring

Detroit Diesel Corporation recommends color coding and hot stamping wire numbers in contrasting colors at intervals of four
inches or less.
General Requirements - Wire
NOTE: Avoid renumbering DDC circuits since all troubleshooting guides reference the circuit numbers shown in
the schematic. DDC suggests including a prefix or suffix with the DDC circuit numbers when conflicts exist.
All wires used in conjunction with DDEC13 must meet the following criteria:
NOTICE: DDC does not recommend using any type of terminal lubricant or grease compounds. These products
may cause dirt or other harmful substances to be retained in the connector. DDC has not tested these products
and cannot stand behind their use.
NOTICE: Insulation must be free of nicks.
Table 92.
Criteria: Wires
Tape, conduit, loom or a combination thereof must be used to protect the wires. Refer to Tape and Taping
Section and Conduit and Loom Section.
All wires must be annealed copper wire (not aluminum).
All wires must comply with SAE J1128.
All wires must be insulated with cross-link polyethylene (XLPE) such as GXL, or any self-extinguishing
insulation having a minimum rating of -40°C (-40°F) to 125°C (257°F).

Crimp tools
The part numbers for the crimp tools for working with the ACM2.1, MCM2.1 and CPC4 connectors are listed in the
following table:
Table 93.
Crimp Tools
Description Part Number
Extraction Tool 726503-1
Hand Crimp Tool 169400-0
Crimp Dies for 0.5 mm - 1.0 mm Terminals 734262-0
Crimp Dies for 1.0 mm - 2.5 mm Terminals 169917-0
Deutsch Terminal Installation And Removal

The method of terminal installation and removal varies. The following sections cover Deutsch terminal installation and
removal.
Deutsch connectors have cable seals molded into the connector. These connectors are push-to-seat connectors with
cylindrical terminals. The diagnostic connector terminals are gold plated for clarity.
NOTICE: Improper selection and use of crimp tools have varying adverse effects on crimp geometry and
effectiveness. Proper installation of terminals require specialized tools. Do not attempt to use alternative tools.
The crimp tool to use in Deutsch terminal installation is J-34182 (Kent-Moore part number).
NOTICE: Terminal crimps must be made with the Deutsch crimp tool P/N: HDT-48-00 to assure gas tight
connections.
NOTICE: If a separate seal is required, be sure to install the seal onto the wire before stripping the insulation.
Deutsch Terminal Installation

Use the following instructions for installing Deutsch terminals:
1. Strip approximately .25 inch (6 mm) of insulation from the cable.
2. Remove the lock clip, raise the wire gage selector, and rotate the knob to the number matching the gage wire that is
being used.
3. Lower the selector and insert the lock clip.
4. Position the contact so that the crimp barrel is 1/32 of an inch above the four indenters. See the following graphic for
details. Crimp the cable.

Figure 28. Setting Wire Gage Selector and Positioning the Contact
5. Grasp the contact approximately one inch behind the contact crimp barrel. Hold the connector with the rear face of
grommet facing you.
Figure 29. Pushing Contact Into Grommet

6. Push the contact into the grommet until a positive stop is felt. A slight tug will confirm that it is properly locked into
place.
Figure 30. Locking Terminal Into Connector

Deutsch Terminal Removal
The appropriate size removal tool should be used when removing cables from connectors. The proper removal tools are listed
in the following table:
Table 94.
Tool Kent-Moore Part Number
Removing (12 AWG) J-37451
Removing (16-18 AWG) DE4-0411-204-1605
Remove Deutsch terminals as follows:

1. With the rear insert toward you, snap the appropriate size remover tool over the cable of contact to be removed.

Figure 31. Removal Tool Position

2. Slide the tool along the cable into the insert cavity until it engages and resistance is felt. Do not twist or insert tool at an
angle.
Figure 32. Removal Tool Insertion

3. Pull contact cable assembly out of the connector. Keep reverse tension on the cable and forward tension on the tool.

Splicing Guidelines
The following are guidelines which may be used for splices. The selection of crimpers and splice connectors is optional.
Select a high quality crimper equivalent to the Kent-Moore tool, J-38706, and commercially available splice clips.
The recommended technique for splicing and repairing circuits (other than power and ignition circuits) is a clipped and
soldered splice. Alternatively, any method that produces a high quality, tight (mechanically and electronically sound) splice
with durable insulation is considered to be acceptable.
Clipped and Soldered Splicing Method

The tools required are listed in the following table:
Table 95.
Recommended Splicing Tools
Tool Part Number
Heat Gun —
Sn 60 solder with rosin core flux —
Wire Stripper Kent-Moore J-35615 or equivalent
Splice Clips (commercially available) Wire size dependent
Heat Shrink Tubing Raychem HTAT or equivalent
Table 96.
Criteria: Splicing Straight Leads
No more than one strand in a 16-strand wire may be cut or missing.
Use Sn 60 solder with rosin core flux.
The exposed wire must be clean before the splice is soldered.
Soldering splice connectors is optional. To solder splice connectors:

1. Position the leads, so one overlaps the other.

Figure 33. Positioning the Leads

2. Secure the leads with a commercially available clip and hand tool.
Figure 34. Securing the Leads With a Clip

3. Use a suitable electronic soldering iron to heat the wires. Apply the solder to the heated wire and clip (not to the
soldering iron) allowing sufficient solder flow into the splice joint.
4. Pull on wire to assure crimping and soldering integrity. The criteria listed in the following table must be met:

Table 97.
Applied Load Criteria for Terminals
Wire Gage Must Withstand Applied Load
14 AWG 45 lb (200 N)
16 AWG 27 lb (120 N)
18 AWG 20 lb (90 N)
5. Loop the lead back over the spliced joint and tape.
Figure 35. Recommended Strain Relief of Spliced Joint
Splicing and Repairing Straight Leads-Alternate Method 1

The tools required are listed in the following table:
Table 98.
Tool Part Number
Heat Gun —

Tool Part Number
Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 280 (12 AWG) Kent-Moore J-38125-6
Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 280 (18 AWG) Kent-Moore J-39848
Terminal Crimper for Weather Pack Kent-Moore J-38852
Terminal Crimper for Deutsch Kent-Moore J-34182
Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 150 Kent-Moore J-35123
Table 99.
The recommended method to splice straight leads is as follows:

1. Locate broken wire.
2. Remove insulation as required; be sure exposed wire is clean and not corroded.
3. Insert one wire into the splice clip until it butts against the clip. Stop and crimp. See (A) in following graphic.
NOTICE: Any terminal that is cracked or ruptured is unacceptable as malfunctions may occur.
4. Insert the other wire into the splice clip until it butts against the clip stop. See (B) in following graphic.
5. Visually inspect the splice clip for cracks, rupture, or other crimping damage. Remove and replace damaged clips
before proceeding.
6. Pull on wire to ensure the splice integrity. The criteria listed in the following table must be met.
Table 100.
Applied Load Criteria for Terminals
Wire Gage Must Withstand Applied Load
14 AWG 45 lb (200 N)
16 AWG 27 lb (120 N)
18 AWG 20 lb (90 N)
NOTICE: Splices may not be closer than 0.3 m (12 in.) apart to avoid degradation in circuit performance. Replace
wire to avoid having splices closer than 0.3 m (12 in.) apart.
7. Shrink the splice clip insulated casing with a heat gun to seal the splice See (C) in following graphic.

Figure 36. Splicing Straight Leads - Alternate Method 1
Splicing and Repairing Straight Leads - Alternate Method 2

This method is not recommended or for use on power or ignition circuits. The tools required are listed in the following table:
Table 101.
Tool Part Number
Heat Gun —

Tool Part Number
Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 280 (12 AWG) Kent-Moore J-38125-6
Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 280 (18 AWG) Kent-Moore J-39848
Terminal Crimper for Weather Pack Kent-Moore J-38852
Terminal Crimper for Deutsch Kent-Moore J-34182
Terminal Crimper for Metri-Pack 150 Kent-Moore J-35123
Table 102.
An acceptable option for splicing straight leads is:

1. Locate broken wire.
2. Remove insulation as required; be sure exposed wire is clean and not corroded.
3. Slide a sleeve of glue lined, shrink tubing (Raychem HTAT or equivalent) long enough to cover the splice clip on the
wire and overlap the wire insulation, about .25 in. (6 mm) on both sides. See (A) in following graphic.
4. Insert one wire into splice clip until it butts against the splice clip. Stop and crimp. See (B) in following graphic.
NOTICE: Any terminal that is cracked or ruptured is unacceptable as malfunctions may occur.
5. Insert the remaining wires into the splice clip one at a time until each butts against the splice clip; stop and crimp.
6. Visually inspect the terminal for cracks, rupture, or other crimping damage. Remove and replace damaged terminal
before proceeding.
7. lide the shrink tubing over the crimped splice clip. See (C) in following graphic.
NOTICE: A minimum of two layers of heat shrink tubing must be applied to splices that have more than one lead
in or out.
8. Shrink tubing with a heat gun to seal the splice. See (D) in following graphic.

Figure 37. Splicing Straight Leads - Alternate Method 2

Shrink Wrap
Shrink wrap is required when splicing non-insulated connections. Raychem HTAT or any equivalent heat shrink dual wall
epoxy encapsulating adhesive polyolefin is required. Shrink wrap must extend at least 6 mm (.25 in.) over wire insulation
past splice in both directions.
Table 103.
Alpha Wire Corporation Tyco Electronics Corporation
711 Lidgerwood Ave Raychem Cable Identification and Protection
P.O. Box 711 300 Constitution Drive
Elizabeth, New Jersey 07207-0711 Menlo Park, CA 94025
1-800-52ALPHA Phone: 1-650-361-3333
www.alphawire.com www.raychem.com
To heat shrink wrap a splice:
NOTICE: The heat shrink wrap must overlap the wire insulation about 6 mm (.25 in.) on both sides of the splice.

1. Select the correct diameter to allow a tight wrap when heated.

2. Heat the shrink wrap with a heat gun; do not concentrate the heat in one location, but apply the heat over the entire
length of shrink wrap until the joint is complete.
3. Repeat step 2 to apply a second layer of protection (if required by splicing guidelines).
Staggering Wire Splices

Position spliced wires properly as follows:
NOTICE: You must stagger positions to prevent a large bulge in the harness and to prevent the wires from
chafing against each other.
NOTICE: A minimum of two layers of heat shrink tubing extending .25 in.(6 mm) past the splice must be used to
complete the splice.
1. Stagger the position of each splice so there is at least a 65 mm (2.5 in.) separation between splices.
Figure 38. The Correct and Incorrect Method of Staggering Multiple Splices
2. Heat shrink a minimum of two layers of heat shrink tubing.
3. Tape the spliced wires to each other.
6.7 Conduit and Loom

Conduit must be used to protect the harness cable and cable splices.
NOTICE: The conduit must not cover any connectors, switches, relays, fuses, or sensors.
The following guidelines should be used when designing a harness:
NOTICE: Wires should be sized and cut to near equal length prior to installing conduit.

• The distance between the back of the connector or other listed devices to the end of the conduit should not exceed 25 mm
(1.0 in.) for a single connector/device or 75 mm (3 in.) for multiple connectors/devices.
• All cable breakouts and conduit ends must be secured in place with conduit outlet rings or tape.
Table 104.
Criteria: Conduit and Loom
Due to the wide variety of operating conditions and environments, it is the responsibility of the OEM to select
a conduit that will survive the conditions of the specific applications. Flame retardant convoluted
polypropylene conduit or equivalent may be used for most installations. Heat retardant nylon conduit or oil,
water, acid, fire, and abrasion resistant non-metallic loom conforming to SAE J562A* is also acceptable. The
diameter of conduit should be selected based on the number of wires being protected.
* If non-metallic loom is used, secure the ends with tightly wrapped nylon straps to prevent unraveling.
Conduit should cover the wires without binding and without being excessively large.
6.8 Tape and Taping

Tape must be used when conduit is utilized. Be sure to follow the tape manufacturers’ guidelines. The harness manufacturer
may use tape under the harness covering (conduit or loom) to facilitate harness building. Tape must be tightly wrapped at all
conduit interconnections with a minimum of two layers. Be sure to firmly secure the start and finish ends of tape.
NOTICE: Black vinyl electrical tape should not be used in applications where the temperature exceeds 80°C
(176°F).
Table 105.
Criteria: Tape
In applications where the temperature doesn’t exceed 80°C (176°F), black vinyl electrical tape that is flame
retardant and weather resistant may be used.
In applications where temperature exceeds 80°C (176°F), vinyl electrical tape should not be used. For these
applications, adhesive cloth backed, flame retardant polyethylene or fiber glass tape (Delphi #PM-2203,
Polikan #165 or equivalent) is recommended.
Table 106.
Criteria: Taping
The tape must extend a minimum of 25 mm (1 in.) past the conduit.

The tape must be crossed over butted conduit ends.
The tape must be extended a minimum of 25 mm (1 in.) in each direction at all branches.
6.9 Sensors and Actuators

DDEC13 is designed to operate with several types of sensors as listed in the following table:

Table 107.
Sensor Type Description
Variable Reluctance/Magnetic Pick-up Used to monitor the crankshaft position, engine speed, turbo speed,
and vehicle speed.
Thermistor Used to monitor temperatures.
Variable Capacitance Used to monitor manifold and oil gallery pressures.
Variable Resistance (Potentiometer) Used to sense throttle position.
Switch Used to signal coolant level.
The sensors integrated into the Engine Harness are factory-installed. The sensors integrated into the Vehicle Interface
Harness are installed by the OEM.
6.9.1 Factory-installed Sensors

The sensors integrated into the factory-installed Engine Harness are listed in the following table:
Table 108.
Function of Factory-installed Sensors
Sensor Function
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP Sensor) Indicates a specific cylinder in the firing order.
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP Sensor) Senses crankshaft position and engine speed for functions such as
fuel control strategy.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECT Sensor) Senses coolant temperature for functions such as engine protection,
fan control and engine fueling.
EGR Temperature Sensor Senses EGR exhaust temperature after EGR cooler. Used for EGR
system diagnosis.
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor (EOP Sensor) Senses gallery oil pressure for functions such as engine protection.
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor (EOT Sensor) Senses oil temperature for functions such as reducing variation in
fuel injection and fan control.
Exhaust Pressure Sensor (before turbo) Monitors exhaust pressure for EGR and boost control.
Fan Speed Sensor Monitors fan speed.
Intake Manifold Pressure Sensor (IMP Sensor) Senses turbo boost for functions such as smoke control and engine
protection.
Intake Manifold Temperature Sensor (IMT Sensor) Senses boost temperature.
Supply Fuel Temperature Sensor (SFT Sensor) Senses fuel temperature for functions such as engine fueling.
Turbo Compressor Temperature Out Sensor Senses turbo out air temperature.
Turbo Inlet Temperature Sensor Senses turbo inlet air temperature (DD15 AT only)
Water-in-Fuel Sensor Detects water in the fuel filter that alerts the owner/driver that the fuel
filter needs to be dried out.
Water Pump Speed Sensor Monitors water pump speed.
6.9.2 Aftertreatment and SCR Sensors

These systems listed in the following table, come with the sensors installed.

Table 109.
Function of Aftertreatment Sensors
Sensor Function
DOC Inlet Pressure Sensor Used for regen calculation. The catalyzed DPF function is to convert
HC and CO emissions during active regeneration as well as to
DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor
convert NO to NO2 to support the NOx conversion in the SCR.
DPF Outlet Temperature Sensor Temperature measured at the outlet of the aftertreatment system that
is installed within the exhaust system of the vehicle. It is located after
the DPF that is within the aftertreatment unit.
DOC Inlet Temperature Monitors exhaust temperature coming into the DOC. Used for regen
calculation and to support soot oxidation and convert HC injected
during active regeneration.
DOC Outlet Temperature Temperature measured between the DOC and the DPF in the
aftertreatment assembly located in the exhaust system of the vehicle.
DOC Outlet Temperature Inboard Monitors exhaust temperature exiting out of the DOC. Used for regen
DOC Outlet Temperature Outboard Monitors secondary exhaust flow temperature exiting out of the DOC.
Used for regen calculation and to support soot oxidation and convert
HC injected during active regeneration.
SCR Inlet Temperature Used for NOx calculation
SCR Outlet Temperature
DPF Outlet / Upstream NOx (Engine_Out) Measures the NOx concentration, air/fuel ratio and equilibrium
oxygen partial pressure in the exhaust gas.
Downstream NOx (SCR-Out)
DEF Pressure Sensor Provides a Metering Unit pressure signal so the DEF is kept in a
required pressure range.
DEF Temperature Sensor Proper DEF flow is a function of the temperature sensor input and
balanced operation of the electronic controls.
Actuators for the SCR System

The following table shows the list of the actuators for the SCR system:
Table 110.
Actuator Description
Metering Unit (12V) Provides control flow for DEF dosing for SCR function. Atomizes
DEF for SCR injection.
Supply Unit (12V) Provides a filtered DEF flow and stores a small DEF volume to
maintain pressure. A permanent magnet brush motor is used to
pump DEF.
Coolant Water Valve* Provides engine coolant upon command to flow through the supply
unit and DEF tank to prevent freezing.
Aux Heater Prevents freezing of DEF between the dosing valve and nozzle.
DEF Injector Injects DEF mixture into SCR.
* OEM Responsibility
6.9.3 OEM-installed Sensors

All sensors must be of the proper type and should continuously monitor vehicle and environmental conditions, so DDEC13
can react to changing situations. The OEM is responsible for installing the sensors listed in the following table:

Table 111.
Function and Guidelines for OEM-installed Sensors
Sensor Part Number Function
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT Senses ambient air temperature specifically
Sensor) for the Ambient Air Temperature Override
23518328
Disable feature or for OI. This sensor is
optional.
Engine Coolant Level Sensor (ECL Sensor) 23526906 Senses coolant level for engine protection.
23526905
23526907
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) — Senses vehicle speed for Cruise Control and
Vehicle Speed Limiting.
NOTE: The OEM harness must be securely fastened every six (6) in. It is required that the harness be fastened
within six (6) in of the sensor.
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

The AAT Sensor is a thermistor type sensor with a variable resistance that produces an analog signal between 0 and 5 V,
representing the temperature of the ambient air. The AAT Sensor is used with the Idle Shutdown Timer, specifically for the
Ambient Air Temperature Override Disable and Optimized Idle features. If the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor is
hardwired to CPC4, the connection is as follows: Ambient Air Temp Sensor = Pin 3/15 and Ambient Air Temp Sensor
Return = Pin 3/2.
NOTE: This sensor is only required for optional Optimized Idle and Engine Shutdown features.
Figure 39. Ambient Air Temperatures Sensor Dimensions

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Installation
Install the AAT Sensor where ambient air temperature can be read. A protected location on the frame rails where it will not
be splattered with dirt and grime and is removed from any heat source such as exhaust is preferred. The parameter for the
AAT Sensor is listed in the following table:

Table 112.
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Parameter
Parameter Group Parameter Options Default Access
31 Ambient Air Temp Sensor 0 - Not Available 0 - Not Available VEPS, DDRS
Enable 1 - hardwired DDC sensor
2 - J1939 PGN 65269
3 - J1587
4 - PTCAN
5 - hardwired MBTrucks
sensor
Engine Coolant Level Sensor

The ECL Sensor provides an input to the engine protection system and warn the operator if a low coolant level has been
reached. The main component of the ECL Sensor consists of a conductivity probe, which connects to the CPC4.
NOTICE: The probe has an operational temperature range of -40 to 125°C (-40 to 257°F). Exposure to
temperatures beyond this range may result in unacceptable component life, or degraded sensor accuracy.
Figure 40. Engine Coolant Level Sensor Specifications

The connector listed in the following table is a Metri-Pack 280 series push-to-seat connector.
Table 113.
Metri-Pack 280 Connectors and Part Numbers
Coolant Level Sensor Connector
Connector P/N: 15300027
Terminal P/N: 12077411
Seal P/N: 12015323
Secondary Lock P/N: 15300014

The OEM must connect the ECL Sensor probe as shown in the next illustration. Polarity of the ground and signal must be
correct for proper operation.
Figure 41. Engine Coolant Level Sensor Installation for CPC4
NOTICE: Sensor ground must return directly back to battery ground for proper grounding isolation.
The probe should be located in either the radiator top tank or a remote mounted surge tank. It should be mounted horizontally
in the center of the tank and must be in a position to signal low coolant before aeration occurs. Typically, this is a height
representing 98% of the drawdown quantity. The probe should be located so that it is not splashed by deaeration line, stand
pipe or coolant return line flows. The insulated portion of the probe should be inserted into the coolant 1/2 in. or more past
the inside wall of the tank.

Figure 42. Engine Coolant Level Sensor Location - Top of Radiator Tank
Determine proper location for low coolant level sensor while running the drawdown test. It must actuate a warning before the
satisfactory drawdown level is reached.
The ECL Sensor components are OEM supplied hardware and can be purchased as kits or individual components, depending
on OEM requirements.
The following two tables list the kits and all the necessary hardware for proper installation of the ECL Sensor. Kits are
available through the DDC parts distribution network.
Table 114.
ECL Sensor Installation Kit 1/4 in. NPTF P/N: 23515397
Component Part Number
ECL Sensor 23520380
Metri-Pack Connector Kit 15300027
Metri-Pack Terminals 12077411
Secondary Lock 15300014
Wire Seal 12015323
Terminal 12103881

Table 115.
ECL Sensor Installation Kit 3/8 in. NPTF P/N: 23515398
Component Part Number
ECL Sensor 23520381
Metri-Pack Connector Kit 15300027
Metri-Pack Terminals 12077411
Secondary Lock 15300014
Wire Seal 12015323
Terminal 12103881
The sensor must be enabled with VEPS or the DDRS as listed in the following table.
Table 116.
Enabling the Engine Coolant Level Sensor
Parameter Group Parameter Options Default
13 Cool Level Sensor Input Enable 0 = Disabled 3 = Dual Level Float Sensor
1 = Dual Level Probe Sensor (FTL), fixed threshold
(IMO), fixed threshold
2 = Single Level Probe Sensor,
(Rusty Nail), temperature
dependent evaluation
3 = Dual Level Float Sensor
(FTL), fixed threshold
4 = Single Level Probe sensor
(Rusty Nail), fix threshold
evaluation
5 = Dual level probe sensor
(IMO_SFTP), fix threshold
evaluation
Vehicle Speed Sensor

CPC4 can calculate vehicle speed providing that it is properly programmed and interfaced with a Vehicle Speed Sensor
(VSS) that meets requirements. The VSS provides a vehicle speed signal for use in Cruise Control and Vehicle Speed
Limiting. The VSS signal type can be changed.
NOTE: DDC does not approve of the use of signal generator sensors.

Figure 43. Vehicle Speed Sensor

To obtain accurate vehicle mileage, the parameters listed in the following table must be programmed with VEPS, DDRS, or
DDDL 7.X.
Table 117.
Vehicle Speed Sensor Parameters
Parameter Group Parameter Range Default
8 Vehicle Speed Sensor 0 = No Sensor 4 = Magnetic Pickup

1 = C3 Sensor
2 = Square Wave (Push Pull)
3 = J1939 (ETC1)
4 = Magnetic Pickup
5 = J1939 (TCO1)
6 = J1939 (CCVS Source 1)
9 = Square Wave (Open collector)
10 = Output Shaft Speed from
Transmission (PT-Can)
11 = Square Wave for OI (Hall Sensor)
8 Axle Ratio 1 - 20.0 5.29
8 Number of Output Shaft 0 - 250 16

Teeth
8 Tire Revs per Unit 160 - 1599 312

Distance

Vehicle Speed Sensor Parameters
8 Top Gear Ratio 0.1 - 2.55 0.8
8 Second Highest Gear 0 - 5.75 1

Ratio
8 Two Spd Axle Second 1 - 20.0 1

Axle Ratio
8 Anti Tamper 0 = Disable 0 = Disable

1 = Enable
8 Gear Ratio Tolerance 0 - 60 2
Magnetic Pickup
The magnetic pickup requirements are listed in the following table. Magnetic Pickup size is determined by installation
requirements.
Table 118.
Magnetic Pickup Vehicle Speed Sensor Requirements
Parameters Range
Frequency Range 0 - 10 kHz
Low Threshold Voltage >1.8 Volts Peak to Peak
The Vehicle Speed Sensor is wired to the 21-pin #3 connector of the CPC4 as listed in the following table.
Table 119.
Vehicle Speed Sensor Wiring
CPC4 Connector/Pin Function
3/13 VSS (+)
3/14 VSS (-)
Magnetic Vehicle Speed Sensors can be obtained from the following sources:
Table 120.
Wabash Technologies AI-TEK® Instruments LLC Invensys Electro Corporation
1375 Swan Street 152 Knotter Drive 1845 57th Street
Huntington, Indiana 46750-0829 P.O. Box 748 Sarasota, Florida 34231
Tel: 260-356-8300 Chesire, Connecticut 06410 Tel: 1-800-446-5762

Fax: 941-355-3120
www.wabashtech.com Tel: 800-643-0643 www.electrocorp.com

www.aitekinstruments.com/sensors
See the following illustration for the installation of the Magnetic VSS.

Figure 44. Magnetic Vehicle Speed Sensor Installation - CPC4

SAE J1939 Data Link
A VSS wired to the CPC4 is not required if the transmission output shaft speed message is being transmitted over the SAE
J1939 Data Link. To obtain accurate vehicle mileage, the parameters, listed in the following table, must be programmed with
VEPS.
NOTE: Transmissions supporting transmission output shaft speed via J1939 must also support both error and
unavailable status to be considered compliant with Detroit™ engines.

Table 121.
Vehicle Speed Sensor Parameters for J1939 Option
8 Vehicle Speed Sensor 0 = No Sensor 4 = Magnetic Pickup

1 = C3 Sensor
2 = Square Wave (Hall Sensor)
3 = J1939 (ECT1)
4 = Magnetic Pickup
5 = J1939 (TCO1)
9 = Square wave (open collector)
10 = Output shaft speed from
transmission (PT-Can)
11 = Square wave for OI (Hall
sensor)
8 Axle Ratio 1 - 20.0 5.29
8 Tire Revs per Unit Distance 160 - 1599 312
8 Top Gear Ratio 0.1 - 2.55 1
8 Second Highest Gear Ratio 0 - 5.75 1
8 Two Spd Axle Second Axle Ratio 1 - 20.0 1
8 Anti Tamper 0 = Disable 0 = Disable

1 = Enable
8 Gear Ratio Tolerance 0 - 60 2
VSS Anti-Tamper
If the sensor appears to be working improperly, but the vehicle speed is not zero, VSS Anti-Tamper will log a VSS fault.
6.10 Lamps
The instrument panel warning lamps, the Amber Warning Lamp (AWL) and the Red Stop Lamp (RSL), are supplied by the
OEM. The functionality of each lamp along with the wiring requirements are covered separately in the following sections.
Sixteen of the lamps can be multiplexed:
Table 122.
DLCC1 Multiplexed
Parameter Name SPN
Engine Amber Warning Lamp Command 5078
Engine Red Stop Lamp Command 5079
OBD Malfunction Indicator Lamp Command 5080
Engine Brake Active Lamp Command 5081
Compression Brake Enable Switch Indicator Lamp Command 3987
Engine Oil Pressure Low Lamp Command 5082
Engine Coolant Temperature High Lamp Command 5083
Engine Coolant Level Low Lamp Command 5084
Engine Idle Management Active Lamp Command 5085

DLCC1 Multiplexed
Parameter Name SPN
Engine Air Filter Restriction Lamp Command 5086
J1939 Multiplexed
Parameter Name SPN
Cruise Active Lamp 596
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low Lamp 5245
DPF Regeneration Lamp 3697
High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp 3698
Low Battery Voltage Lamp 5087
Water-in-Fuel Lamp 97
The multiplexed lamp status is shown in the following table:
Table 123.
2013 Multiplexed Lamp Status Support
Multiplexed Lamp Lamp SPN Source Source Address
Output
Amber Warning Lamp SPN 5078 CPC4 0x00
(AWL)
Red Stop Lamp (RSL SPN 5079 CPC4 0x00
DPF Regeneration Lamp SPN 3697 CPC4 0x00
High Exhaust System SPN 3698 CPC4 0x00

Temperature Lamp
(HEST)
Malfunction Indicator SPN 5080 CPC4 0x00

Lamp (MIL)
Water-in-Fuel Lamp (WIF SPN 97 CPC4 0x00

Lamp)
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Low SPN 5235 CPC4 0x00

Lamp (DEF Lamp)

6.10.1 Amber Warning Lamp (AWL)
Table 124.
The AWL is controlled by the ACM2.1, CPC4, and the MCM2.1.
The AWL remains ON:
• For approximately five (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle (a bulb check).
• When an electronic system fault occurs (This indicates the problem should be diagnosed as soon
as possible).
The AWL flashes:

• During last 90 seconds before Idle Shutdown if programmed for override.
• When Idle Shutdown occurs or the Optimized Idle system shutdown occurs.
AWL and PasSmart

AWL is active with PasSmart. When the Passing Speed Duration time expires, the Amber Warning Lamp on the dashboard
will begin to flash one minute prior to ramping the Vehicle Limit Speed (VLS) back down to the normal VLS limit. The
rampdown event always takes 5 seconds regardless of the Passing Speed Increment programmed into the ECU. The
rampdown alert can be distinguished from an engine fault warning in that the AWL flashes for the former and remains on
constantly for the latter.
PasSmart still operates when there is an active engine fault. In this situation the Amber Warning Lamp goes from constant
illumination to flashing one minute before the VLS limit ramps down. At the end of the passing event when PasSmart is
deactivated, the Amber Warning Lamp will return to constant illumination if the engine fault is still active.
Amber Warning Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the AWL:
• The AWL is required.
• A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source.
• The AWL must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the equipment operator.
• The lens color must be amber.
• The AWL is connected to pin 2/10 in the CPC4.
• This lamp can be multiplexed on J1939.
Programming Requirements & Flexibility

The options for this digital output are listed in the following table:
Table 125.
AWL Programming Options
Parameter Group Parameter Required Setting Options Default Access
35 2 10 DO Selection — 0 = Disabled 1 = Check engine VEPS or DDRS

1 = Check engine lamp (yellow)
lamp (yellow)
6.10.2 Cruise Active Lamp

Table 126.
The Cruise Active Lamp is controlled by the CPC4.
The Cruise Active Lamp remains ON:
• When Cruise Control is active.
Cruise Active Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Cruise Active Lamp:
• The Cruise Active Lamp is optional.
• A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required depending on the ignition source. Digital output circuits are designed to
sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.
• The Cruise Active Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.
• This output is wired to pin 3/12 of the CPC4.


Table 127.
Cruise Active Lamp Programming Options
35 3 12 DO Selection 4 = Cruise/PTO 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Active Lamp 1 = Oil Level Lamp
2 = Not Used
3 = Oil Pressure Low
Lamp
4 = Cruise/PTO
Active Lamp
5 = FUSO Retarder
Control 2
6 = Battery Voltage
Low Lamp
7 = Fuel Filter
Restriction Lamp
35 3 12 DO Fault — 0 = Fault Detection 1 = Diag VEPS or DDRS

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2= PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
6.10.3 Deceleration Lamp

The Deceleration Lamp is controlled by the CPC4.
The Deceleration Lamp remains ON:
• When percent throttle is zero and Cruise Control is inactive.

Deceleration Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Deceleration Lamp:
• The Deceleration Lamp is optional.
• The Deceleration Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.


Table 128.
Deceleration Lamp Programming Options
35 4 09 DO Selection 11 = Deceleration 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Lamp 1 = Accelerator Pedal
Idle Position
2 = Actual Torque
3 = Road Speed
4 = Engine Speed
5 = Coolant Temp
6 = Pedal Torque
7 = Boost Temp
8 = Oil Pressure
(Threshold)
9 = Coolant Temp
(Eng. Controller
Threshold)
10 = Optimized Idle
Active Lamp
11 = Deceleration
Lamp
12 = Not Used
13 = WIF Lamp
14 = Cruise/PTO
Active Lamp
15 = Check
Transmission Lamp
16 = Battery Charge
17 = PTO1valve1

35 4 09 DO Fault 9 = SetFault + Diag 0 = Fault Detection 0 = Fault Detection VEPS or DDRS

Detection Off Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
6.10.4 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low Lamp
Table 129.
The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low Lamp is controlled by the CPC4 and ACM2.1.
The DEF Low Lamp remains ON:
• When the conditions in the following table occur.

Table 130.
DEF Gauge/Lamp Conditions (R22 or Later)
DEF Tank Level Gauge/Lamp Combination System Reaction/Response
DEF Tank 75 - 100% • Indicators solid and NO lamps lit
DEF Tank 50 -75%
DEF Tank 25 - 50%
DEF Tank 10 - 25%
DEF Tank 5 - 10% • DEF Light & Level Solid

• DTNA Dash Displays SPN/FMI
DEF Tank EMPTY- 5% • DEF Light & Level Flashing

• MIL-Solid On
• 25% Derate
• VEH. Speed Limit=55 mph
• DTNA Dash Displays Fault
Messaging
• DEF Light & Level Flashing

• RSL & MIL-Solid On
• 25% Derate
• VEH. Speed Limit=5 mph
• DTNA Dash Displays Fault
DEF Tank EMPTY - 5% & IGNORED - Messaging
FINAL-INDUCEMENT
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Low Lamp Requirements and Guidelines
The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Low Lamp:
• The Diesel Exhaust Fluid Low Lamp is required.
• The Diesel Exhaust Fluid Low Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle
operator.


Table 131.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Low Lamp Programming Options
35 3 10 DO Selection 6 = DEF Low Lamp 0 = Disabled 6 = DEF Low Lamp VEPS or DDRS
1 = Air Filter Lamp
2 = Not used
3 = Not used
4 = Not used
5 = Fuso retarder
control 1
6 = DEF Low Lamp
7 = TIER4 DEF Lamp
8 = EU6 Inducement
Lamp
6.10.5 DPF Regeneration Lamp
Table 132.
This lamp is controlled by the ACM2.1 and the CPC4.
The DPF Regeneration Lamp remains ON when:
• Stationary regeneration is required.
• At the start of every ignition cycle, the lamp turns ON for approximately five (5) seconds (a bulb
check).
• HC Auto-Elevate feature is disabled or interrupted.
The DPF Regeneration Lamp flashes when a stationary regeneration is required immediately. If the lamp flashing is ignored,
derate and/or shutdown could occur.
DPF Regeneration Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the DPF Regeneration Lamp:
• The DPF Regeneration Lamp is required.
• The DPF Regeneration Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.
• The DPF Regeneration symbol shown above is required.

The parameters for the DPF Regeneration Lamp are listed in the following table:

Table 133.
DPF Regeneration Lamp Options
35 1 05 DO Selection 0 = Disabled 2 = DPF Lamp VEPS, DDRS

1 = Ground, Analog
Accelerator Pedal
2 = DPF Lamp
3 = Air Filter Lamp
6.10.6 Fuel Filter Restriction Lamp
Table 134.
The fuel filter restriction lamp will be lit:
• For a period during the lamp check when the ignition is turned on, and is then normally off.
• Whenever the MCM2.1 indicates over the PT-CAN link that the fuel filter has been clogged.
Programming Requirements and Flexibility

The parameters for the Fuel Filter Restriction Lamp are listed in the following table:
Table 135.
Fuel Filter Restriction Lamp Options
Parameter Group Parameter Setting Options Default Access
35 3 12 DO Selection 7 = Fuel Filter 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS

Restriction Lamp 1 = Oil Level Lamp
2 = Not Used
Lamp
4 = Cruise / PTO
Active Lamp
5 = Fuso Retarder
6 = Battery Voltage
Low Lamp
7 = Fuel Filter
Restriction Lamp
6.10.7 High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp

Table 136.
The HEST Lamp is controlled by the ACM2.1, CPC4, and the MCM2.1.
The HEST Lamp remains ON:
• When the vehicle speed is less than 8 km/h (5 mph) and the DPF outlet temperature is greater
than 525°C (977°F).
When the engine elevates rpm for a parked regen but the exhaust temperatures are relatively cool,
the HEST lamp will flash once every ten seconds.
High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the HEST Lamp:
• The HEST Lamp is optional and must be supplied by the OEM.
• The HEST Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.
Programming Requirement & Flexibility

The parameters for the High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp are listed in the following table:
Table 137.
High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp Options
35 4 07 DO Selection 0 - Disabled 13 = High Exhaust VEPS, DDRS

1 - Accelerator Pedal Kick System Temperature
Down Lamp
2 - Actual Torque
3 - Road Speed
4 - Engine Speed
5 - Coolant Temperature
6 - Pedal Torque
7 - Boost Temperature
8 - Oil Pressure
(threshold)
9 - Coolant Temperature
(Eng. Controller threshold)
10 - Vehicle Power
Shutdown/ignition relay
11 - Optimized idle ACC
Bus (ignition relay)
12 - Split Valve 1
13 - High Exhaust System
Temperature Lamp
14 = AUX-Relay
15 = PTO2valve2
6.10.8 Low Battery Voltage Lamp

The Low Battery Voltage Lamp is controlled by the CPC4.

The Low Battery Voltage Lamp remains ON:

• When a low battery voltage is detected.
Low Battery Voltage Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Low Battery Voltage Lamp:
• The Low Battery Voltage Lamp is optional.
• The Low Battery Voltage Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle
operator.

Table 138.
Low Battery Voltage Lamp Programming Options
35 3 12 DO Selection 6 = Battery Voltage 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Low Lamp 1 = Oil Level Lamp
2 = Not used
3 = Oil pressure low
lamp
4 = cruise / PTO
active lamp
5 = FUSO retarder
control 2
6=battery voltage low
lamp
7=Fuel Filter
Restriction Lamp
6.10.9 Low Coolant Level Lamp
Table 139.
The Low Coolant Level Lamp is controlled by the CPC4.
The Low Coolant Level Lamp remains ON:
• When a low coolant level is detected.
Low Coolant Level Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Low Coolant Level Lamp:
• The Low Coolant Level Lamp is optional.

• The Low Coolant Level Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.

Table 140.
Low Coolant Level Lamp Programming Options
35 3 17 DO Selection 9 = Coolant Level 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Low Lamp 1 = Enable starter
lockout
2 = Enable kick down
output
3 = Not used
4 = optimized idle
alarm
5 = Split valve
6= Split AGS2 run
signal / starter
lockout
7= engine brake
disabled for
overspeed
8= battery voltage
low lamp
9= coolant level low
lamp
10 = PTO1valve2
6.10.10 Low Oil Pressure Lamp
Table 141.
The Low Oil Pressure Lamp is controlled by the CPC4 and MCM2.1.
The Low Oil Pressure Lamp remains ON:
• When a low oil pressure fault is detected.
Low Oil Pressure Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Low Oil Pressure Lamp:
• The Low Oil Pressure Lamp is optional.
• The Low Oil Pressure Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.


Table 142.
Low Oil Pressure Lamp Programming Options
35 3 12 DO Selection 3 = Oil Pressure Low 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Lamp 1 = Oil Level Lamp
2 = Not used
Lamp
4 = Cruise/PTO
Active Lamp
5 = FUSO Retarder
Control 2
6= Battery Voltage
Low Lamp
7= Fuel Filter
Restriction Lamp

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
6.10.11 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

Table 143.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is controlled by the ACM2.1, CPC4, and the MCM2.1.
The MIL remains ON:
• For approximately fifteen (15) to twenty (20) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle (a bulb
check).
• For any emission related fault, the light will go out when the fault has been inactive for three
consecutive drive cycles in which the diagnostic was able to make a pass/fail determination.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the MIL:
• The MIL is required.
• The MIL must be integrated into the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
• The MIL must be of sufficient illumination and location to be readily visible under all lighting conditions.
• There shall be only one MIL used to indicate all faults detected on a single vehicle.
• There is a Legal requirement that a minimum of a 15 second bulb check of the MIL occurs at the start of every ignition
cycle.
• CPC will conduct bulb check for hard-wired applications.
• Device controlling the MIL is responsible for conducting bulb check on multiplexed MIL applications.
Multiplexed MIL
If the MIL is multiplexed, it must default to ON if communication is lost between the module physically illuminating the
MIL (e.g. Instrument Cluster) and the module commanding the MIL ON (e.g. CPC). In order to multiplex the MIL with
Detroit Engine applications, you must use PGN 64775 SPN 5080 - (DLCC1) Direct Lamp Control Command (See Chapter
Communication Protocols, section SAE J1939 Supported Messages for more details). If the sending device indicates the data
is in error, the MIL shall be illuminated. A bulb check is to be performed with the Key ON, Engine OFF, whether the MIL is
hardwired, or multiplexed. For applications in which the CPC4 controls the lamp, the bulb must be of sufficient resistance to
allow for detection of a circuit continuity error.
6.10.12 Optimized Idle Active Lamp
Table 144.
The Optimized Idle Active Lamp is controlled by the CPC4 and MCM2.1.
The Optimized Idle Active Lamp remains ON:
• When Optimized Idle is active.
Optimized Idle Active Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Optimized Idle Active Lamp:
• The Optimized Idle Active Lamp is optional.

• The Optimized Idle Active Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle
operator.


Table 145.
Optimized Idle Active Lamp Programming Options
Parameter Group Parameter Required Settings Options Default Access
35 4 09 DO Selection 10 = Optimized Idle 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Active Lamp 1 = Accelerator Pedal
Idle Position
2 = Actual Torque
3 = Road Speed
4 = Engine Speed
5 = Coolant Temp
6 = Pedal Torque
7 = Boost Temp
8 = Oil Pressure
(Threshold)
9 = Coolant Temp
(Eng. Controller
Threshold)
10 = Optimized Idle
Active Lamp
11 = Deceleration
Lamp
12 = Not Used
13 = WIF Lamp
14 = Cruise / PTO
Active Lamp
15 = Check
Transmission Lamp
16 = Battery Charge
Indicator
17 = PTO1 Valve1

35 4 09 DO Fault 9 = SetFault + Diag 0 = Fault Detection 1 = Diag VEPS or DDRS

Detection OFF
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
6.10.13 DEF Post Run Indicator Lamp

An indicator system is required on vehicles equipped with a Negative Battery Disconnect switch. The Post Run Indicator
lamp is controlled by the ACM2.1 and the Aftertreatment System (ATS). The Post Run Indicator lamp is located on the
negative battery disconnect switch. If the ignition is switched off while the ATS is at an elevated temperature, the ACM2.1
activates the Post Run cycle to cool the DEF doser. The Post Run cycle will be interrupted if the Negative Battery Disconnect
is switched off. The lamp will illuminate if a Post Run cycle is in progress, which informs the operator to delay the Negative
Battery Disconnect, until the Post Run Lamp is off, except in an emergency situation.
Table 146.
The Post Run Indicator lamp is controlled by the ACM2.1 and the Aftertreatment System (ATS) and
is located on the Negative Battery Disconnect switch equipped vehicles only.
Post Run Indicator Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Post Run Indicator lamp:

• The ACM2.1 provides an output signal that will drive an LED lamp. Pin 106 supplies voltage to the lamp. Pin 14 supplies
the PWM ground signal to control the lamp. The lamp indicates if the power-down/ignition OFF DEF system post run is
active. The output signal shall only be generated if this feature is present on the vehicle as indicated by the Post Run
Indicator lamp. This feature is only selectable via VEPS.
6.10.14 Red Stop Lamp
Table 147.
The RSL is controlled by the CPC4 and MCM2.1.
The RSL remains ON:
• For approximately five (5) seconds at the start of every ignition cycle (a bulb check)
• When a potential engine damaging fault is detected.
The RSL flashes when Engine Protection Shutdown occurs.
Red Stop Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the RSL:
• The RSL is required.
• A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 (DC) is required depending on the ignition source. Digital output circuits are designed to
sink no more than 0.25 (DC) current.
• The RSL must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the equipment operator.
• The lens color must be red.
• The RSL is connected to pin 3/16 in the CPC4.

The options for this output are listed in the following table:
Table 148.
RSL Programming Options
35 3 16 DO Selection — 0 = Disabled 1 = Stop Engine VEPS

1 = Stop Engine Lamp (red)
Lamp (red)
2 = Buzzer
6.10.15 Wait-to-Start Lamp

Table 149.
The Wait-to-Start Lamp is controlled by the CPC.
The Wait-to-Start Lamp remains ON:
• When the starter lockout system is active; the driver should not start the engine when the light is
on.
Wait-to-Start Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the Wait-to-Start Lamp:
• The Wait-to-Start Lamp is required for all applications.
• The Wait-to-Start Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.


Table 150.
Wait-to-Start Lamp Programming Options
35 4 06 DO Selection 1 = Grid Heater Lamp 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

1 = Grid Heater Lamp
2 = Accelerator Pedal
Idle Position
3 = Run Signal
Starter Lockout
4 = Battery Charge
Indicator
5 = ManeuverMode
6 = Service Brake
Request Lamp

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
6.10.16 Water-In-Fuel Lamp

Table 151.
The Water-in-Fuel (WIF) Lamp is controlled by the CPC4 and the MCM2.1.
The Water-in-Fuel (WIF) Lamp remains ON:
• When a powertrain CAN signal is received indicating the water separator tank is full and requires
draining.
Lamp status will also be broadcast over J1939 (SPN 97).
Water-in-Fuel Lamp Requirements and Guidelines

The following requirements and guidelines apply to the WIF Lamp:
• This lamp is required.
• The CPC4 pin used is 3/9.
• A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A(DC) is required. This digital output is designed to sink no more than 0.25 A(DC)
current.
• The WIF Lamp must be integrated into the instrument panel or placed in clear view of the vehicle operator.


Table 152.
WIF Lamp Programming Options
35 3 09 DO Selection 6 = WIF Lamp 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS

1 = Grid Heater
Hardwired
2 = Not Used
3 = Engine Brake
Active
4 = Engine Brake
Valves Ground
5 = FUSO Engine
Brake Active Relay
6 = WIF Lamp
7 = Expansion tank
pressure control
valve ground
8 = DEF Low Lamp
9 = TIER4 DEF Lamp
10 = EU6
Inducement Lamp
11 = Engine Brake
State Lamp

Idle Position
2 = Actual Torque
3 = Road Speed
4 = Engine Speed
5 = Coolant
Temperature
6 = Pedal Torque
7 = Boost
Temperature
8 = Oil Pressure
(threshold)
9 = Coolant
Temperature (engine
controller threshold)
10 = Optimized Idle
Active Lamp
11 = Deceleration
Lamp
12 = Not Used
13 = WIF Lamp
14 = Cruise/PTO
Active Lamp
15 = Check
Transmission Lamp
16 = Battery Charge
Indicator
17 = PTO1valve1

18 Water in Fuel 0 = Warning and 0 = Warning and 0 = Warning and DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
Shutdown Enable Derate Derate Derate DDRS
1 = Derate and 1 = Derate and
Shutdown Shutdown

7 Inputs and Outputs
7.1 Digital Inputs Overview - CPC4

The CPC input functions and their associated pins are listed in the following table:
Table 153.
CPC Inputs
Digital Input Functions CPC4 Connector / Pin
A/C Status 2/12
Engine Brake Disable / Hood Tilt Switch 4/18
Clutch Released 4/8
Cruise Control Enable 1/14
DPF Inhibit Regeneration Switch 4/13
Engine Brake Low 2/14
Engine Brake Medium 2/15
Fan Control Override 2/13
Idle Validation 1 1/6
Idle Validation 2 1/3
Limiter 0 (LIM0) 1/11
Limiter 1 (LIM1) 2/11
Low Battery Voltage 3/12
DPF Regeneration Switch 4/17
Neutral Switch 4/16
Park Brake Interlock 1/2
Remote Throttle Select Switch 2/8
Remote PTO Switch 2/9
Resume/Accel Enable 1/16
Service Brake Switch 2/7
Set / Coast Enable 1/12
Stop Engine / Aux Shutdown #1 1/10
Throttle Inhibit 1/17
Stop Engine Override 1/15
2 Speed Axle / Trans Retarder Active 1/1
Low Coolant Level 3/11
Evobus retarder lever stage4 1/17
Enable transmission retarder input 4/13
These inputs can be either a switch or an OEM interlock depending on the function.
The following sections contain a description of the available options.

7.1.1 Inputs - Air Condition Status

This digital input indicates that the air conditioner is inactive. When the digital input is open, then the fan is turned on if
configured (Air Condition Enable Auto Fan). There is a 10-second delay when the digital input is grounded before returning
to regular idle.
The AC Enable Switch or the AC High Pressure Switch can be used for this input.
Installation
The Air Conditioner Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 2/12.
Programming Requirement & Flexibility

This digital input’s parameters are listed in the following table:
Table 154.
Air Condition Status Programming Options
Parameter Group Parameter Description Required Setting Default Access
3 Idle Configuration for — 0 = Disabled 3 = Enabled if Neutral VEPS, DDRS or

Limiter Inputs 1 = Enabled and Park Brake DDDL 7.0
2 = Enabled if Neutral
3 = Enabled if Neutral
and Park Brake
4 = Enabled if Park
Brake
6 Mode of AC Status Selects Mode for A/C 0 = Disabled or 2 = A/C Active Open VEPS or DDRS
Input Switch multiplexed (i.e.
Cascadia)
1 = A/C Active
Closed
2 = A/C Active Open
3 = LIM Active
Closed
4 = LIM Active Open
6 Fast Idle Spd Air Fast Idle speed used 500 - 3000 RPM 600 RPM VEPS or DDRS
Cond Input when A/C is activated
19 Air Condition Enable Enables/disables the 0 = Disable 1 = Enable VEPS or DDRS

Auto Fan fan when the A/C is 1 = Enable
on
7.1.2 Inputs - Auxiliary Shutdown #1

The auxiliary shutdown input (auxiliary shutdown #1) are used by other vehicle systems when it is desirable to use the CPC’s
engine protection function. For example, the engine protection function may be used to protect a transmission or pump
against failure. When a vehicle system needs the engine to shutdown, an input port configured as auxiliary shutdown is
switched to sensor return.
When "1 10 DI Selection" is set to 1 - Enable Aux Shutdown, an external stop request via pin 1/10 (grounded) will
instantaneously stop the fueling and the engine will stop without a time delay. The immediate shutdown request via pin 1/10
is handled the same way J1939 engine stop requests are handled.
Installation
The Aux Shutdown #1 Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 1/10.


The options for the auxiliary shutdown #1 digital input are listed in the following table:
Table 155.
Aux Shutdown #1 Programming Options
13 1 10 DI Selection 1 — Enable Aux 0 = Disable 0 = Disable VEPS, DDRS

Shutdown 1 = Enable Aux
Shutdown
2 = FUSO
Accelerator Switch
3 = Evobus Retarder
Level Stage 0
18 Eng Prot — 0 = External Engine 0 = External Engine VEPS, DDRS

Ext Stop Stop Immediate Stop Immediate
Behavior Shutdown Shutdown
1 = External Engine
Stop Delayed
Shutdown
7.1.3 Inputs - Clutch Switch

This input indicates that the clutch is released and is used for suspending Cruise Control and Auto Resume. When the clutch
is released, the input is at battery ground. Cruise Control is suspended if the clutch is pressed once if Auto Resume is
enabled. If the clutch is released within three seconds, Cruise Control is automatically resumed.
The digital input logic for the Clutch Switch disables Cruise Control in the unlikely event of a broken clutch switch wire.
If the transmission type is set to a two pedal system, the engine will know that there is no clutch on the vehicle and will
ignore the clutch switch input.
The Clutch Switch is a normally closed switch. It is customer selectable and is normally disabled.
Installation
The Clutch Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 4/8. Alternatively the Clutch switch may be multiplexed on J1939. Refer to
section "Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link" for additional information.

The options for this digital input are listed in the following table:

Table 156.
Clutch Switch Programming Options
13 Clutch Switch Config 0 = No Clutch Switch 0 = No Clutch Switch VEPS or DDRS

1 = 1 Clutch Switch
2 = 2 Clutch Switch
3 = CCVS1
4 = CCVS2
5 = CCVS3
6 = ETC1
7 = 1 Clutch Switch, clutch
info via PT Can
13 4 08 DI Selection 0 = Disable 1 = 1 Clutch Switch VEPS or DDRS

1 = 1 Clutch Switch
7.1.4 Inputs - Cruise Control ON/OFF Switch

Cruise Control is enabled but not active when the Cruise Control ON/OFF switch digital input is switched to battery ground.
The Cruise Control ON/OFF switch is a normally open switch.
Installation
The Cruise Control ON/OFF Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 1/14. Alternatively, this input may be multiplexed on J1939.
Refer to section "Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link" for additional information on multiplexing this input.

Table 157.
Cruise Control On/Off Switch Programming Options
13 CC ON OFF Switch 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS or DDRS

Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
7.1.5 Inputs - Cruise Control Resume/Accel Switch and Set/Coast Switch

RESUME - If Cruise Control has been disabled with the service brake or the clutch switch, momentary contact to the ON
position (switching to battery ground) restores the previously set cruise speed.
ACCEL- When Cruise Control is active, the Resume/Accel input can be used to increase the power and speed by toggling
the switch. Momentarily toggling and releasing the Resume/Accel switch will increase the set point by 1 m.p.h increments.
Holding the Resume/Accel will increase the set point. When released, the cruise control set point will be at the new speed.
SET- Cruise Speed is set by momentarily contact the switch to the ON position (switching the digital input to battery
ground). Cruise Control will become active and maintain the vehicle speed present at the time.
COAST- When Cruise Control is active, the Set/Coast input can be used to reduce power and speed by toggling the switch.
Momentarily toggling and releasing the Set/Coast switch will decrease the set point by 1 m.p.h increments. Holding the Set/
Coast will decrease the set point but when released, the Cruise Control set point will be at the new speed.

PAUSE SWITCH- In addition to these main controlling switches, Cruise Control may be temporarily disabled by pressing
the Pause Switch. Depending on configuration, the switch is either hardware or evaluated from the J1939 CCVS message.
When disabled through the Pause Switch, Cruise Control can be resumed at the previous set point by toggling the Resume
Switch.
Installation
The Resume/Accel Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 1/16. The Set/Coast Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 1/12.
Alternatively, either may be multiplexed on J1939. Refer to section "Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link" for
additional information on multiplexing this input.

Table 158.
Cruise Control Resume/Accel Switch Programming Options
13 CC Set Cst Res Accel Sw 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS or DDRS

Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
Diagnostics
If both the Cruise Control Set/Coast and Resume/Accel switches are grounded for more than a programmed number of
consecutive samples, a diagnostic fault is logged. All cruise control switch functions will be disabled.
7.1.6 Inputs - DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch and Regen Switch

The Regen Switch is used by the operator to initiate a parked regeneration. This switch is REQUIRED. The Regen switch is a
momentary normally open switch.
If "DPF J1939 Regen Sw Enable" parameter is enabled (1-Active), the CPC4 will no longer process the hardwired Regen
Switch requests. The CPC4 must receive regular periodic switch status messages over J1939.
The DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch is used to inhibit all DPF regenerations. This switch is OPTIONAL. This is typically
used in hazardous environment applications.
If "DPF J1939 Inhibit Sw Enable" parameter is enabled (1-active), the CPC4 will no longer process the hardwired Regen
Inhibit switch requests. The CPC4 must receive regular periodic switch status messages over J1939.
A three position switch or two separate switches can be used. The operating state for both switch implementations is listed in
the following table:
Table 159.
Operating State for Both Switch Implementations
Three Position Switch Truth Table Functionality
Physical Switch Position Type Input to Pin 4/17 (DPF Input to Pin 4/13 (DPF Operating State
Position Regen Sw) Regen Inhibit Sw)
Up Momentary Grounded (TRUE) Grounded (FALSE) Parked Regen Request
Middle Maintain Open (FALSE) Grounded (FALSE) Automatic
Down Maintain Open (FALSE) Open (TRUE) Inhibit/Cancel
N/A N/A Grounded (TRUE) Open (TRUE) Inhibit/Cancel

NOTE: Above functionality will be realized in the vehicle with one switch (three positions) or with two switches
(one for the regen and one for the inhibit).
The operating state based on J1939 switch status is listed in the following table:
Table 160.
The Operating State Based on J1939 Switch Status
SPN 3696 DPF Regen SPN 3695 DPF Inhibit Operating State
ACTIVE (01) NOT ACTIVE (00) Parked Regen Request
NOT ACTIVE (00) NOT ACTIVE (00) Automatic, No Parked Regen Request
NOT ACTIVE (00) ACTIVE (01) Inhibit/Cancel
ACTIVE (01) ACTIVE (01) Inhibit/Cancel
NOTE: Above functionality/truth table will be realized in the vehicle with one switch (three positions) or with two
switches (one for the regen and one for the inhibit).
Installation
The DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch is wired to pin 4/13 of the CPC4 #4 connector.
The Regen Switch is wired to the CPC4 #4 connector pin 4/17. It can be multiplexed.

The options for these digital inputs are listed in the following table:

Table 161.
Regen Switch and DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch Programming Options
13 4 13 DI Selection 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

1 = Enable ABS Input
2 = Enable Transmission
Retarder Input
3 = Enable Tempo Set
4 = Enable Grid Heater
Detection
5 = Switchable Torque
Demand
6 = Drive ON Super
Structure
7 = Throttle Inhibit Super
Structure
8 = Split Select
9 = FUSO Engine Brake
Stage 2 Cancel Switch
10 = DPF Regeneration
Inhibit Switch
11 = Engine Shutdown/
Tier4 Inducement
Override
46 DPF J1939 Inhibit Sw 0 = Not Active 0 = Not Active VEPS or DDRS

Enable 1 = Active
13 4 17 DI Selection 0 = Disable 2 = DPF Regeneration VEPS or DDRS

1 = Two-Clutch Switch Switch
2 = DPF Regeneration
Switch
3 = PTO1stat
46 DPF J1939 Regen Sw 0 = Not Active 0 = Not Active VEPS or DDRS

Enable 1 = Active
7.1.7 Inputs - Dual-Speed Axle Switch

This input indicates that the dual-speed axle ratio has been switched when the input is grounded. When the switch is open,
the dual speed axle ratio is normal.
The Dual-speed Axle Switch is a normally open switch.
Installation
The Dual-speed Axle Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 1/1. Alternatively, it may be multiplexed on J1939. Refer to section
"Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link" for additional information.


Table 162.
Dual-speed Axle Switch Programming Options
13 2nd Axle Speed Switch 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS or DDRS

Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
13 1 01 DI Selection 0 = Disable 0 = Disable VEPS or DDRS

1 = Enable Dual Speed
Axle
Retarder Input
3 = Clutch switch
4 = EvoBus Cruise
Control Lever Quit signal
7.1.8 Inputs - Engine Brake Disable

Engine Brake Disable is a digital input which is switched to battery ground whenever a vehicle system such as a traction
control device does not want engine braking to occur.
The CPC4, which controls the Engine Brake directly, will not allow engine braking when the input is switched to battery
ground. DDEC13 supports the J1939 message to disable engine brake (TSC1 command to source address 15).
Installation
The Engine Brake Disable Switch is wired to pin 4/18 on the CPC4.


Table 163.
Engine Brake Disable Programming Options
13 4 18 DI Selection 5=- Engine Brake 0 = Disable 0 = Disable VEPS, DDRS

Disable 1 = Enable Crank
Inhibit
2 = Enable Engine
Hood (Optimized
Idle)
3 = Not Used
4 = RPM Freeze
5 = Engine Brake
Disable
6 = Fast Engine Heat
Up Switch
7 = Service Brake
Active
8 = Driver Requested
Engine Brake
Lockout
9 = Maneuver Mode
10 = Torque Curve
Selection, Bit 1
7.1.9 Inputs - Engine Brake Low and Medium

The Engine Brake Low and Engine Brake Medium switches select the level of engine braking as listed in the following table:
Table 164.
Level of Engine Braking
Engine Brake Low Digital Input Engine Brake Medium Digital Input Engine Brake Status
OPEN OPEN OFF
GND OPEN LOW
OPEN GND MEDIUM
GND GND HIGH
The Engine Brake Low and Engine Brake Medium switches are normally open switches.
Installation
The Engine Brake Low Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 2/14 and Engine Brake Medium Switch is wired to the CPC4 on
pin 2/15.


Table 165.
Engine Brake Switch Programming Options
13 Engine Brake Switch 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired DDRS, VEPS

Config 1= info from J1939
(muxed)
2 = Info from LIN
255 = Not Available
13 2 14 DI Selection 0 = disable 1 = engine brake low DDRS, VEPS

1 = engine brake low
2 = Evobus retarder lever
stage1
3 = CC Hysteresis Low
4 = RemAP IVS1
13 2 15 DI Selection 0 = disable 1 = engine brake high DDRS, VEPS

1 = engine brake high
stage2
3 = CC Hysteresis High
4 = RemAP IVS1
7.1.10 Inputs - Fan Override

This digital input is used to activate the fan when the input is switched to battery ground.
The fan override switch is a normally open switch
Installation
The Fan Override Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 2/13.

Table 166.
Fan Override Parameter
13 2 13 DI Selection 0 - Disable 1 = Fan Override Switch DDRS, VEPS

1 - Fan Override Switch
2 - Evobus Retarder lever
stage5
7.1.11 Inputs – Idle Validation 1 and Idle Validation 2

The Idle Validation Switch consists of two contacts. Idle Validation 1 is normally closed and indicates that the accelerator
pedal is in the idle position when the input is grounded. Idle Validation 2 is normally open and indicates that the accelerator
pedal is not in the idle position when it is grounded.
NOTE: An Idle Validation Switch is required.

Installation
The Idle Validation 1 Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 1/6. The Idle Validation 2 Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 1/3.
7.1.12 Inputs - Limiters for Torque, Engine Speed, and Vehicle Speed
These inputs indicate that the engine is being limited to a torque, engine speed or vehicle speed. These limiters are Limiter 0
(LIM0) and Limiter 1 (LIM1).
Installation
Limiter 0 is wired to the CPC4 on pin 1/11, Limiter 1 on pin 2/11.

Refer to section "Limiters" for more information.
7.1.13 Inputs - Optimized Idle Hood Tilt Switch

The Hood Tilt Switch digital input indicates when the hood is opened or closed for Optimized Idle operation.
The Hood Tilt Switch is a normally open switch and is required for Optimized Idle.
Installation
The Hood Tilt Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 4/18.
NOTE: Some applications may use the Transmission Range Position sensor connected in series with the Hood
Tilt Switch as an input for Optimized Idle. With that configuration, low air pressure may indicate the hood is open
and affect Optimized Idle operation.


Table 167.
Hood Tilt Switch Programming Options
13 4 18 DI Selection 2 = Enable Engine 0 = Disable 0 = Disable VEPS, DDRS

Hood (Optimized 1 = Enable Crank
Idle) Inhibit
2 = Enable Engine
Hood (Optimized
Idle)
3 = Not Used
4 = RPM Freeze
5 = Engine Brake
Disable
6 = Fast engine Heat
Up Switch
7 = Service Brake
Active
Engine Brake
Lockout
9 = Maneuver Mode
10 = Torque Curve
Selection, Bit 1
7.1.14 Inputs - Optimized Idle Thermostat

The OI thermostat input indicates when the engine should run to heat/cool the cab when operating in Optimized Idle mode.
This input is normally open.
Installation
The OI thermostat is wired to the CPC4 on pin 3/1.

Table 168.
OI Thermostat Programming Options
13 3 01 AI Selection 2 = Optimized Idle 0 = No Sensor 0 = No Sensor VEPS, DDRS

Thermostat 1 = Air Filter
Restriction Sensor
2 = Optimized Idle
Thermostat
3 = FUSO Idle
Volume sensor input
7.1.15 Inputs - Park Brake Switch

This input indicates that the Park Brake is engaged when switched to battery ground.
The Park Brake Switch is a normally open switch.

Installation
This input is wired to the CPC4 pin 1/2. Alternatively, this input may be multiplexed on J1939. Refer to section "Switch
Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link" for additional information on multiplexing this input. This input is required.

This digital input can be configured as listed in the following table:
Table 169.
Configuring the Park Brake Switch Input
13 1 02 DI Selection 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Park Brake VEPS or DDRS

1 = Enable Park Brake Interlock
Interlock
13 Park Brake Switch Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS or DDRS

1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
7.1.16 Inputs - Remote Throttle Select Switch

This digital input when switched to battery ground indicates that the remote throttle is active. The switch information will
only be used if the remote accelerator input is configured.
The remote accelerator enable switch is a normally open switch.
Installation
This input is wired to the CPC4 pin 2/8.


Table 170.
Configuring the Remote Accelerator Select Input
20 Remote Accelerator — 0 = Remote AP 0 = Remote AP VEPS or DDRS

Enable disabled disabled
1 = Remote AP
without IVS (Idle
Validation Switches)
2 = Remote AP with
1 IVS
3 = Remote AP with
2 IVS
4 = Remote AP PWM
single channel on
FPO1 or FPO2
13 2 08 DI Selection 1 = Remote-Throttle 0 = Disable 0 = Disable VEPS, DDRS or

enable 1 = Remote Throttle DDDL 7.0
enable
Up Switch
3 = Evobus retarder
lever stage3
7.1.17 Inputs - Remote PTO Switch

The Remote PTO Switch allows the use of a customer selected high idle speed instead of the hot idle engine speed. Refer to
section "Throttle Control/Governors" for more information.
The Remote PTO Switch is a normally open switch.
Installation

Table 171.
Configuring The Remote PTO Switch
13 2 09 DI Selection — 0 = Disable 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS or

1 = Hardwired DDDL 7.0
2 = J1939 PTO
7.1.18 Inputs - RPM Freeze

The RPM Freeze input (when grounded) allows the operator to request that PTO maintain the current engine speed. Locking
on to a fixed engine speed is desirable in applications where the input is subjected to electrical noise which in turn causes the
engine speed to fluctuate. The RPM Freeze Switch is normally open.

Installation
This input is wired to pin 4/18 on the CPC4.

Table 172.
RPM Freeze Programming Options
13 4 18 DI Selection 0 = Disable 0 = Disable VEPS, DDRS

1 = Enable Crank Inhibit
2 = Enable Engine Hood
(Optimized Idle)
3 = Not Used
4 = RPM Freeze
5 = Engine Brake Disable
6 = Fast Engine Heat Up
Switch
7 = Service Brake Active
Engine Brake Lockout
9 = Maneuver Mode
10 = Torque Curve
Selection, Bit 1
7.1.19 Inputs - Service Brake Released Switch

This input indicates that the brake is released when switched to battery ground. If the brake is activated, then the input is
open. This input will suspend cruise control when the brake is activated.
The service brake switch is a normally closed switch. This input is required.
Installation
This input is wired to the CPC4 pin 2/7. Alternatively, this input may be multiplexed on J1939. Refer to section "Switch
Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link" for additional information on multiplexing this input.

Table 173.
Configuring the Service Brake Switch Input
13 Service Brake Switch 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS or DDRS

Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
4 = Ebc1 (SPN 1121)
5 = J1939 PROP6 (T4PP
Cab only)

7.1.20 Inputs - Stop Engine Override

The Stop Engine Override Switch is a momentary normally open switch. When the input is switched to battery ground, a
shutdown override is enabled.
Shutdown Override Switch is a momentary normally open switch.
Installation

Table 174.
Stop Engine Override Parameter
13 1 15 DI Selection 0 = Disable 1 = engine shutdown/ DDRS, VEPS

1 = engine shutdown/ Tier4 inducement override
Tier4 inducement override
2 = FUSO CC-Cancel
7.1.21 Inputs - Throttle Inhibit

If the Throttle Inhibit Switch is switched to battery ground, the engine will not respond to the foot pedal or remote throttle. A
typical application is a fire truck.
The Throttle Inhibit Switch is a normally open switch.
Installation
The Throttle Inhibit Switch is wired to the CPC4 on pin 1/17.

Table 175.
Throttle Inhibit Parameter Inputs
17 1 17 DI Selection 0 = Disable 1 = Throttle Inhibit DDRS, VEPS

1 = Throttle Inhibit
stage4
7.1.22 Inputs - Transmission Neutral Switch

This digital input when switched to battery ground indicates that the transmission is in neutral. An open circuit indicates in
gear.
This input is required for Optimized Idle.

Installation

Table 176.
Configuring the Transmission Neutral Switch Input
13 Trans Neutral Input Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired DDRS, VEPS

1 = ETC2
2 = ETC5
255 = Not Configured
7.1.23 Inputs - Transmission Retarder Active

This input indicates that the transmission retarder is active. When the input is switched to ground, the fan is turned off. When
the input is open, the fan will be turned on. The fan will be on for a minimum of 30 seconds. Refer to the transmission
manufacturers documentation to determine when to connect this input.
Installation
The transmission retarder input is wired to the CPC4 pin 1/1.

Table 177.
Transmission Retarder Input Options
13 1 01 DI Selection 2 = Enable 0 = Disable 0 = Disable VEPS or DDRS

Transmission 1 = Enable Dual
Retarder Input Speed Axle
2 = Enable
Transmission
Retarder Input
3 = Clutch switch
4 = EvoBus Cruise
Control Lever Quit
signal
7.2 Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link

Multiplexing is available for several switch inputs over the SAE J1939 Data Link. The CPC4 supports this feature for the
following switch inputs:
• Cruise Control On/Off Switch
• Cruise Control Set/Coast
• Cruise Control Resume/Accel
• Cruise Cancel Switch
• Service Brake Switch

• Park Brake Switch

• Clutch Brake Switch
• Engine Brake Switches - EBC1 Message
• Dual-Speed Axle Switch
• Regen Switch
• Regen Inhibit Switch
• Remote PTO
• Fan Switch
To use the multiplexing feature with the CPC4, the parameters must be set up correctly. There are three different source
addresses (SA) possible for receiving the Cruise Control message. Every switch in this message must be programmed to react
on one programmed SA. The SA is programmed by the vehicle OEM.
If an error is detected (wrong data on J1939 CC message or the message is not sent) an error is logged. If the error is caused
by wrong data or missing data, the error will be logged and will be held active until the ignition is switched off. Cruise
Control will also be disabled.
The options for each source address and the multiplexing parameters are listsed in the following two tables:
Table 178.
Source Address Options
1 EBC1 Source Address 0 - 255 33 VEPS, DDRS
SAE J1939
1 CC1 Source Address SAE 0 - 255 23 VEPS, DDRS
J1939
J1939
J1939
1 TSC1 Source 0 - 255 231 VEPS, DDRS
AddressSAE J1939
1 CM1 DPF Source Addr 0 - 255 49 VEPS, DDRS
SAE J1939
1 CM1 Fan Source Addr 1 0 - 255 25 VEPS, DDRS
SAE J1939
1 CM1 Fan Source Addr 2 0 - 255 49 VEPS, DDRS
SAE J1939
1 PTO Source Address SAE 0 - 255 23 VEPS, DDRS
J1939

Table 179.
Parameters for Multiplexing
1 PTO Source Address SAE 0 - 255 23 VEPS, DDRS
J1939
13 CC On Off Switch Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
13 CC Set Cst Res Accel Sw 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
13 Service Brake Switch 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
4 = Ebc1 (SPN 1121)
5 = J1939 PROP6 (T4PP
Cab only)
13 Park Brake Switch Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
13 Clutch Switch Config 0 = No Clutch Switch 0 = No Clutch Switch VEPS, DDRS
1 = 1 Clutch Switch
2 = 2 Clutch Switch
3 = CCVS1
4 = CCVS2
5 = CCVS3
6 = ETC1
7 = 1 Clutch switch, clutch
info via PTCan
13 2nd Axle Speed Switch 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
13 Engine Brake Switch 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
Config 1 = Info from J1939
(muxed)
2 = Info from LIN
255 = Not Available
13 Trans Neutral Input Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
1 = ETC2
2 = ETC5
255 = Not Available

Parameters for Multiplexing

13 CC Pause Switch Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
4 = CCVS1 or CCVS2
5 = CCVS2 or CCVS3
6 = CCVS1 or CCVS3
7 = CCVS1 or CCVS2 or
CCVS3
8 = CCVS1 or hardwired
hardwired
hardwired
hardwired
CCVS3 or hardwired
13 Cab PTO Switch Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
4 = CCVS1 or Hardwired
13 Stop Eng Override Sw 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS or DDRS
Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
46 DPF J1939 Inhibit Sw 0 = Not Active 0 = Not Active VEPS or DDRS
Enable 1 = Active
46 DPF J1939 Regen Sw 0 = Not Active 0 = Not Active VEPS or DDRS
Enable 1 = Active
7.3 Digital Outputs Overview - CPC4

The CPC4 has 16 digital output pins, 13 low side and three high side. The CPC4 digital output functions and their associated
pins are listed in the following table:
Table 180.
Digital Outputs - CPC4
Digital Output Function Driver CPC4 Connector/Pin
Amber Warning Lamp Low Side 2/10
Cruise Active Lamp Low Side 3/12
Deceleration Lamp Low Side 4/9
DEF Low Lamp Low Side 3/10
DPF Regeneration Lamp Low Side 1/5
Engine Brake Active Low Side 3/9
High Exhaust System Temperature Lamp Low Side 4/7
O/I Alarm Low Side 3/17
Low Oil Pressure Lamp Low Side 3/12
Malfunction Indicator Lamp Low Side 1/13

Digital Outputs - CPC4

Digital Output Function Driver CPC4 Connector/Pin
Optimized Idle Active Lamp Low Side 4/9
Coolant Level Low Lamp Low Side 3/11
Red Stop Lamp Low Side 3/16
Starter Lockout/Run Signal Low Side 3/17
Top2 Shift Solenoid High Side 3/8
Top2 Lockout Solenoid High Side 3/7
Vehicle Power Shutdown High Side 4/10
Water-in-Fuel Lamp Low Side 3/9
7.3.1 Outputs - Amber Warning Lamp

The Amber Warning Lamp is illuminated for all active faults that require driver attention. The AWL will also flash when an
engine shutdown occurs.
Installation
This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 250 mA (DC) current.
The AWL is wired to pin 2/10 of the CPC4.
NOTE: This digital output is REQUIRED if not multiplexed.
7.3.2 Outputs - Cruise Active Lamp

When Cruise Control’s Cruise Switch PTO is active, this digital output is switched to ground. This digital output can be used
to drive a lamp indicating the active state of Cruise Control.
This function is optional.
Installation
This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more that 250 mA (DC) current. The Cruise Active Lamp is wired to pin
3/12 of the CPC4.


Table 181.
Cruise Active Lamp Programming Options
35 3 12 DO Selection 4 = Cruise Active 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

2 = Not Used
Lamp
4 = Cruise
Active/PTO Lamp
5 = FUSO Retarder
Control 2
6 = Battery Voltage
Low Lamp
7 = Fuel Filter
Restriction Lamp

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2= PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
7.3.3 Outputs - Deceleration Lamp

The Deceleration Lamp option is a lamp on the rear of the vehicle to warn that the vehicle is slowing down. This digital
output could be used to drive a deceleration lamp or more typically a relay which drives the deceleration lamps. This digital
output is switched to ground whenever the percent throttle is zero and Cruise Control is inactive.
This feature is optional.

Installation
This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current. The Deceleration Lamp is wired to pin 4/9 of
the CPC4.


Table 182.
35 4 09 DO Selection 11 = Deceleration 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Lamp 1 = Accelerator Pedal
Idle Position
2 = Actual Torque
3 = Road Speed
4 = Engine Speed
5 = Coolant Temp
6 = Pedal Torque
7 = Boost
Temperature
8 = Oil Pressure
(Threshold)
9 = Coolant Temp
(Eng. Controller
Threshold)
10 = Optimized Idle
Active Lamp
11 = Deceleration
Lamp
12 = Not Used
13 = WIF Lamp
14 = Cruise/PTO
Active Lamp
15 = Check
Transmission Lamp
16 = Battery Charge
17 = PTO1valve1


Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
7.3.4 Outputs - DPF Regeneration Lamp (Hardwired and J1939)

The purpose of this lamp is to let the operator know that a parked regeneration is required. This lamp can be hardwired or
multiplexed. Solid illumination indicates a manual regeneration is required.
This function is REQUIRED.
Installation
The DPF Lamp is wired to pin 1/5 of the CPC4.


Table 183.
DPF Regeneration Lamp Programming Options

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
7.3.5 Outputs - Engine Brake Active

This digital output is switched to ground whenever the Engine Brake is active. This digital output could be used to drive an
Engine Brake Active Lamp or give an engine brake active indication to another vehicle system.
Installation
This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.
Engine Brake Active is wired to pin 3/9 of the CPC4.


Table 184.
Engine Brake Active Programming Options
35 3 09 DO Selection 3 = Engine Brake 0 = Disabled 0 =- Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Active 1 = Grid Heater
Hardwired
2 = Not Used
3 = Engine Brake
Active
4 = Engine Brake
Valves ground
5 = FUSO Engine
Brake Relay
6 = WIF Lamp
7 = ExpansionTank
Pressure Control
Valve Ground
8 = DEF Low Lamp
9 = TIER4 DEF Lamp
10 = EU6
Inducement Lamp
11 = Engine Brake
State Lamp

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag

7.3.6 Outputs - High Exhaust System Temperature (HEST) Lamp (Hardwired and J1939)
The purpose of this lamp is to let the operator know that the exhaust temperature is at an elevated condition with low vehicle
speed. It can be hardwired or multiplexed.
Installation
The HEST Lamp is wired to pin 4/7 of the CPC4.


Table 185.
35 4 07 DO Selection 13 - High Exhaust 0 = Disabled 13 = High Exhaust VEPS, DDRS

Temp Lamp 1 = Accelerator Pedal Temp Lamp
Kick Down
2 = Actual Torque
3 = Road Speed
4 = Engine Speed
5 = Coolant
Temperature
6 = Pedal Torque
7 = Boost
Temperature
8 = Oil Pressure
(threshold)
9 = Coolant
Temperature (Eng.
Controller threshold)
10 = Vehicle Power
Shutdown / Ignition
Relay
11 = Optimized Idle
ACC Bus (ignition
relay)
12 = Split Valve 1
13 = High Exhaust
Temp Lamp
14 = AUX-Relay
15 = PTO2valve2

35 4 07 DO Fault — 0 = Fault Detection 1 = Diag VEPS, DDRS

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
7.3.7 Outputs - Low Battery Voltage Lamp

This digital output is switched to ground when a low battery voltage fault is detected.
Installation
The Low Battery Voltage Lamp is wired to pin 3/12 (optional 3/17 for Crane applications) of the CPC4.


Table 186.
Low Battery Voltage Lamp
35 3 12 DO Selection 6 = Battery Voltage 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Low Lamp 1 = Oil Level Lamp
2 = Not Used
Lamp
4 = Cruise / PTO
Active Lamp
5 = FUSO Retarder
Control 2
6 = Battery Voltage
Low Lamp
7 = Fuel Filter
Restriction Lamp

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
7.3.8 Outputs - Low Coolant Level Lamp

This digital output is switched to ground when a low coolant level fault is detected.

Installation
The Low Coolant Level Lamp is wired to pin 3/17 of the CPC4.


Table 187.
Coolant Level Low Lamp Programming Options
35 3 17 DO Selection 9 = Coolant Level 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Low Lamp 1 = Enable Starter
Lockout
2 = Enable Kick
Down Output
3 = Not Used
4 = Optimized Idle
Alarm
5 = Split Valve
6 = Split AGS2 Run
Signal / Starter
Lockout
7 = Engine Brake
Disabled for
Overspeed
8 = Battery Voltage
Low Lamp
9 = Coolant Level
Low Lamp
10 = PTO1valve2
35 3 17 DO Fault 0 = Fault Detection 1 = Diag VEPS or DDRS

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag

7.3.9 Outputs - Low Oil Pressure Lamp

This digital output is switched to ground when a low oil pressure fault is detected.
Installation
The Low Oil Pressure Lamp is wired to pin 3/12 of the CPC4.


Table 188.
Low Oil Pressure Lamp Programming Options
35 3 12 DO Selection 3 = Oil Pressure Low 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

2 = Not Used
Lamp
4 = Cruise/PTO
Active Lamp
5 = FUSO Retarder
Control 2
6 = Battery Voltage
Low Lamp
7 = Fuel Filter
Restriction Lamp

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
7.3.10 Outputs - Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

This amber lamp is illuminated for all active engine emission related faults including but not limited to after-treatment
devices. The MIL may illuminate at the same time as the Amber Warning Lamp. This is a required lamp. It can be hardwired
or multiplexed.
This digital output is REQUIRED.

Installation
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp is wired to pin 1/13 of the CPC4.
On-Board Diagnostic Requirements and Guidelines

On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) regulations require circuit continuity detection of the MIL circuit. The following requirements
apply to the OEM:
• Multiplexed MIL must default to ON if communication is lost between modules for any reason or if sending device
indicates the data is unavailable or data is in error.
• If multiplexed (OEM device is controlling lamps), the device shall be capable of detecting any circuit continuity
malfunctions. The OEM must broadcast circuit malfunction information (continuity checks) on the powertrain J1939 data
link per J1939-73 requirements.
• For applications in which the CPC4 controls the lamp, the bulb must be of sufficient resistance to allow for detection of a
circuit continuity error.


Table 189.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
35 1 13 DO Selection 1 = MIL Lamp 0 = Disabled 1 = MIL Lamp VEPS or DDRS

1 = MIL Lamp
2 = DEF Low Lamp
3 = Coolant
Temperature Lamp

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
7.3.11 Outputs - Optimized Idle Active Lamp

The Optimized Idle Active lamp digital output will flash at a rate of once every half second while the idle timer is counting
down, after the system has initialized. The digital output is switched to sensor return after the idle timer has timed out and
Optimized Idle has become active. The output will be activated along with the AWL and the RSL when the ignition is cycled
ON for the bulb check. For more information on Optimized Idle, Refer to section "Optimized Idle".
Installation
This digital output circuit is designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current. The OI Active Lamp is wired to the CPC4 on
pin 4/09.
This output is required for Optimized Idle.


Table 190.
35 4 09 DO Selection 10 = OI Active Lamp 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Idle Position
2 = Actual Torque
3 = Road Speed
4 = Engine Speed
5 = Coolant
Temperature
6 = Pedal Torque
7 = Boost Temp
8 = Oil Pressure
(Threshold)
9 = Coolant
Temperature (Eng.
Controller Threshold)
10 = OI Active Lamp
11 = Deceleration
Lamp
12 = Not Used
13 = WIF Lamp
14 = Cruise / PTO
Active Lamp
15 = Check
Transmission Lamp
16 = Battery Charge
Indicator
17 = PTO1 Valve1

Detection OFF
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
Diagnostics
A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be logged for an open or shorted circuit.

7.3.12 Outputs - Optimized Idle Alarm

The Optimized Idle Alarm digital output is switched to sensor return to turn on the Optimized Idle Alarm. The alarm will
sound for five seconds prior to any Optimized Idle engine start. For more information on Optimized Idle, Refer to section
"Optimized Idle".
Installation
This digital output is designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current. The OI Alarm is wired to the CPC4 on pin 3/17. The
DDC part number for the OI Alarm is 23517899.
This output is required for Optimized Idle.


Table 191.
Optimized Idle Alarm Programming Options
35 3 17 DO Selection 4 = Optimized Idle 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Alarm 1 = Enable Starter
Lockout
2 = Enable Kickdown
Output
3 = Not Used
4 = Optimized Idle
Alarm
5 = Split Valve
6 = Starter Lockout
and AGS2 Run
Signal/Starter
Lockout
7 = Engine Brake
Disabled for
Overspeed
8 = Battery Voltage
Low Lamp
9 = Coolant Level
Low Lamp
10 = PTO1valve2

Detection OFF
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag

Diagnostics
A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be logged for an open or shorted circuit.
7.3.13 Outputs - Red Stop Lamp

The Red Stop Lamp (RSL) is illuminated for all active serious faults, which require the engine to be shutdown immediately.
The AWL will also flash when an engine shutdown occurs.
Installation
The RSL is wired to pin 3/16 of the CPC4.
NOTE: This digital output is REQUIRED.
7.3.14 Outputs - Starter Lockout

This digital output drives a normally closed relay which interrupts the starting signal when the output has been activated.
Installation
The Starter Lockout digital output is wired to pin 3/17 of the CPC4.


Table 192.
Starter Lockout Programming Options
35 3 17 DO Selection 1 = Enable Starter 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

Lockout 1 = Enable Starter
Lockout
2 = Enable Kickdown
Output
3 = Not Used
4 = Optimized Idle
Alarm
5 = Split Valve
6 = Starter Lockout
and AGS2 Run
Signal/Starter
Lockout
7 = Engine Brake
Disabled for
Overspeed
8 = Battery Voltage
Low Lamp
9 = Coolant Level
Low Lamp
10 = PTO1valve2

Detection Off
1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff +
Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn +
Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag

7.3.15 Outputs - Vehicle Power Shutdown

This digital output actuates a relay that shuts down the rest of the electrical power to the vehicle when an idle shutdown or
engine protection shutdown occurs.
Installation
The Vehicle Power Shutdown is wired to pin 4/10 of the CPC4. This is a high side digital output.

Table 193.
Vehicle Power Shutdown Programming Options
Parameter Group Parameter Options Access
35 4 10 DO Selection 0 = Disabled VEPS or DDRS

1 = Not used
2 = Not used
3 = Vehicle Power Shutdown / ignition
relay
4 = Engine Brake Active
5 = Battery Charge Indicator
6 = PTO2valve1
7 = High Exhaust Temperature Lamp
8 = Engine Brake State Lamp
35 4 10 DO Fault Detection 0 = Fault Detection OFF VEPS or DDRS

1 = Diag
2 = Pulse when off
3 = Pulse when off + Diag
4 = Pulse when on
5 = Pulse when on + Diag
6 = Pulse when on + Pulse when off
7 = Pulse when on + Pulse when off +
Diag
8 = Set Fault
9 = Set Fault + Diag
10 = SetFault + PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault + PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault + PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault + PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault + PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault + PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
7.3.16 Outputs - Water-In-Fuel Lamp

This output is turned on when a signal from the MCM2.1 is received indicating that the water separator tank is full and
requires draining.
NOTE: Water-In-Fuel Lamp is mandatory.

Installation
A 12 volt light of less than 0.25 A (DC) is required. This digital output is designed to sink no more than 0.25 A (DC) current.
The Water-In-Fuel lamp is wired to 3/9 or 4/9 of the CPC4.
Operation
Normal Operation
• WIF code active (Water-in-Fuel), Light on dash comes on (CEL off), no derates (warning only).
• With WIF code active, after three ignition cycles or five engine hours (whichever comes first), WIF ignored becomes
active (Water-in-Fuel Ignored), light on dash remains on (CEL off), engine derates by 25% of max power (derate).
Aggressive Operation
• WIF code (Water-in-Fuel Ignored -Derate) and WIF ignored code active (Water-in-Fuel Ignored Shutdown), Light on dash
comes on (CEL off), shutdown procedure started, 30 sec. to shutdown.
• With WIF code active, after three ignition cycles or five engine hours (whichever comes first), same as above.


Table 194.

1 = grid heater
hardwired
2 = Not Used
3 = Engine Brake
Active
4 = Engine Brake
Valves Ground
5 = FUSO Engine
Brake Active Relay
6 = WIF Lamp
7 = Expansion Tank
Pressure Control
Valve Ground
8 = DEF Low Lamp
9 = TIER4 DEF Lamp
10 = EU6
Inducement Lamp
11 = Engine Brake
State Lamp

idle Position
2 = Actual Torque
3 = Road Speed
4 = Engine Speed
5 = Coolant
Temperature
6 = Pedal Torque
7 = Boost
Temperature
8 = Oil Pressure
(threshold)
9 = Coolant
Temperature (engine
controller threshold)
10 = Optimized Idle
Active Lamp
11 = Deceleration
Lamp
12 = Not Used
13 = WIF Lamp
14 = cruise / PTO
active lamp
15 = Check
Transmission Lamp
16 = Battery Charge
Indicator
17 = PTO1valve1

18 Water-in-Fuel — 0 = Warning and 0 = Warning and DDDL 7.X, VEPS,

Shutdown Enable Derate Derate DDRS
1 = Derate and
Shutdown
7.4 ACM2.1 Input Sensors and Output Actuators

The ACM2.1 input sensors are listed in the following table:
Table 195.
ACM2.1 Input Sensors
Sensor Function
DEF Level Sensor DEF (DEF) level tank sensor used for on-board diagnostics (OBD)
and driver warning indicators.
DPF Inlet Pressure Sensor Used for regen calculation. The catalyzed DPF function is to convert
HC and CO emissions during active regeneration as well as to
DPF Outlet Pressure Sensor
convert NO to NO2 to support the NOx conversion in the SCR.
DPF Outlet Temperature Sensor Temperature measured at the outlet of the after-treatment system
that is installed within the exhaust system of the vehicle. It’s located
after the DPF that is within the after-treatment unit.
DOC Inlet Temperature Monitors exhaust temperature coming into the DOC. Used for regen
DOC Outlet Temperature Temperature measured between the DOC and the DPF in the after-
treatment assembly located in the exhaust system of the vehicle.
DOC Outlet Temperature Inboard Monitors exhaust temperature exiting out of the DOC. Used for regen
DOC Outlet Temperature Outboard Monitors secondary exhaust flow temperature exiting out of the DOC.
Used for regen calculation and to support soot oxidation and convert
HC injected during active regeneration.
SCR Inlet Temperature Used for NOx calculation.
Smart NOx Sensor (DPF Outlet) Measures the NOx concentration, air/fuel ration and equilibrium
Smart NOx Sensor (SCR Outlet) Measures the NOx concentration, air/fuel ration and equilibrium
DEF Pressure Sensor Provides a Metering Unit pressure signal so the DEF is kept in a
required pressure range.
DEF Temperature Sensor Proper DEF flow is a function of the temperature sensor input and
balanced operation of the electronic controls.
The ACM2.1 output actuators are listed in the following table:

Table 196.
ACM2.1 Output Actuators
Actuator Description
Metering Unit (12V) Provides control flow for DEF dosing for SCR function. Atomizes
DEF for SCR injection.
Supply Unit (12V) Provides a filtered DEF flow and stores a small DEF volume to
maintain pressure. A permanent magnet brush motor is used to
pump DEF.
Cooling Water Valve Provides engine coolant upon command to flow through the supply
unit and DEF tank to prevent freezing.
Metering Unit AUX Heater Prevents freezing of DEF between the dosing valve and nozzle.
Line Heaters Prevents freezing of DEF in lines between engine, DEF tank, and
Dosing Valve.

8 Features
8 Features
8.1 Auto-Elevate Idle

The Auto-Elevate Idle feature eliminates the hydrocarbon buildup before reaching critical levels by automatically increasing
engine RPM. This process results in a temporary increase of exhaust temperatures that effectively oxidizes the hydrocarbon
(HC) within the Aftertreatment Device (ATD).
Operation
When Auto-Elevate is enabled, after a predetermined amount of idle, DDEC 13 will automatically elevate engine RPM,
typically seven to eight minutes, in order to raise exhaust temperatures and eliminate hydrocarbon buildup in the ATD.
The engine must be idling for a minimum of four minutes, park brake must be on and transmission in neutral (if equipped
with a neutral switch). Engine speed is slowly elevated from idle to 1100 RPM for typically seven to eight minutes. It can run
for a maximum of 20 minutes if the process cannot complete.
Indicator Lamps
• The DPF lamp is programmed to work with the Auto-Elevate feature. The indicator lamp will work exactly as it does for
the Regeneration process (except that the engine will NOT derate in Zone 4).
• The DPF lamp will light for hydrocarbon (HC) if the Auto-Elevate feature is disabled or interrupted.
• The DPF lamp will not light for HC if the Extended Idle Auto RPM Elevate option is enabled and the Auto-Elevate is not
interrupted.
• If the Auto-Elevate is NOT enabled, the following lamp progression holds true:

Table 197.
Auto-Elevate Indicator Lamps
Bring vehicle to highway speeds to allow for an

Automatic Regeneration OR Perform a Parked
Regeneration.
SOLID
Bring vehicle to highway speeds to allow for an

Automatic Regeneration OR Perform a Parked
Regeneration as soon as possible.
FLASHING
Vehicle must be parked and a Parked

Regeneration OR Service Regeneration must be
performed. PARKED REGENERATION
REQUIRED.
FLASHING +
Vehicle must be parked and a Parked

Regeneration OR Service Regeneration must be
performed. PARKED REGENERATION
REQUIRED — ENGINE SHUTDOWN.
FLASHING + +

The Auto-Elevate parameter is listed in the following table:
Table 198.
ACM2.1 Auto-Elevate Parameters
Diagnostic Name Parameter Group Min. Max. Default Description Access
Extended Idle 5 0 1 0 0 - Disabled DDDL 7.x, DDRS,

Auto RPM Elevate 1 - Enabled VEPS
8.2 Clean Idle Limiting Feature

California has legislation that requires the engine manufacturer to limit the allowable engine idling time. Other states have
adopted California's Emission rules and this feature is activated on all GHG14 DDEC13 engines.
Operation
This shutdown feature is not an engine malfunction and is required to meet the state of California emissions regulations.
After an automatic shutdown, the engine may be restarted and operated normally.

8 Features
Idle Conditions
The idle timer is activated only when all criteria listed in the following table are met:
NOTE: If idle is below the Clean Idle speed (900 rpm) and the Idle Shutdown is not enabled, or the engine is 30g
NO xor less per hour compliant, the engine will not shut down.
Table 199.
Criteria for Clean Idle Timer Activation
Engine is running and engine speed in greater than 900 rpm
Coolant temperature is higher than 15.6°C (60°F)
Vehicle is not moving
Transmission is in neutral gear (or no neutral detection available)
Accelerator pedal is actuated
When the timer reaches five minutes (300 sec) while Park Brake is closed, or 15 minutes (900 sec) while Park Brake is open,
the engine shutdown sequence will commence. If any of the criteria are not met, the timer will not be active. The timer will
reset and begin counting from zero again once all the criteria for either condition are met. The engine shutdown sequence can
be overridden by the conditions detailed in one of the following sections.
PTO Conditions
For applications that have a working PTO, the shutdown can be disabled.
If Remote PTO is active (CPC4 pin 2/9 is grounded and feature is enabled), the PTO and idle timers for the Clean Idle
Limiting Feature are deferred until Remote PTO is inactive and the criteria described in the previous section are met.
Override Conditions
The timer is reset when one of the following conditions are met. To prevent tampering, permanently applying a condition will
not defer the shutdown.
• Service brake pedal is actuated
• Clutch pedal is actuated
• Stop engine override is actuated
• Accelerator pedal is actuated
• Status of park brake changed
Diagnostic Tools (DDDL 7.X or DDRS)
If a diagnostic tool is connected while the engine is running an additional 60 minutes idle time is granted. This session is
available once per ignition cycle and will run out whenever idle or PTO conditions are met. When the idle or PTO conditions
are no longer met, the diagnostic timer will be delayed.
If the tool is disconnected within this 60 minutes and either idle or PTO conditions are met, the engine will shutdown when
either the diagnostic timer has run out or the regular timer for idle or PTO has reached its time to shutdown. If the diagnostic
session takes longer than 60 minutes of idle time and idle or PTO conditions are met, the shutdown process will start.
Parked Regeneration
Parked Regeneration (HIR) will defer the shutdown process until the completion of the high-idle regeneration.
Interaction With Other Features

The features listed in the following table are affected by Clean Engine Idle.

Table 200.
Clean Engine Idle Limiting and Other Features
Feature Interaction with Clean Engine Idle Limiting
Traditional Idle and PTO Shutdown These features can be used. The Clean logic takes the minimum of
the calibrated idle and PTO shutdown times. To prevent tampering,
permanent override conditions will not affect the Clean Engine Idle
Limiting logic functionality.
8.3 Common Driver Reward

The Common Driver Reward (CDR) feature provides a higher road speed limit based on the time spent in top gear, Cruise
Control and Idle Time.
Operation
The CDR feature is controlled by setting CDR MODE to one of the following:
Table 201.
0: Disabled - CDR is not activated
1: Cruise Control - CDR activates for time spent in Cruise Control
2: Top Gear - CDR activates for time spent in Top Gear
3: Cruise Control and Top Gear - CDR activates for time spent in Cruise Control or Top Gear
4: Idle Time
5: Cruise Control + Top Gear + Idle Time
CDR Mode calculates an increment of vehicle speed which is added to the maximum road speed threshold. Refer to
"Calculation of CDR" section for CDR Mode options.
There are five timers (time kept in seconds):
• Total drive time
• Idle Time
• Total Trip Time
• Total time in Cruise Control
• Total time in Top Gear
The moment the CDR drive timer starts is indicated with Day/Month/Year.
Calculation of CDR
The time spent in either Cruise Control or Top Gear is divided by the drive time to make up a ratio and Idle Time divided by
Total Trip Time makes up the ratio for Idle Time Ratio:

8 Features
Table 202.
Top Gear Time
Top Gear ratio =
Drive Time
Cruise Control Time

Cruise Control ratio =
Drive Time
Idle Time
Idle Time Ratio =
Total Trip Time
New maximum road speed = Maximum road speed + Final Incentive
Figure 45. Finding Incentives and Final Incentive Arbitration

If the ratio is smaller than 0% or higher than 100%, it will be clipped to 0% or 100%.
NOTE: CDR calculates an increment of vehicle speed which is added to the maximum road speed limit.
Driving time is accumulated when the vehicle is moving faster than 1 Km/h (0.6 mph).
Resetting the CDR timers is controlled by setting CDR RESET FREQUENCY to one of the following:
Table 203.
0: Disabled - CDR timers will never be reset
1: Daily - CDR timers will be reset daily
2: Weekly - CDR timers will be reset weekly
3: 4 Weeks - CDR timers will be reset every 4 weeks


The options for CDR Mode are listed in the following table:
Table 204.
CDR Mode Settings
Parameter Group Parameter Setting
23 CDR Mode 0 = OFF: CDR is not activated

1 = Cruise Control: CDR activates for time
spent in Cruise Control
2 = Top Gear: CDR activates for time spent
in Top Gear
3 = Cruise Control + Top Gear: CDR
activates for time spent in Cruise Control or
Top Gear
4 = Idle Time
5 = Cruise Control + Top Gear + Idle Time
23 CDR Reset Frequency 0 = Off

1 = Daily
2 = Weekly
3 = 4 weeks
23 Top Gear Max CDR Incentive 0 - 40 km/h (24.9 mph)
23 Max CDR Incentive for CC 0 - 40 km/h (24.9 mph)
23 Max CDR Incentive Idle Time 0 - 40 km/h (24.9 mph)
8.4 Cruise Control

Cruise Control maintains a targeted speed by increasing or decreasing fueling. The targeted speed can be selected and
adjusted with dash-mounted switches. Up to five digital inputs are required (four for automatic transmission) for Cruise
Control operation. A Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) or an output shaft speed message over the J1939 data link is required for
Cruise Control.
Operation
Cruise Control operates to control vehicle speed. A Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) must be installed or output shaft speed is
received over J1939. Engine speed and power are varied under Cruise Control to maintain the set vehicle speed. The vehicle
speed must be above "Min Cruise Set Speed" and below "Max Cruise Set Speed." It is recommended that "Max Cruise Set
Speed" be set to the default to allow proper operation of other features such as Fuel Economy Incentive and PasSmart. The
"Max Road Speed" should be used to limit vehicle throttle speed.
Cruise Control can be overridden at any time with the throttle pedal if the vehicle is operating at less than the programmed
Max Road Speed.
Clutch pedal and service brake pedal, if configured, are monitored to abort fueling the engine in Cruise Control Active Mode
if there is driver action.
NOTE: DDEC 13 must see a change of state of the Cruise Master Switch, Clutch Switch (if configured) and
Service Brake Switch before Cruise Control can become active upon every ignition cycle.
There are three Cruise Control operation modes as listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 205.
Three Cruise Control Operation Modes
Cruise Control Mode Conditions Set Speed Engine Fuel Controlled By

Cruise Control
Cruise Control ON/OFF switch is

in OFF position or Cruise Control
Off ON/OFF is switched to ON 0 km/h (mph) No
position although Cruise Control
is not initiated.
Cruise Control ON/OFF switch in

ON position and Cruise Control is
initiated and set speed has
Active already been set. The set speed Set Speed (+/-) Yes
can be increased or decreased
by using the Resume/Accel and
Set/Coast switches.
Cruise Control ON/OFF switch in

On position and Cruise Control
formerly active but not allowed
Last Set speed on Hold in
Standby anymore or no set speed has No
Memory
been set after switching Cruise
Control On and Cruise Control is
initiated.
Engine Brakes in Cruise Control (Optional)

The Engine Brake option can also provide Engine Brake capability when the vehicle is in Cruise Control or Road Speed
Limit. See Engine Brake Controls Feature for more details.
Cruise Auto Resume (Optional)
The Cruise Auto Resume feature will resume Cruise Control based on the calibration setting.
1 = Cruise Control is resumed immediately after the clutch pedal is released.
2 = Cruise Control is resumed if the clutch has been pushed twice and released within three (3) seconds.
Adaptive Cruise (Optional)
Adaptive Cruise systems will send a "heart beat" message on the SAE J1939 Data Link. Manual Cruise Control and Adaptive
Cruise will be disabled if the message is not received over the data link or the message indicates that there is a failure in
Adaptive Cruise. To enable standard Cruise Control, the driver must toggle the Cruise Master Switch twice within 10
seconds.
Adaptive Cruise uses a third party system to maintain a range between vehicles.
Cruise Power
Cruise Power is an optional engine rating which operates on a higher horsepower during Cruise Control. DDEC 13
automatically switches to the cruise power rating when Cruise Control is turned on. This extra power gives the driver an
incentive to run in Cruise Control whenever possible. If Cruise Control is not active, the Cruise Power feature applies an
upper torque limit. The limit is set to Torque Factor for Cruise Power multiplied by the current maximum torque (taken from
the active MCM2.1 torque curve at the current engine speed). This function will be disabled if the torque ratio Torque Factor
for Cruise Power is set to 1. Cruise Power and Torque Factor for Cruise Power can be selected with DDRS, DDDL 7.X or
VEPS. For more information on Cruise Power, Refer to section "Engine Ratings".
Cruise Enable
Cruise Control is in standby, but not active when the Cruise Control Enable digital input is switched to battery ground.

The Cruise Enable switch is a normally open switch.

Set / Coast
The Set/Coast switch is a momentary switch.
Table 206.
Cruise Speed is set by momentarily contacting the switch to the ON position (switching the digital input
Set: to battery ground). Cruise Control will become active and maintain the vehicle speed present at the
time.
When Cruise Control is active, the Set/Coast input can be used to reduce power and speed by toggling
the switch. Momentarily toggling and releasing the Set/Coast switch will decrease the set point by 1.6
Coast:
km/h (1 mph) increments for Cruise Control. Holding the Set/Coast will decrease the set point by 1.6
km/h (1 mph) per second. When released, the Cruise Control set point will be at the current speed.
Resume / Accel
The Resume/Accel switch is a momentary switch.
Table 207.
If Cruise Control has been disabled with the service brake or the clutch switch, momentary contact to
Resume:
the ON position (switching the input to battery ground) restores the previously set cruise speed.
When Cruise Control is active, the Resume/Accel input can be used to increase power and speed by
toggling the switch. Momentarily toggling and releasing the Resume/Accel switch will increase the set
Accel: point by 2 km/hr (1.24 mph) increments for Cruise Control. Holding the Resume/Accel will increase the
set point by 2 km/h (1.24 mph) per second. When released, the Cruise Control set point will be at the
current speed.
Pause Switch
In addition to these main controlling switches, Cruise Control may be temporarily disabled by pressing the Pause Switch.
Depending on configuration, the switch is either hardwired or evaluated from the J1939 CCVS message. When disabled
through the Pause Switch, Cruise Control can be resumed at the previous set point by toggling the Resume Switch.
Clutch Released (Manual Transmissions)
This input indicates that the clutch is released and is used for suspending Cruise Control and Auto Resume. When the clutch
is released, the input is at battery ground.
The digital input logic for the Clutch Switch disables Cruise Control in the unlikely event of a broken clutch switch wire.
This switch is a normally closed switch.
Service Brake Released (Automatic and Manual Transmissions)
This input indicates that the brake is released when switched to battery ground. If the brake is activated, then the input is not
grounded and Cruise Control is suspended. Cruise Control is resumed by using the Resume/Accel Switch.
The input logic for the Brake Switch disables Cruise Control in the unlikely event of a broken brake switch wire.
This switch is a normally closed switch.
Soft Cruise
Soft Cruise feature reduces the available torque at the cruise set speed. Full-load torque curve ramps back up only after the
vehicle speed drops below the cruise set speed down to a calibrated delta. This effectively pre-filters the Cruise Control
system’s torque requests and reduces the overall fuelling required to operate the vehicle. Preliminary test results show
potential for fuel economy improvement using this feature.
The Soft Cruise feature also introduces an alternate set of engine retarder switch ON/OFF speeds (vehicle speed triggers)
based on the estimated grade of the road:

8 Features
• Steeper grades result in more aggressive engine retarder behavior

• Mild grades reduce engine retarder engagement to maximize vehicle inertia
Table 208.
Soft Cruise Parameters
Parameter Group Parameter Description Options Default Access
Soft Cruise Manual Flag for Soft Cruise 0 = Not Active 0 = Not Active DDRS, VEPS,
15
Activation Activation 1 = Active DDDL 7.X
Cruise V Speed May Exceed RSL

The CPC calculates the initial maximum vehicle speed. Normally, Max Road Speed is used as the vehicle speed threshold. A
higher vehicle speed is executed only when Cruise V Speed may exceed RSL is enabled, otherwise Max Road Speed is used.
The logic is the CPC is based on detected accelerator pedal override events (override the current cruise speed by means of the
accelerator pedal). Whenever the calibration is set, Max Cruise Set Speed is used as the maximum vehicle speed when in
Cruise Control instead of Max Road Speed if the vehicle speed is at or below Max Road Speed.
Whenever a Cruise Control accelerator pedal override situation occurs and the current cruise set speed is already above Max
Road Speed, the current vehicle speed is maintained as vehicle speed threshold for the Road Speed Limiter governor.
The parameters for Cruise V Speed are Max Road Speed (the vehicle speed limit not in cruise), Max Cruise Set Speed (active
Cruise Control with no accelerator pedal override) and Cruise V Speed May exceed RSL (Cruise control driving above the
legal speed limit and accelerator pedal override by driver). These parameters are listed in the table.
Table 209.
Cruise Control Parameters
Parameter Group Parameter Decriptions Options Default Access
Minimum Activation
Min Cruise Set Speed for Vehicles 15 to 125 km/h (8.7 DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 32 km/h (19.9 mph)
Speed High without Traction to 77.7 mph) DDRS
Control
Minimum Activation
Min Cruise Set Speed for Vehicles 15 to 125 km/h (8.7 DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 32 km/h (19.9 mph)
Speed Low with Traction Control to 77.7 mph) DDRS
ATC
Max Cruise Set Maximum Set Speed 48 - 152 km/h (29.8 - DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 104.6 km/h (65 mph)
Speed for Cruise Control 94.4 mph) DDRS
0 = Increment 0.5
CC Regular (km/hr, mph) 0 = 0.5 km/h, mph DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 1
Increment Mode 1 = Increment 1.0 1 = 1 km/h, mph DDRS
(km/hr, mph)
CC Set Speed
Set Speed Increment 0 = km/h DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 Increment MOde 1
Mode 1 = mph DDRS
km/hr. vs mph

Parameter Group Parameter Decriptions Options Default Access
0 = Disable
1 = Enable automatic
cruise resume
function after clutch
Enables or disables
Enable Cruise Auto has been released DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 the auto resume 0 = Disable
Resume once DDRS
feature.
2 = Release clutch
twice
3 = Resume AMT
Style
0 = High Power Only

Enables Cruise 1 = Low Power Only DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 Cruise Power 0 = High Power Only
Power function 2 = Cruise Power DDRS
Enabled
0 = Disable
Enables or disables
Cruise Control the engine brakes DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
10 engine brake 0 = Disable
Enable Eng Brk during Cruise DDRS
operation with Cruise
Control.
Control
Enables engine brake 0 = Off

on road speed limiter. 1 = Low
Road Spd Limit Max Engine brake will 2 = Medium
10 0 = Off VEPS, DDRS
Stage Num come on 3 = High
automatically if value 4 - stage #4
is greater than 0. 5 - stage #5
Soft Cruise Manual Flag for Soft Cruise 0 = Not Active DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 0 = Not Active
Activation Activation 1 = Active DDRS
Enable Flag for PCC

Feature (Note: If both
Predictive Cruise and
Soft Cruise are 0 = Disabled DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
54 PCC Enable 0 = Disabled
enabled/active, Soft 1 = Enabled DDRS
Cruise is the default if
PCC map data is not
available)
0 = Vehicle
Cruise RSL Eng Brk Engine Brake Mode Overspeed based 0 = Vehicle
10 VEPS, DDRS
Mode Select for CC/RSL 1 = Torque Interface Overspeed based
based
For Detroit
Default Hysteresis if
Transmission
no cc limit switch is
Equipped Vehicles DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 Norm Hyst Vspeed installed or any 2 km/h (1.2 mph)
the Default is 9 km/h DDRS
hysteresis error
(5mph), regardless of
occur)
CC Limit Switch

8 Features
Predictive Cruise Control (PCC)

The PCC was developed to improve fuel economy. The basic idea is using the vehicle’s inertia or momentum by going
downhill or uphill by changing the drivers cruise set speed according the topology of the terrain. The Software allows the
CPC (Common Powertrain Controller) to support predictive cruise control (PCC) functionality.
The PCC ECU is a unit which has road map data stored and a GPS sensor. By comparing current position with the stored
map data, the PCC unit is able to "foresee" a coming hill and therefore change the driver’s cruise set speed.
Changing the driver’s cruise set speed is done via CAN communication. The PCC unit communicates with the GPS sensor
over a serial link and the rest of the vehicle over the J1939 CAN link.
PCC State Transition
The state diagram that describes the PCC logic is demonstrated in the graphic below.
Figure 46. PCC State Diagram

PCC Set Speed Calculation
CPC will only honor a PCC desired cruise set speed when the PCC is in active state.
The cruise set speed evaluation is determined by the driver’s cruise set speed plus an offset, which is calculated from the PCC
requested cruise set speed. The CPC will then calculate the difference between PCC desired cruise set speed and the driver’s
cruise set speed, where the driver’s cruise set speed is identical to the display value. The difference vehicle speed is then
limited by a lower speed bound and an upper speed bound.
If PCC is switched off or if the PCC desired cruise set speed changes fast, a gradient limitation with an adjustable ramp rate,
is applied to the difference vehicle speed allowing a smooth transition. The final cruise set speed is determined by the
driver’s cruise set speed plus the calculated offset.
PCC Heartbeat
The PCC is required to periodically transmit a "heartbeat" message over the j1939 link in the PCC status 1 message, to
inform the CPC 2 of its status. The pccs1 message is expected to arrive every 40 ms, which in turn increments a rolling
counter.
Programming Requirements And Flexibility

Table 210.
Predictive Cruise Control Parameters
Predictive Cruise 0 = Overspeed with

PCC Eng Brake Engine Brake standard thresh. 0 = Overspeed with DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
54
Mode* Activation 1 = Overspeed with standard thresh. VEPS
alternate thresh.
Predictive Cruise 0 = RSL limit only,

Road Speed Limiter PCC offset ignored 0 = RSL limit only, DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
54 PCC RSL Mode
Mode 1 = RSL limit add PCC offset ignored VEPS
PCC offset
Enable Flag for PCC 0 = Disabled

Feature (Note: If both 1 = Enabled
Predictive Cruise and
Soft Cruise are DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
54 PCC Enable 0 = Disabled
enabled/active, Soft VEPS
Cruise is the default if
PCC map data is not
available)
*If PCC Eng Brake Mode is set to "0-OVS with standard thresh" -The following parameter settings are referenced for the Standard
Threshold: Low Eng Brk Min Cruise RSL Spd, Low Eng Brk Max Cruise RSL Spd, Med Eng Brk Min Cruise RSL Spd, Med Eng Brk Max
Cruise RSL Spd, Hi End Brk Min Cruise RSL Spd, and Hi Eng Brk Max Cruise RSL Spd, as listed in the "Cruise Control and Road Speed
Limit Engine Brake Parameters Table.
"If PCC Eng Brake Mode is set to "1 - OVS with alternate thresh" -The Standard Threshold parameters and the following are activated:
SCruise Eng Ret1 On Thres. Spd, SCruise Eng Ret2 On Thres. Spd, SCruise Eng Ret3 On Thres. Spd , SCruise Eng Ret1 Off Thres. Spd,
SCruise Eng Ret2 Off Thres. Spd, SCruise Eng Ret3 Off Thres. Spd On Thres Spd, PCC Lower Veh Spd Limit, and PCC Upper Veh Spd
Limit.
Installation
The following is a list of switches and CPC4 sensors that are required for Cruise Control operation.
• Cruise Control ON/OFF (Switch or J1939)
• Service Brake (Switch or J1939)
• Clutch Released for Manual Transmission (Switch or J1939)
• Set/Coast (Switch or J1939)
• Resume/Accel (Switch or J1939)
• Vehicle Speed Sensor (or J1939)
See the following figure for a diagram of the Cruise Control circuit.

8 Features
Figure 47. Cruise Control Circuit

To configure an engine for Cruise Control, the digital inputs listed in the following table must be selected. These parameters
can be set with VEPS or DDRS.
Table 211.
Cruise Control Input Configuration
0 = Disabled 1 = 1 Clutch Switch

13 4 08 DI Selection VEPS, DDRS
1 = 1 Clutch Switch
0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired
1 = ETC2
13 Trans Neutral Input Config VEPS, DDRS
2 = ETC5
255 = Not Available
1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
Service Brake Switch
13 3 = CCVS3 VEPS, DDRS
Config
4 = Ebc1 (SPN1121)
5 - J1939 PROP6 (T4PP
Cab only)
0 = Hardwired 0=- Hardwired

CC ON OFF Switch 1 = CCVS1
13 VEPS, DDRS
Config 2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3

Cruise Control Input Configuration
CC Set Cst Res Accel Sw 1 = CCVS1
13 VEPS, DDRS
Config 2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
0 = No Clutch Switch 0 = No Clutch Switch

1 = 1 Clutch Switch
2 = 2 Clutch Switch
3 = CCVS1
13 Clutch Switch Config 4 = CCVS2 VEPS, DDRS
5 = CCVS3
6 = ETC1
info via PTCan
1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
4 = CCVS1 or CCVS2
5 = CCVS2 or CCVS3
6 = CCVS1 or CCVS3
CCVS3
13 CC Pause Switch Config VEPS, DDRS
hardwired
hardwired
hardwired
CCVS3 or hardwired
0 = Off 0 = Off
1 = Low
Road Spd Limit Max 2 = Medium
10 VEPS, DDRS
Stage Num† 3 = High
4 - stage #4
5 - stage #5
† This parameter will enable engine brake on road speed limiter. Engine brake will come on automatically if the value of the option >0.
A Vehicle Speed Sensor must be configured for Cruise Control. Refer to section "OEM-installed Sensors " for additional
information.
For multiplexed inputs, Refer to section "Switch Inputs Received Over J1939 Data Link" for additional information.
The Cruise Control parameters are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 212.
Minimum Activation 15 to 125 km/h (8.7

Min Cruise Set Speed for Vehicles to 77.7 mph) DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 32 km/h (19.9 mph)
Speed High without Traction DDRS
Control
Minimum Activation 15 to 125 km/h (8.7

Min Cruise Set Speed for Vehicles to 77.7 mph) DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 32 km/h (19.9 mph)
Speed Low with Traction Control DDRS
ATC
Max Cruise Set Maximum Set Speed 48 to 152 km/h (29.8 DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 104.6 km/h (65 mph)
Speed for Cruise Control to 94.4 mph) DDRS
0 = Increment 0.5 0 = 0.5 km/h, mph

CC Regular (km/h, mph) 1 = 1 km/h, mph DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 1 = 1 km/h, mph
Increment Mode 1 = Increment 1.0 DDRS
(km/h, mph)
CC Set Speed 0 = km/h

Set Speed Increment DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 Increment Mode km/h 1 = mph 1 = mph
Mode DDRS
vs. mph
Enables or disables 0 = Disabled

the auto resume 1 = Enable automatic
feature. cruise resume
function after clutch
Enable Cruise Auto has been released DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 0 = Disabled
Resume once DDRS
2 = Release clutch
twice
3 = Resume AMT
Style

Enables Cruise 0 = High Power Only

Power function 1 = Low Power Only DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
15 Cruise Power 0 = High Power Only
2 = Cruise Power VEPS
Enabled
Enables or disables 0 = Disabled

the engine brakes 1 = Enable automatic
Cruise Control DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
10 during Cruise engine brake 0 = Disabled
Enable Eng Brk VEPS
Control. operation with Cruise
Control
Enables/Disables the 0 = Disabled

feature 1 = Eaton Vorad
Adaptive Cruise
Adaptive Cruise
43 Device 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS
Control Enable
2 = Meritor Wabco
Adaptive Cruise
Device
Enables engine brake 0 = Off

on road speed limiter. 1 = Low
Road Spd Limit Max Engine brake will 2 = Medium
10 0 = Off VEPS, DDRS
Stage Num come on 3 = High
automatically if value 4 = stage #4
is greater than 0. 5 = stage #5
Soft Cruise Manual Flag for Soft Cruise 0 = Not Active DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
15 0 = Not Active
Activation Activation 1 = Active VEPS
Table 213.
Meritor Wabco Adaptive Cruise Control
Parameter Group Parameter Description Options Default Setting Access
0 = Disabled
1 = Eaton Vorad
Enables / Adaptive Cruise 2 = Meritor
Adaptive Cruise
43 Disables the Device 0 = Disabled Wabco Adaptive DDRS, VEPS
Control Enable
feature 2 = Meritor Cruise Device
Wabco Adaptive
Cruise Device

8 Features
Table 214.
Eaton Vorad Adaptive Cruise Control
Parameter Group Parameter Description Options Default Setting Access
0 = Disabled
1 = Eaton Vorad
Enables / Adaptive Cruise 1 = Eaton Vorad
Adaptive Cruise
43 Disables the Device 0 = Disabled Adaptive Cruise DDRS, VEPS
Control Enable
feature 2 = Meritor Device
Wabco Adaptive
Cruise Device
Interaction with Other Features

Cruise Control will be disabled for the following:
• Throttle Inhibit Switch is grounded
• VSS fault is detected
• Hard deceleration, failure of the brake switch
• Resume/Accel and Set/Coast switches are both grounded
• Engine Protection Shutdown is requested
• ACC Fault (if programmed)
If LIM0 OR LIM1 are grounded and programmed for a vehicle speed limit, the "Cruise Max Set speed" will be limited to this
value.
8.5 Diagnostics
Diagnostics is a standard feature of DDEC 13. The purpose of this feature is to provide information for problem identification
and problem solving in the form of a code. The MCM2.1 and CPC4 continuously perform self diagnostic checks and
monitors the other system components. Information for problem identification and problem solving is enhanced by the
detection of faults, retention of fault codes and separation of active from inactive codes.
Operation
The engine-mounted MCM2.1 includes control logic to provide overall engine management. System diagnostic checks are
made at ignition on and continue throughout all engine operating modes. The ACM2.1 monitors the Aftertreatment and SCR
system.
Sensors provide information to the MCM2.1, CPC4 and ACM2.1 regarding various engine and vehicle performance
characteristics. The information is used to regulate engine and vehicle performance, provide diagnostic information, and
activate the engine protection system.
NOTE: The MCM2.1, CPC4 and ACM2.1 save error codes into memory after the ignition is turned off. The codes
will not be stored if there is an interruption of battery power or recycling of the ignition.
The AWL or MIL is illuminated and a code is stored if an electronic system fault occurs. This indicates the problem should
be diagnosed as soon as possible. The CPC4 illuminates the AWL or MIL and RSL and stores a malfunction code if a
potentially engine damaging fault is detected. These codes can be accessed in one of two ways:
• Commercially available J1939 diagnostic tools
• Detroit Diesel Diagnostic Link® (DDDL)
There are two types of diagnostic codes:
• An Active Code - a fault present at the time when checking for codes
• An Inactive Code- a fault which has previously occurred; inactive codes are logged into the CPC4 and time stamped with
the following information:

The dashboard panel lamps, listed in the following table, alert the driver of different conditions.
Table 215.
Lamp Lamp Name Description Driver Action
Indicates a fault with the engine Truck can be driven to end of

Amber Warning Lamp (AWL)
controls. shift. Call for service.
Indicates a major engine fault

that may result in engine Move the truck to the nearest
Red Stop Lamp (RSL) damage. safe location and shutdown the
Engine derate and / or shutdown engine. Call for service.
sequence will be initiated.
Solid yellow indicates a manual

regeneration is required.
Truck may be driven to end of
Blinking yellow and derate or
shift. Call for service. Blinking
DPF Regeneration Lamp shutdown are possible if back
light indicates attention required
pressure exceeds limits. Blinking
now.
yellow during stationary
regeneration.
Lamp may be red or yellow.

Indicates exhaust temperature is
above a preset limit. Illuminates
during regeneration process if Truck may be driven. If lamp
High Exhaust System speed below 48.3 km/h (30 mph) remains illuminated for an
Temperature (HEST) Lamp and during stationary extended period - longer than 40
regeneration. When rpm is minutes - call for service.
elevated for a parked regen, the
lamp will flash once every ten
seconds.
Yellow lamp Indicates a failure of

an Emission Control device. May Truck may be driven to end of the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
illuminate at the same time as the shift. Call for service.
Amber Warning Lamp.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low Yellow lamp indicates the DEF
Drive action is required.
Lamp level is low.

8 Features
8.6 Dual Speed Axle

The Dual Speed Axle feature allows a digital input to be configured to switch between two axle ratios for calculation of
vehicle speed.
Operation
When the digital input is open the first axle ratio will be used. When the switch is grounded, the second axle ratio will be
used.
Installation
The Dual Speed Axle Switch is pin 1/1 on the CPC4.

The digital input listed in the following table can be configured by VEPS or DDRS.
Table 216.
Dual Speed Axle Digital Input
0 = Hardwired
2nd Axle Speed Switch 1 = CCVS1
13 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS
Config 2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
0 = Disabled
1 = Enable Dual Speed
Axle
13 1 01 DI Selection 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS
Retarder Input
3 = Clutch switch
4 = EvoBus Cruise
Control Lever Quit signal
Both axle ratios listed in the following table must also be programmed with VEPS, DDRS or DDDL 7.X.
Table 217.
Programming the Axle Ratios
Parameter Group Parameter Description Range Default
Indicates the first axle

8 Axle Ratio 1.0 - 20.00 5.29
ratio of the vehicle.
Two Spd Axle Second Indicates the second axle

8 1.0 - 20.00 1.0
Axle Ratio ratio of the vehicle.
8.7 Engine Brake Controls

The Engine Brake option converts a power-producing diesel engine into a power-absorbing air compressor. This is
accomplished by opening the cylinder exhaust valves near the top of the normal compression stroke and releasing the
compressed cylinder charge to exhaust. The release of the compressed air to atmospheric pressure prevents the return of
energy to the engine piston on the expansion stroke, the effect being a net energy loss. Fueling is cut off when this occurs.

Operation
A dash mounted On/Off Switch is used to enable the Engine Brake option. DDEC 13 will directly control the engine brake
solenoids to produce the desired low, medium, or high braking power.
The following conditions must be met for engine brakes to be activated:
• Percent throttle less than 4%
• Driveline open - engine speed greater than 1100 rpm
• Driveline closed - engine speed greater than 800 rpm
• Road Speed greater than 0 km/h (mph) (programmable)
• ABS not active
• Clutch pedal released (if equipped)
• Engine not fueling
• Engine not in PTO mode
• Torque converter in lockup (automatic transmission)
The following are features and options for Engine Brake:
• Cruise Control or Road Speed Limit with Engine Brake
• Engine Brake Disable
• Engine Brake Active
• Dynamic Fan Braking
• Clutch Released Input
• Service Brake Control of Engine Brakes
• Min. Speed for Engine Brakes
Service Brake Control of Engine Brakes
This option allows the engine brakes switches to be ON but not engage the engine brakes until the service brake is pressed.
Cruise Control or Road Speed Limit with Engine Brake (Optional - all except the Detroit Transmission)
The Engine Brake option can also provide Engine Brake capability when the vehicle is in Cruise Control (CC) or Road Speed
Limit (RSL). For example, if the vehicle is going down hill in Cruise Control while the engine brake is selected, the ECU
will control the amount of Engine Brake with respect to the Cruise Control set speed. The level of Engine Brake (low,
medium, high) selected with the dash switches will be the maximum amount of engine braking the ECU allows. Each engine
braking level has a hysteresis for actuating the engine brake or for deactivating the engine brake.
In Cruise Control (CC) if the vehicle exceeds the Cruise Set Speed plus the: “Low Eng Brk Max Cruise RSL Spd”, the
feature will apply Low engine braking, “Med Eng Brk Max Cruise RSL Spd”, will apply Medium engine braking “Hi Eng
Brk Max Cruise RSL Spd”, will apply High engine braking.
NOTE: When the Engine Brake Level Switch is on while in Cruise Control, Engine braking will be limited to what
the switch is set to (Low, Med, or Hi).
Cruise Control or Road Speed Limit with Engine Brake (Detroit Transmission only)
Engine Braking occurs for CC when the stalk lever is in engine brake position “0” and when the cruise set speed plus "Norm
Hyst Vspeed" (default hysteresis if no CC limit switch is installed, or any hysteresis error occurs) has been exceeded. CC
will control vehicle speed by changing the amount of engine braking to maintain this vehicle speed. If the engine brake
position of the stalk lever is incremented, the Engine braking level will increase a predetermined amount, and CC will remain
off while the stalk lever is set to greater than “0”.
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional CC limit switch, you can define up to three speed hysteresis thresholds. For the
switch inputs and parameterization, see tables in this Section.
The driver also has the option of controlling vehicle speed when going down a grade (Detroit Transmission only), which
utilizes engine braking only (no fueling). The Downhill engine braking can be activated by: setting the Stalk Brake lever to >
0, activate the cruise Master Switch, and Push CC Set .
EXAMPLE:If the limit switch is set to LOW (default 5 Km/h) with the vehicle going down a grade, with the CC set speed
@ 45 Km/h, no fueling will occur (coast) at speeds above 45 Km/h. If the vehicle speed exceeds 50 Km/h, engine braking
will occur, not allowing the speed to exceed the Min Hyst Vspeed (LOW setting on the Limit Switch).

8 Features
Any of the following conditions will deactivate it: Cruise Master Switch Off, Transmission in Neutral, or the Cruise Pause
Switch is activated.
Table 218.
CC Limit Switch Inputs
0 = Disabled 1 = Engine Brake Low

1 = Engine Brake Low Note: Set to 3 when
2 = Evobus retarder lever utilizing the CC Limit
13 2 14 DI Selection DDRS, VEPS
stage 2 switch
3 = CC Hysteresis Low
4 = RemAP IVS1
0 = Disabled 1 = Engine Brake High

1 = Engine Brake High Note: Set to 3 when
2 = Evobus retarder lever utilizing the CC Limit
13 2 15 DI Selection DDRS, VEPS
stage 2 switch
3 = CC Hysteresis High
4 = RemAP IVS2
Table 219.
CC Limit Switch Logic Table
CC Hysteresis Speed Km/hr - Drum Roll

CPC4 Pin 02/15 to GND 2/2 CPC4 Pin 02/14 to GND 2/2
Parameter
1 = Medium (D/R = Min Hyst High Vspeed)

OFF OFF
Default = 9 Km/hr (5.6 mph)
0 = Low (D/R = Min Hyst Vspeed)

OFF ON
Default = 5 Km/hr (3.1 mph)
2 = High (D/R = Max Hyst Vspeed)

ON OFF
Default = 250 Km/hr (155 mph)
ON ON 3 = Error
NOTE: Cruise Control Limit Switch Hysteresis Speed settings in which the engine retarder will engage, above the
set vehicle Cruise Control speed.

Table 220.
Cruise Control Engine braking Hysteresis Parameters (without optional CC Limit Switch)
Default hysteresis if 0 – 250 km/h (0 –

9 km/h (5mph),
no cc limit switch is 155.3 mph) DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 Norm Hyst Vspeed regardless of CC
installed or any DDRS
Limit Switch
hysteresis error occur
Hysteresis Concept: 0 = Variant A

A = continuous and 1 = Variant B
store 2 = Variant C
B = continuous 3 = Variant D
without store 255 = inactive
C = CC Limit Switch
15 CC Hyst Variant 3 = Variant D DDRS, VEPS
D = Single Hysteresis
NOTE:SEt to
3=Variant D when
vehicle is NOT
equipped with CC
Limit Switch

8 Features
Table 221.
Cruise Control Engine braking Hysteresis Parameters (with optional CC Limit Switch)
Hysteresis Concept: 0 = Variant A

A = Continuous and 1 = Variant B
store 2 = Variant C
B = Continuous 3 = Variant D
without store 255 = inactive
15 CC Hyst Variant C = CC Limit Switch 2 = Variant C DDRS, VEPS
NOTE: Set to
2=Variant C when
vehicle is equipped
with CC Limit Switch
SFTP = Minimum 0 - 250 km/h

hysteresis in no (0 - 155.3 mph)
economy mode DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 Min Hyst Vspeed 5 km/h (3.1 mph)
NAFTA = hysteresis DDRS
value for cc-limit-
switch position low
Variant SFTP = 0 - 250 km/h

Minimum hysteresis (0 - 155.3 mph)
in economy mode
Min Hyst High DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 NAFTA = hysteresis 9 km/h (5.6 mph)
Vspeed DDRS
value for cc-limit-
switch position
medium
SFTP = maximum 0 - 160 km/h

hysteresis (0 - 99.4 mph)
NAFTA = hysteresis
value for cc-limit-
160 km/h DDDL 7.X, VEPS,
15 Max Hyst Vspeed switch position
(99.4 mph) DDRS
maximum (250 = no
engine brakes in
retarder switch
position zero)
Engine Brake Disable

The Engine Brake Disable option uses an input which is switched to ground whenever a vehicle system, such as a traction
control device, does not allow engine braking to occur. This option is required for most automatic transmissions.
DDEC 13 also supports the J1939 message to disable engine brakes (TSC1 command to source address 15).
Engine Brake Active
The Engine Brake Active option uses a digital output that can be used to drive an Engine Brake Active lamp. This output is
switched to battery ground whenever the engine brake is active.
Dynamic Fan Braking
The Dynamic Fan Braking option turns on the cooling fan when the engine brake level is high and DDEC 13 fan control is
enabled. This creates about 20 to 40 hp additional engine braking power depending on the size of the cooling fan. For
additional information, Refer to section "Fan Control".
Clutch Released Input

The Clutch Released input will prevent the engine brakes from being turned on when the clutch is pressed. This input is
required for use with manual transmissions.
Min Vehicle Speed for Engine Brakes
This option will disable the engine brakes until a minimum vehicle speed is reached. A Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) is
required
Refer to section "OEM-installed Sensors " for additional information.
Installation
See the following figure for a DDEC 13 internal engine brake schematic.
Figure 48. Engine Brake for DDEC 13

Engine Brake must be specified at the time of engine order. This enables the two digital outputs required in the MCM2.1. The
Jake Brake configuration parameters are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 222.
CPC4 Configuration Parameter for Jake Brake Applications
CPC4 Parameter
Parameter Description Options Setting Access
Group
0 = No Engine Brake
1 = Decompression
Valve Only or
Exhaust Flap Only
3 = Jake
Enables the type of 2 = Decompression
Engine Brake Compression Brake
10 engine brake Valve & Exhaust Flap VEPS or DDRS
Configuration or Decompression
required or Fuso 2-stage Jake
Valve + Brake Gate
3 = Jake
Compression Brake
or Decompression
Valve + Brake Gate
0 = Disable
1 = Enable Crank
Inhibit
2 = Enable Engine
Hood (Optimized
Idle)
3 = Not Used
4 = RPM Freeze
5 = Engine Brake
4 18 DI Selection Disable
13 — 0 = Disable VEPS or DDRS
(Optional) 6 = Fast Engine
Heat-up Switch
7 = Service Brake
Active
Engine Brake
Lockout
9 = Maneuver Mode
10 = Torque Curve
Selection, Bit 1
The parameters listed in the following table are for the Cruise Control and Road Speed Limit Engine Brake option.

Table 223.
Cruise Control and Road Speed Limit Engine Brake Parameters
CPC4 Parameter Parameter Description Options Default Access

Group
10 Cruise Control Allows the engine 0 = Disable 0 = Disable VEPS, DDRS, DDDL
Enable Eng Brk brake to be used 1 = Enable Automatic 7.X
while on cruise Engine Brake
control or the road Operation with Cruise
speed limit if the Control
vehicle exceeds the
cruise set speed or
road speed limit.
Automatic engine
brake with Cruise
Control.
10 Hi Eng Brk Max CC/RSL vehicle-over- 0 - 48 km/h (0 - 29.8 10 km/h (6.2 mph) VEPS, DDRS, DDDL
Cruise RSL Spd speed for engine mph) 7.X
brake stage 3
activation
10 Hi Eng Brk Min CC/RSL vehicle-over- 0 - 48 km/h (0 - 29.8 6 km/h (3.7 mph) VEPS, DDRS, DDDL
brake stage 3
deactivation
10 Low Eng Brk Max CC/RSL vehicle-over- 0 - 48 km/h (0 - 29.8 5 km/h (3.1 mph) VEPS, DDRS, DDDL
brake stage 1
activation
10 Low Eng Brk Min CC/RSL vehicle-over- 0 - 48 km/h (0 - 29.8 2 km/h (1.2 mph) VEPS, DDRS, DDDL
brake stage 1
deactivation
10 Med Eng Brk Max CC/RSL vehicle-over- 0 - 48 km/h (0 - 29.8 7 km/h (4.3 mph) VEPS, DDRS, DDDL
brake stage 2
activation
10 Med Eng Brk Min CC/RSL vehicle-over- 0 - 48 km/h (0 - 29.8 5 km/h (3.1 mph) VEPS, DDRS, DDDL
brake stage 2
deactivation
10 Min Eng Spd for Minimum engine 0 - 4000 rpm 1100 rpm VEPS, DDRS, DDDL
Engine Brakes speed for Engine 7.X
Brake operation
10 Road Spd Limit Max Enables engine brake 0 = Off 0 = Off DDRS, VEPS
Stage Num on road speed limiter. 1 = Low
Engine brake will 2 = Medium
come on 3 = High
automatically if value 4 = stage #4
is greater than 0 5 = stage #5
The optional digital output listed in the following table can be used to drive an Engine Brake Active Lamp.

8 Features
Table 224.
Optional Digital Output for Engine Brakes
CPC4 Parameter Parameter Setting Options Default Access

Group
35 3 09 DO Selection 3 = Engine Brake 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS

Active 1 = Grid Heater
Hardwired
2 = Not Used
3 = Engine Brake
Active
4 = Not Used
5 = FUSO Engine
Brake Relay
6 = WIF-Lamp
7 = Expansion Tank
Pressure Control
Valve Ground
8 = DEF Low Lamp
9 = TIER4 DEF Lamp
10 = EU6
Inducement Lamp
11 - Engine Brake
State Lamp
The parameter listed in the following table is for Service Brake Control of the Engine Brakes option.
Table 225.
Service Brake Control of Engine Brakes Parameter
CPC4 Parameter Group Parameter Description Options Default
10 Service Brk Enable Eng When this function is 0 = Disable 0 = Disable

Brakes enabled, an input from the 1 = Enable automatic NOTE:For Detroit
service brake is required engine brake when Transmission quipped
in order to activate the applied service brake vehicles, this must be set
engine brake. 2 = Operator selection to “0 = Disable.”
and service brake for
engine brake activation
engine brake when
applied service brake
The parameter listed in the following table is the Minimum Vehicle Speed needed for engine braking to occur.
Table 226.
Minimum Speed for Engine Brakes Option
CPC4 Parameter Group Parameter Description Options Default
10 Min Road Spd Eng Brk The minimum vehicle 0 - 200 km/h (0 - 124.3 0 km/h (mph)
Operation speed required before mph)
engine braking will occur.
Evobus 5-Stage Retarder

A 5-Stage Retarder Feature is available for Evobus. The CPC processes digital input signals coming from a 5-stage retarder
lever that is wired in the following manner:
Table 227.
2 14 DI Selection Stage #1
2 15 DI Selection Stage #2
2 08 DI Selection Stage #3 (remote throttle or fast engine heat up switch can not be
used)
1 17 DI Selection Stage #4 (throttle inhibit input can not be used)
2 13 DI Selection Stage #5 (fan override switch can not be used)
1 10 DI Selection Off position monitoring input
The retarder torque request is mapped in equal increments according to the lever position (e.g. stage #1 equals 20%, stage #2
equals 40 %,etc.). The requested retarder percentage is transmitted on the J1939 link to the Retarder ECU using the message
ERC1, SPN1716 Retarder Selection, non engine. The source address of the message is set to 0x21 whenever the Retarder
Lever Enable Parameter is calibrated.
NOTE: When using multiplexed EBM switches, enabling of the DiFlex13 and DiFlex14 inputs is not necessary.
Table 228.
Retarder Selection and Function
Input State Parameter CPC4 Pin Retarder Selection
Stage 0 (off): 1 10 DI Selection 1 / 10 0%
Stage 1: 2 14 DI Selection 2 / 14 20%
Stage 3: 2 08 DI Selection 2/8 60%

8 Features
Table 229.
Evobus 5-Stage Retarder Option
13 Evobus Retarder Evobus 5 stage 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled DDRS, VEPS

Lever Enable retarder switch 1 = Enabled via
enable ERC1
2 = Enabled via
TSC1
3 = Enabled for EBM
only
13 1 10 DI Selection Configuration input 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled DDDL 7.X, DDRS,

DiFlex20 1 = Enable AUX VEPS
Shutdown
2 = FUSO
Accelerator switch
3 = Evobus retarder
lever stage0
13 2 14 DI Selection Configuration input 0 = Disabled 1 = Engine Brake DDRS, VEPS

DiFlex13 1 = Engine Brake Low
Low
2 = Evobus retarder
lever stage1
3 = CC Hysteresis
Low
4 = RemAP IVS1
13 2 15 DI Selection Configuration input 0 = Disabled 1 = Engine Brake DDRS, VEPS

DiFlex14 1 = Engine Brake High
High
Engine Brake High
2 = Evobus Retarder
Lever Stage2
3 = CC Hysteresis
High
4 = RemAP IVS1
13 2 08 DI Selection Configuration input 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled DDDL 7.X, DDRS,

DiFlex16 1 = Remote-Throttle VEPS
Enable
Up Switch
3 = Evobus Retarder
Lever Stage3
13 1 17 DI Selection Configuration input 0 = Disabled 1 = Throttle Inhibit DDRS, VEPS

DiFlex07 1 = Throttle Inhibit
2 = Evobus Retarder
Lever Stage4
13 2 13 DI Selection Configuration input 0 = Disabled 1 = Fan Override DDRS, VEPS

DiFlex12 1 = Fan Override Switch
Switch
2 = Evobus Retarder
Lever Stage5
4 = RemAP IVS2


DDEC 13 will respond to requests from other vehicle systems via SAE J1939 Data Link to disable the engine brakes.
8.8 Engine Protection

The DDEC 13 Engine Protection system monitors all engine sensors and electronic components, and recognizes system
malfunctions. If a critical fault is detected, the Amber Warning Lamp (AWL) and Red Stop Lamp (RSL) illuminate. The
malfunction codes are logged into the CPC4’s memory.
The standard parameters which are monitored for engine protection are:
• Low coolant level
• High coolant temperature
• Low oil pressure
• High soot level (DPF)
• DPF Regeneration
Operation
Engine Protection is a vital part of MCM2.1/CPC4 programming and software. DDEC 13 monitors coolant level, various
pressures and temperatures, and compares these parameters against the allowable limits to determine when a critical fault is
reached. The AWL is illuminated and a code logged if there is an electronic system fault. This indicates the problem should
be diagnosed as soon as possible. The CPC4 illuminates the AWL and RSL and stores a malfunction code if a potentially
engine damaging fault is detected. Once a critical fault is reached, the AWL and RSL are illuminated and a 60 (coolant temp,
coolant level, oil level) or 30 (oil pressure or DPF) second timer starts a countdown to the desired level of protection. The
AWL will flash for 20 - 30 seconds and the RSL will flash for 10 seconds before the engine shuts down. The flashing will
occur only if protection shutdown is enabled. Temperature and pressure limits are established in the engine calibration and
may differ slightly from one engine model to another.
Engine Protection consists of different protection levels:
• Warning
• Shutdown
Warning
The AWL illuminates when the parameter value falls below the pre-warning level. Speed and/or torque may be limited based
on the engine protection parameter. The operation has the responsibility to take action to avoid engine damage. No shutdown
will occur.
Shutdown
Speed and/or torque may be limited based on the engine protection parameter. The engine shuts down 60 seconds (for coolant
level or coolant temperature) or 30 seconds (oil pressure or DPF) after the RSL is illuminated. The AWL will flash 20 - 30
seconds before the shutdown. The RSL will flash 10 seconds before the shutdown.
NOTE: Cluster response may vary based on OEM and revision level.
NOTE: WIF may also shut down engine (if configured).
Momentary Override - A Stop Engine Override (SEO) switch is used to override the shutdown sequence. This override
resets the 60 second (30 seconds for oil pressure) shutdown timer. The switch must be recycled after five seconds to obtain a
subsequent override.
NOTE: The operator has the responsibility to take action to avoid engine damage.

8 Features
Stop Engine Override Option

The Stop Engine Override Switch is used for a momentary override. DDEC 13 will record the number of times the override is
activated after a fault occurs.
NOTE: This switch is REQUIRED for all applications except fire truck.
An additional override will occur when a DPF soot load or diagnostic shutdown is in progress and the CPC4 is requesting a
DPF regeneration. This will give a blocked or sooty DPF the chance to be cleared before determining whether to shutdown
the engine.

DDEC1 3 is programmed with pressure, temperature, and level protection limits for each parameter monitored. Rampdown is
always enabled. Shutdown can be configured for certain parameters.
DDEC 13 engine protection system parameters are listed in the following table:
Table 230.
Engine Protection Parameters
Enable/Disable 0 = Warning
Coolant Temp Eng DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
18 shutdown for high 1 = Engine Shutdown 1 = Engine Shutdown
Protect Shtdn VEPS
coolant temperature
Cool Level Eng DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
18 shutdown for low 1 = Engine Shutdown 1 = Engine Shutdown
Protect Shtdn VEPS
coolant level
Oil Press Eng Protect DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
18 shutdown for low oil 1 = Engine Shutdown 1 = Engine Shutdown
Shtdn VEPS
pressure
Oil Level Eng Protect DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
18 shutdown for low oil 1 = Engine Shutdown 1 = Engine Shutdown
Shtdn VEPS
level
Enable/Disable 0 = Warning and

Water in Fuel shutdown for water in Derate 0 = Warning and DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
18
Shutdown Enable fuel 1 = Derate and Derate VEPS
Shutdown
8.9 Engine Ratings

Engine ratings are designed by horsepower and engine speed. The Cruise Power parameter in the CPC4 must be set up to the
designated horsepower requested by the customer. This can be changed with VEPS, DDRS or DDDL 7.X.

The DD Platform engine ratings are listed in the following tables:

Table 231.
DD13 Rating GHG14 Rating Code Cruise Power Settings
350 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF4 1-LOW POWER
GOV-1350 LBFT@1100 RPM
380 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF4 0-HIGH POWER
380 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF5 1-LOW POWER
410 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF5 0-HIGH POWER
410 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF7 1-LOW POWER
450 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF7 0-HIGH POWER
410 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF8 1-LOW POWER
450 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF8 0-HIGH POWER
435 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF6 0-HIGH POWER
370 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF3 0-HIGH POWER
470 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MLF9 0-HIGH POWER 113 Cascadia w/ 1us Only
DD13 Multi-Torque Engine Ratings
380 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

MULTI-TORQUE (Need to set up
GOV-1350/1550 LBFT@1100 MLG1 0-HIGH POWER
low end torque limit)
RPM
410 HP@1800 RPM, 2080

GOV-1450/1650 LBFT@1130 MLG2 0-HIGH POWER
RPM
Table 232.
455 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLA0 1-LOW POWER
GOV - 1550 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
455/475 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080

RPM GOV - 1550 LBFT @ 1100 MLA0 2-CRUISE POWER
RPM
455 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

GOV - 1650 LBFT @ 1100 RPM MLA1 1-LOW POWER
(FLEET SPEC)
505 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLA1 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 1650 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
475 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLA2 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 1650 LBFT @ 1100 RPM

8 Features
475/505 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080

RPM GOV - 1650 LBFT @ 1100 MLA3 2-CRUISE POWER
RPM
475 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLA5 1-LOW POWER
GOV - 1850 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
530 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLA5 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 1850 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
500 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLA6 1-LOW POWER
GOV - 1850 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
560 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLA6 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 1850 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
455 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

GOV - 1550/1750 LBFT @ 1100 MLA7 0-HIGH POWER
RPM
475 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

GOV - 1650/1850 LBFT @ 1100 MLA8 0-HIGH POWER
RPM
Table 233.
535 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLG5 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 1750 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
500 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLG6 1-LOW POWER
GOV - 1850 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
550 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLG6 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 1850 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
600 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLG7 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 1850 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
600 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLH2 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 2050 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
500 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLH1 1-LOW POWER
GOV - 2050 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
550 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLH1 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 2050 LBFT @ 1100 RPM

475 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLG4 1-LOW POWER
GOV - 1750 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
500 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

MLG4 0-HIGH POWER
GOV - 1750 LBFT @ 1100 RPM
475 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

GOV - 1750/1950 LBFT @ 1100 MLG8 0-HIGH POWER
RPM
500 HP @ 1800 RPM, 2080 RPM

GOV - 1850/2050 LBFT @ 1100 MLG9 0-HIGH POWER
RPM
8.10 Engine Starter Control

Engine starters may be enabled by either the ignition-run key switch (KL-50) or the MCM2.1. See the following two figures.
Figure 49. Key Switch Starter Control

8 Features
Figure 50. MCM2.1 Starter Control

J1939 Messages for Starter Control
Table 234.
Starter Control Input to the MCM2.1 (CPC4 parameter)
Parameter
Parameter Description Options Default Access
Group
Starter Control input to the MCM2.1. When 0 = SCA

set to "1," a hardwired input from Ignition 1 = CPC
01 Ign Scr MCM Mode Start to CPC4 pin 1/18 and MCM2.1 pin 2 = BHM 1 = CPC VEPS
21/20 must be included. Options "0" or "2"
are J1939 messages for Starter Control
Certain applications utilize Starter Control that is affected by J1939 messages from the CPC4, or Transmission Module. The
following supported J1939 messages can aid in resolving Starter Control issues.
Table 235.
EEC1 - Electronic Engine Control #1
Transmission Repetition Rate: 10 msec
Data Length: 8 Bytes
Extended Data Page: 0
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254

EEC1 - Electronic Engine Control #1
PDU Specific: 223
Default Priority: 6
Parameter Group Number: 61,444 (0x00F004)
Byte: 7 Bits: 1 - 4 Engine Starter Mode (SPN 1675)
0000: Start Not Requested

0001: Starter Active, Gear Not Engaged
0010: Starter Active, Gear Engaged
0011: Starter Finished; Starter Not Active
after having been actively engaged
0100: Starter Inhibited Due to Engine Already
Running
0101: Starter Inhibited Due to Engine Not
Ready for Start (preheating)
0110: Starter Inhibited Due to Driveline
Engine or Other Transmission Inhibit
0111: Starter Inhibited Due to Active
Immobilizer
1000: Starter Inhibited Due to Starter Over-
Temp
1001 - 1011: Reserved
1100: Starter Inhibited - Reason Unknown
1101: Error
1110: Error
1111: Not Available
Table 236.
ETC7 - Electronic Transmission Controller 7
Transmission Repetition Rate: 100 msec
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 74
Default Priority: 6
Parameter Group Number: 65,098 (0x00FE4A)
Byte: 2 Bits: 5 - 6 Transmission Engine Crank Enable (SPN

2900)
00: Cranking Disabled; Engine cranking is

prohibited by the transmission type
01: Cranking Enabled; Engine cranking is
allowed by transmission
10: Error
11: Not Available

The Engine Starter Control settings are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 237.
Engine Starter Control Settings - MCM2.1
Parameter Options Default
0 = Starter activated via key switch

1 = Starter activated via MCM2.1
2 = Starter activated via MCM modified
Starter Type Control 0 = Starter activated via key switch
diagnostic
3 = IMS Starter
4 = Starter with overcrank protection
NOTE: If the parameter is set for MCM2.1 Starter Control and the starter is wired for Key Switch control, the
engine will crank but will not start.
For MCM2.1 starter applications, OEMs should provide ignition switch crank signal to pin 21/20 circuit so the MCM2.1 is
aware of a request to start the vehicle. This will ensure that all the safety checks are done. If the MCM2.1 is bypassed or does
not receive a crank request signal, a no fueling event will be experienced. Fault codes will be triggered.
The starter relay specifications are:
• Min Relay Resistance is greater than 4 Ω
• Max Relay Resistance is less than 500 Ω
Current vs inductance is listed in the following table:
Table 238.
Max Inductance (mH) Current (amps)
30 4
65 3
150 2
600 1
Starter Over Temp Crank Delay Protection (MCM2.1 Starter Control)

If the starter temperature exceeds 250°C (482°F), the starter will be locked out to allow sufficient time for the starter to cool
down. The Starter Over Temp Feature is a function of the amount of time spent cranking in the prior cranking event and the
oil temperature, plus the time allowed to cool down. The output should be the new starter time delay. This feature is not
adjustable. The temperature of the starter is retained; it will not be cleared during an ignition reset or if the engine exits crank
mode and then returns to crank mode. Wait to start lamp will illuminate during starter lockout.
For example: If the engine is cranked for 30 seconds, the vehicle should not be allowed to crank for two minutes to allow the
starter to cool down. If the engine is cranked for 25 seconds, the vehicle should not be allowed to crank for one minute and
45 seconds.

Figure 51. Starter Lock-out due to Starter Over-Temperature

Assuming the starter attained a temperature of 250°C (482°F) then the starter will need approximately:
• 2 min 21 sec to reach 125°C (257°F) at a -40°C (-40°F) ambient
• 9 min 18 sec to reach 125°C (257°F) at a 43°C (110°F) ambient
Should the starter lockout due to over-temperature be active for more than a max time of less than 10 minutes, then the
lockout condition will be reset. An ignition key cycle will not reset over-temperature lockout.
8.11 Fan Control

The purpose of the Fan Control feature is to electronically control engine cooling fan activation and to provide a load for
vehicle retardation, when required. DDEC 13 Fan Controls are designed to optimally control the engine cooling fan(s) based
on engine cooling requirements. Fan Controls are designed to use other system inputs such as A/C pressure switches and
operator requested fan operation.
Operation
DDEC 13 continuously monitors and compares the coolant and intake manifold air temperature, engine torque, engine
operation mode, and various optional inputs to calibrated levels stored within DDEC 13. These limits are factory configured
based on application.
When these temperature levels exceed the preset fan ON temperature value, DDEC 13 will enable the fan control output(s)
that activate the fan. The fan will remain on, cooling the engine with the increased air flow until the temperature levels reach
the preset fan OFF temperature.
DDEC 13 provides fan control for three different fan configurations:
• Single-speed fan (two outputs)
• Single-speed fan (one output)
• Variable speed fan with fan speed feedback
Single-Speed Fan (Fan Type 4)

This fan type must be used if the current exceeds 2A. The two outputs (Fan Control #1 and Fan Control #2) must be wired
together. The single-speed fan control uses two digital outputs to drive a single-speed fan. Fan Control #1 and #2 are open
circuit to turn the fan ON. The fan will remain ON for a minimum of 30 seconds. The fan output will not be enabled until
five seconds after the engine has started.

8 Features
NOTE: Fan output circuits are designed to sink no more than 2.0 A (DC) current.
Fan Control #1 and #2 are open circuit when at least one of the following conditions occur:
• Coolant temperature above factory set levels
• Intake manifold temperature above factory set levels
• Air conditioner is active (OEM supplied A/C switch is opened) - optional
• Coolant or intake manifold air temperature sensor fails
• Engine Brake is active at high level (optional)
• Fan Control Override Switch is grounded (ON)
• PTO is enabled and active - optional
Single-Speed Fan Installation
This section provides a schematic of the specific connection from DDEC 13 to the fan. Compatible fans may be obtained
from several vendors.
NOTE: Fan switch input may be hardwired or multiplexed (hardwired shown). The Cascadia is multiplexed.
Figure 52. Single-speed Fan - Fan Type 4

The MCM2.1 options for the single-speed fan - Type 4 are listed in the following table:

Table 239.
Single-speed Fan - Type 4 MCM2.1 Options
Parameter Settings Options Default Access
Fan Type 4 = Single-Speed Fan - 2 0 = 2-Speed Fan with 7 = Single-speed Fan - 1 VEPS, DDRS
Outputs Ambient Temp Offset Output
1 = 2-Speed Fan
2 = Variable Speed Fan
with Fan Speed Feedback
without Fan Speed
Feedback
4 = Single-Speed Fan - 2
Outputs
without Fan Speed
Feedback with Ambient
Temp Offset
6 = Dual Fan
7 = Single-speed Fan - 1
Output
without Fan Speed
Temp Offset
255 = No Fan
PWM 14 Configuration 17 = Fan 1 0 = No Function 0 = No Function VEPS, DDRS

17 = Fan 1
PWM6 Configuration 5 = Fan 2 0 = No Function 0 = No Function VEPS, DDRS

5 = Fan 2
Dyn Fan Brake Enable — 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS

1 = Enabled
The CPC4 options for the single-speed fan - Type 4 are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 240.
Single-speed Fan - Type 4 CPC4 Options
Parameter Group Parameter Descripton Options Default Access
19 AC Fan Vehicle Enables/disables the 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS

Speed Enable road speed threshold 1 = Enabled
for AC fan.
19 AC Fan Vehicle Road speed 0 - 250 km/h (0 - 32.2 km/h (20 mph) VEPS, DDRS
Speed Thresh threshold above 155.3 mph)
which the A/C fan
request is not using
the hold time
19 PTO Enable Auto Enables/disables 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS

Fan Activation turning on the fan 1 = Enabled
when the PTO is
active.
19 Air Condition Enable Enables/disables 0 = Disabled 1 = Enable VEPS, DDRS

Auto Fan turning on the fan 1 = Enabled
when the air
conditioning is on.
19 J1939 Fan Request Fan request from 0 = Disabled 1= CM1 from SA1 VEPS, DDRS
Enable J1939 (PGN 57344) 1 = CM1 from SA1 (see 001/008) and
(see 001/008) and SA2 (see 001/009)
SA2 (see 001/009)
2 = CM1 from SA1
(see 001/008) only
3 = CM1 from SA2
(see 001/009) only
19 Fan AC Hold Time Minimum fan on time 0 - 600 sec. 180 sec. VEPS, DDRS
for AC
19 Hold Time Fan Minimum fan on time 0 - 600 sec. 0 sec. VEPS, DDRS
19 Fan Vehicle Speed Activates the road 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS
Enable speed threshold 1 = Enabled
feature
19 Fan Vehicle Speed Vehicle speed 0 - 250 km/h (0 - 0 km/h (mph) VEPS, DDRS
Threshold threshold below 155.3 mph)
which the fan request
will be ignored.
6 Mode of AC Status Defines type of input 0 = Disabled 2 = AC Active Open VEPS, DDRS
Input for A/C switch 1 = AC Active Closed
2 = AC Active Open
3 = LIM Active
Closed
4 = LIM Active Open
Single-Speed Fan (Fan Type 7)

The single-speed fan control (type 7) uses one digital output (Fan Control #1) to drive a single-speed fan. This fan type can
be used if the current is less than 2.0 A. Fan Control #1 is an open circuit to turn the fan ON. The fan will remain ON for a
minimum of 30 seconds. The fan output will not be enabled until five seconds after the engine has started.

Fan Control #1 is open circuit when at least one of the following conditions occur:
• Coolant temperature above factory set levels
• Intake manifold temperature above factory set levels
• Coolant or intake manifold air temperature sensor fails
• Engine Brake is active at high level (optional)
Single-Speed Fan Installation
This section provides a schematic of the specific connection from DDEC 13 to the fan. See following graphic. Compatible
fans may be obtained from several vendors.
Figure 53. Single-speed Fan - Fan Type 7

The MCM2.1 options for the single-speed fan - Type 7 are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 241.
Single-speed Fan - Type 7 MCM2.1
Parameter Setting Options Default Access
Fan Type 7 - Single-speed Fan - 1 0 = 2-Speed Fan with 7 = Single-speed Fan - 1 VEPS, DDRS
Output Ambient Temp Offset Output
1 = 2-Speed Fan
without Fan Speed
Feedback
Outputs
without Fan Speed
Temp Offset
6 = Dual Fan
Output
8 - Variable Speed Fan
without Fan Speed
Temp Offset
255 = No Fan
PWM 14 Configuration 17 - Fan 1 0 = No Function 0 = No Function VEPS, DDRS

17 = Fan 1
PWM 6 Configuration 0 = No Function 0 = No Function 0 = No Function VEPS, DDRS

5 = Fan 2

1 = Enabled
The CPC4 options for the single-speed fan -Type 7 are listed in the following table:

Table 242.
Single-speed Fan - Type 7 CPC4 Options

for AC fan.
which the A/C fan
the hold time

when the PTO is
active.
19 Air Condition Enable Enables/disables 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled VEPS, DDRS

when the air
conditioning is on.
(see 001/008) and SA2 (see 001/009)
SA2 (see 001/009)
2 = CM1 from SA1
(see 001/008) only
3 = CM1 from SA2
(see 001/009) only
for AC
feature
will be ignored.
2 = AC Active Open
3 = LIM Active
Closed
4 = LIM Active Open
Variable Speed Fan (Fan Type 2) With Fan Speed Feedback

DDEC 13 uses a pulse width modulated (PWM) output to drive a variable speed fan. The fan speed is a % demanded based
on engine speed. The available fan speed is 1.2x the engine speed. So if the engine is at 1000 RPM, the available fan speed is
1200 RPM. If 50% fan engagement is requested, that would be 600 RPM in this scenario. The fan may be enabled by specific
engine temperature sensors and various other inputs. Examples are AC high side pressure, coolant temperature, intake
temperature, engine brake engagement, or transmission retarder. The fan will ramp up to the requested speed in order to

8 Features
reduce noise, shock-loading, and belt slippage. If the fan is turned on for any reason other than high temperature, it will ramp
up to the full fan speed (i.e. 5% or 10% duty cycle, application dependent).
A decrease in fan speed will occur after a short time delay and will step down to the value dictated by the highest sensor
request. If the A/C switch is opened, the fan will increase speed at the ramp rate until it is at a maximum. After the A/C
switch is grounded the fan will remain on for a short time delay and then turn off.
The PWM output is initiated when at least one of the following conditions occur:
• Intake manifold or coolant temperatures above factory set limits
• Intake manifold or coolant temperature sensor fails
Installation
See the following figure for variable-speed fan with fan speed feedback (Fan Type 2) installation.
Figure 54. Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed Feedback (Fan Type 2)
The options for variable speed fans with fan speed feedback - Type 2 are listed in the following table:

Table 243.
Variable Speed Fan With Fan Speed Feedback - Type 2 MCM2.1 Options
Parameter Setting Options Default Access
Fan Type 2 = Variable Speed Fan 0 = 2-Speed Fan with 7 = Fan 1 VEPS, DDRS
with Fan Speed Feedback Ambient Temp Offset
1 = 2-Speed Fan
without Fan Speed
Feedback
Outputs
without Fan Speed
Temp Offset
6 = Dual Fan
Output
without Fan Speed
Temp Offset
255 = No Fan
PWM14 Configuration 0 = No Function 0 = No Function 0 = No Function VEPS, DDRS

17 = Single-speed Fan or
Two-speed Fan Low
PWM6 Configuration 5 = Fan 2 0 = No Function 0 = No Function VEPS, DDRS

5 = Fan 2

1 = Enabled
The CPC4 options for the variable speed fan with fan speed feedback - Type 2 are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 244.
Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed Feedback - Type 2 CPC4 Options

for AC fan.
which the A/C fan
the hold time

when the PTO is
active.
19 Air Condition Enable Enables/disables 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled VEPS, DDRS

when the air
conditioning is on.
(see 001/008) and SA2 (see 001/009)
SA2 (see 001/009)
2 = CM1 from SA1
(see 001/008) only
3 = CM1 from SA2
(see 001/009) only
19 Ramp Fan Specifies the ramp 1 - 100%/sec 100%/sec VEPS, DDRS

rate for a variable
speed fan
19 Trans Retarder Fan Specifies the fan 0 - 100% 0% VEPS, DDRS

Percent speed when the trans
retarder is active via
a hardwired input or
J1939 ERC1
message

Variable Speed Fan with Fan Speed Feedback - Type 2 CPC4 Options
for AC
feature
will be ignored.
2 = AC Active Open
3 = LIM Active
Closed
4 = LIM Active Open
8.12 Fleet Management

The Fleet Management Products provide flexible data extraction and communication capabilities. DDEC 13 Data collects the
data. DDEC 13 Reports is the PC software for data analysis and reporting.
Operation
Fleet Management is designed to provide feedback to the driver. These driver-friendly features help provide an understanding
of the effect of the driver’s actions on the engine and vehicle performance. The MCM2.1 provides engine control and
monitoring; the CPC4 stores a summary of engine performance.
Data in these devices can be extracted and analyzed with the PC software products. DDEC 13 Reports extracts data from all
hardware devices and analyzes DDEC 13 Data extracts data from all hardware devices and analyzes data from all devices.
All these products allow printing of comprehensive reports for managing vehicle operation.
DDEC 13 Data
DDEC 13 Data is a standard part of the CPC4. DDEC 13 Data utilizes available memory and processing speed, along with a
built-in, battery-backed clock/calendar to document the performance of the driver and vehicle. Data is stored in three monthly
records and in a trip file that may be reset at extraction. Data on periodic maintenance intervals, hard brake incidents, last
stop records, daily engine usage, and CPC4 diagnostics is also stored.
DDEC 13 Data can be extracted onto a PC hard disk through a wide range of options:
• Direct extraction using an industry standard translator box and cables connected to a PC running DDEC 13 Reports.
• Wireless extraction via cellular telephone, satellite radio communications equipment. The PC can be operating DDEC 13
Reports or DDEC 13 Communications.
DDEC 13 Data parameters for fleet management are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 245.
DDEC 13 Data Parameters for Fleet Management
27 FM Alert Update Enables/Disables the 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled VEPS, DDRS, DDDL

Enable Fleet Management 1 = Enabled 7.X
Alert data
27 FM Daily Usage Enables/Disables the 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled VEPS, DDRS, DDDL

daily usage data
27 Fleet Management Enables/Disables the 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled VEPS, DDRS, DDDL

data
27 FM Incident Update Enables/Disables the 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled VEPS, DDRS, DDDL

incident data
27 FM Monthly Trip Enables/Disables the 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled VEPS, DDRS, DDDL

monthly trip data
27 FM Serv Interval Enables/Disables the 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled VEPS, DDRS, DDDL

Update Enable Fleet Management 1 = Enabled 7.X
service interval data
27 FM Fuel Density Enables/Disables the 0-65.535 0.835 VEPS, DDRS, DDDL

Fleet Management 7.X
fuel density data
27 FM Total Data Adjust Determines how data 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS, DDDL
Selection is adjusted if MCM2.1 1 = Adjust Total Time 7.X
and CPC4 data do Only
not match. 2 = Adjust All Engine
Times
3 = Adjust all Engine
Times and Total
Revs
4 = Adjust all Engine,
OI, Fan Times
5 = Adjust all Engine,
OI, Fan Times and
Total Revs
6 = Report all fields
as maximum if total
does not match
engine hours
The fuel density parameter should be set as listed in the following table:
Table 246.
Fuel Density Parameter
Parameter Group Parameter Range Setting
27 FM Fuel Density 0 – 65.535 DD15 — 0.835

DDEC 13 Reports
After the data is extracted, DDEC 13 Reports software produces a wide range of diagnostic and management reports. DDEC
13 Reports produces comprehensive trip reports in both on-highway and non-road markets.
The on-highway reports are:
• Trip Activity
• Vehicle Speed/RPM
• Overspeed / Over Rev
• Engine Load/RPM
• Vehicle Configuration
• Periodic Maintenance
• Hard Brake Incident
• Last Stop
• DDEC 13 Diagnostic
• Profile
• Monthly Activity
• Daily Engine Usage
• Life to Date
• Predictive Cruise Control
• Cruise Percent
• Top Gear Percent
• DEF Trip Fluid
• DEF to Diesel Fuel Percent
• PTO Idle Time
• PTO Working Time

8 Features
Figure 55. DDEC 13 Reports, Trip Activity Report

Figure 56. DDEC 13 Reports, Trip Activity

8 Features
Figure 57. DDEC 13 Reports, Daily Engine Usage

Figure 58. DDEC 13 Reports, Engine Load/RPM

8 Features
Figure 59. DDEC 13 Reports, Vehicle Speed/RPM

Figure 60. DDEC 13 Reports, Profile

8 Features
8.13 Fuel Economy Incentive

The purpose of Fuel Economy Incentive (FEI) is to allow the fleet manager to set a fuel economy target while providing the
driver an incentive to meet the target.
Operation
Using the Fuel Economy Incentive option, a fleet manager can set a target fuel economy for each engine. If this fuel economy
is exceeded, the driver will be awarded a slight increase to the vehicle speed limit.
In this example, the limits are set as listed in the following table:
Table 247.
Fuel Economy Limits
Parameter Set Limit
Max Road Speed 96.6 km/h (60 mph)
FEI Max Vehicle Speed Reward 8 km/h (5 mph)
FEI Conversion Factor 75.7 km/h/km/L (20 mph/mpg)
FEI Minimum Fuel Economy 2.976 km/L (7 mpg)
If the driver has an average fuel economy of 7.1 m.p.g. then the new vehicle speed limit is 62 mph.
Vehicle Speed Limit + (Average Fuel Economy — FEI Minimum Fuel Economy) x FEI Conversion Factor = New Vehicle
Speed Limit
60 mph + (7.1 - 7.0 m.p.g.) x (20 mph/m.p.g.) = 62 mph
The maximum vehicle speed obtainable regardless of the fuel economy is 65 mph.

The Fuel Economy Incentive parameters are listed in the following table:

Table 248.
Fuel Economy Incentive Parameters
Parameter Group Parameter Definition Options Default Access
23 Fuel Economy Enables/disable the 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled DDDL 7.X, DDRS,

Incentive Enable feature. 1 = Enabled VEPS
23 FEI Minimum Fuel Indicates the 1.7 to 8.5 km/L (4 to 3 km/L (7 mpg) DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Economy minimum economy 20 mpg) VEPS
for fuel economy
incentive.
23 FEI Max Vehicle Indicates customer 0 to 20 km/h (0 - 12.4 5 km/h (3.1 mph) DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Speed Reward set maximum speed mph) VEPS
increase for vehicle
23 FEI Conversion The miles per hour 0 to 75.7 km/h/km/L 0 to 7.57 km/h/km/L DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Factor you want to allow for (0 to 20 mph/mpg) (2 mph/mpg) VEPS
each full mile per
gallon above the
minimum m.p.g.
23 FEI Use Trip Mileage FILT ECON bases 0 - Based on Filtered 1 - Based on Trip DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
the calculations on Fuel Economy* Fuel Economy† VEPS
the fuel information, 1 - Based on Trip
by periodic sampling Fuel Economy†
of fuel consumption.
TRIP ECON bases
the calculation on the
trip portion of the fuel
usage information.
* Filtered fuel economy calculates the fuel economy based on periodic sampling of fuel consumption. It allows rewards over a shorter time
period.
† Trip fuel economy calculates fuel economy over the entire trip. Rewards may take longer to achieve.

Fuel Economy Incentive will increase the Cruise Control and vehicle speed limits.
A vehicle can have both PasSmart and Fuel Economy Incentive, but the extra speed increments provided by the two features
do not add together. For example, if Fuel Economy Incentive is set for 7 mph of extra speed when the driver hits the
maximum fuel economy target and the same vehicle has a 5 mph PasSmart increase, the resulting speed increase is 7 mph,
not 12 mph.
8.14 Green House Gas Emission

Green House Gas Emission, is an option that allows the customer to set an absolute Vehicle Speed Limit that cannot be
exceeded, except in PasSmart and/or, will have an Idle Shutdown Limit that allows the engine to idle for no longer than five
minutes, with a few exceptions.
The Green House Gas Emission option is customer ordered and installed at the factory. It can only be modified after delivery
by the Detroit™ Customer Support Center, with proper authorization from the fleet, or vehicle owner.
Green House Gas (Vehicle Speed Limit)

The Green House Gas (GHG) Vehicle Speed Limit is the absolute maximum Road Speed Limit, unless PasSmart is activated.
It is then limited by the Green House Gas Vehicle Speed Limit + the lower of the GHG PasSmart, or PasSmart Speed adders.
Green House Gas Vehicle Speed Limit can only be exceeded for a limited amount of time in PasSmart, within a time period.

8 Features
Common Drive Reward and Fuel Economy Incentive, will not allow increases over the Green House Gas (Vehicle Speed
Limit).
Green House Gas (Idle Shutdown Limit)

Green House Gas Emission Idle Shutdown Limit requires an Ambient Air Temp Sensor. It has priority over Optimized Idle
for Cab Ambient Air Temperature control (Thermostat Mode) and limits idle time to five minutes unless:
• The PTO is engaged.
• Idle Shutdown Time is set to a value less than five minutes.
• Extreme High or Low ambient temperature conditions outside the cab are exceeded.
Table 249.
Green House Gas Emission Parameters
Parameter Group Parameter Description Option Default Access
0 = Disable
1 = Vehicle Speed
Green House Gas Limit
Sel Greenhouse Gas Emission 2 = Idle Shutdown
03 0 = Disable VEPS
Emission Requirements - Limit
Enable Parameter 3 = Vehicle Speed
and Idle Shutdown
Limit
8.15 Idle Adjust

This function increases and/or decreases the engine idle speed up to a programmable limit (Max Adjusted Idle Speed).
Operation
Engine idle speed can be varied by the operator using the Cruise Control switches if the following conditions are satisfied:
• Engine is running
• Vehicle speed is less than 6 mph (10 km/h)
• Cruise Control master switch is turned OFF
• PTO is not active and enable switch is OFF
• If an automatic transmission is in use, it is in neutral and no shift is in progress
• Clutch pedal is not pressed
• Throttle inhibit is not active
If any of the above conditions are not satisfied, Idle Adjust is cancelled and the normal idle speed is restored.
The current desired speed is increased by 16 rpm (Single Step Adjusted Idle Speed) when the Resume/Accel switch is
toggled. Speed change is active after the switch is released. Holding the Resume/Accel switch for more than one second the
current desired speed will be increased by 100 rpm/sec. (Ramp Rate Adjusted Idle Speed) as long as the switch is pressed and
the programmed Max Adjusted Idle Speed for idle increment is not exceeded.
Toggling the Set/Coast switch will decrease the current desired idle speed by 16 rpm (Single Step Adjusted Idle Speed).
Speed change is active after the switch is released. Holding the Set/Coast switch for more than one second will decrease the
current desired speed by 100 rpm/sec. (Ramp Rate Adjusted Idle Speed) as long as the switch is pressed and the minimum
low idle speed is not yet reached.
Once the desired idle speed has increased or decreased again, the new desired idle speed will be stored until the ignition has
been switched off.

The Idle Adjust parameters are listed in the following table:

Table 250.
Idle Adjust Parameters
Parameter Parameter Description Options Default Access

Group
3 Max Adjusted Idle Speed Max idle speed that will 0-4000 RPM 500 RPM VEPS, DDRS, DDDL 7.X
be allowed by the user
3 Single Step Adjusted Idle Single step rpm for 0-100 RPM 16 RPM VEPS, DDRS, DDDL 7.X
Spd adjusted idle speed
3 Ramp Rate Adjusted Idle Ramp rate for the 0-8191 RPM/sec. 100 RPM/sec. VEPS, DDRS, DDDL 7.X
Spd adjusted idle speed
8.16 Idle Shutdown Timer and PTO Shutdown

The Idle Shutdown Timer will shutdown the engine if it remains idling for a specified period of time. The options that can
operate with Idle Shutdown Timer are Idle Shutdown Override, Vehicle Power Shutdown or Shutdown on Power Take-off
(PTO).
Operation — Idle Shutdown Non-PTO Mode

There are four modes of operation for Idle Shutdown:
• Disabled – in this mode, idle shutdown will not occur.
• Park Brake – in this mode, idle shutdown will be enabled only when the park brake is applied, the accelerator pedal
position is at zero and the engine is idling.
• No Park Brake – this mode is the same as Park Brake Mode above, except there is no requirement for the park brake to be
applied.
• Edge Triggered Accelerator Pedal – this mode has no requirement on the park brake or on the engine being at idle. The
operator may reset the Idle Shutdown procedure by moving the accelerator pedal from below 40% to above 80%.
The idle shutdown period can range from 1 to 5000 seconds (approximately 83 minutes).
Certain conditions must be met for the entire time-out period for shutdown to occur. These conditions include:
• Coolant temperature above 10°C (50°F)
• Engine operation at idle
• The parking brake ON, digital input switched to battery ground (optional)
• Ignition ON
• Vehicle Speed Less than 3 mph (5 kph)
Fueling is stopped after the specified idle time; the ignition circuit remains active after the engine shuts down. The AWL will
flash 20 seconds before the shutdown occurs. The RSL will flash 10 seconds before shutdown occurs. The AWL will
continue flashing until the ignition is turned off to indicate shutdown has occurred. The RSL will turn off. The ignition switch
must be cycled to OFF (wait 10 seconds) and back to ON before the engine will restart, if shutdown occurs.
A Park Brake Switch may be installed; see the following figure:

8 Features
Figure 61. Park Brake Digital Input

Inactive Shutdown
The idle timer can be defeated by holding down the throttle or by not setting the park brake. The inactive timer will shutdown
the engine after twenty minutes if fueling is not sufficient to accelerate the vehicle.
Operation — PTO Shutdown

There are four modes of operation for PTO shutdown:
• Disabled - in this mode, PTO shutdown will not occur.
• Park Brake - in this mode, PTO shutdown will be enabled only when the park brake is applied, the accelerator pedal
position is at zero and the actual engine torque is less than 100 N·m (Max Engine Load PTO Shutdown).
• No Park Brake - this mode is the same as Park Brake Mode above, except there is no requirement for the park brake to be
applied.
• Edge Triggered Accelerator Pedal - this mode has no requirement on the park brake or the actual torque. The operator may
reset the PTO shutdown procedure by moving the accelerator pedal from below 40% to above 80%.
The PTO shutdown period can range from 1 to 5000 seconds (approximately 16 minutes).
A Park Brake Switch may be installed. See figure above.
Idle Shutdown Timer and PTO Shutdown Options

The following options are available with Idle Shutdown Timer and PTO Shutdown.
Idle / PTO Shutdown Override
Idle/PTO Shutdown Override allows the operator to override the idle shutdown timer or PTO shutdown timer based on the
selected override.
The shutdown will be overridden if any of the following conditions occur:
• The accelerator pedal is in limp-home mode
• Parked Regen is in progress. After regeneration completes, the override will remain in place for an additional five minutes
to allow the particulate filter to cool down after the regeneration cycle has completed.

• Operator Override is enabled (Enable Idle PTO Shtdn Override) as listed in the following table.
Table 251.
Operator Override Options
Option Conditions Results
0 = Vehicle Speed, Throttle Pedal Allows a temporary override if any of the Idle and/or PTO timer will be reset (shutdown
following occur: sequence will restart)
• Throttle Pedal >0%
• Vehicle Speed >0
1 = Vehicle Speed, Throttle Pedal, SEO, Allows a temporary override if any of the Idle and/or PTO timer will be reset (shutdown
Clutch, Service Brake following occur: sequence will restart)
• SEO Override switch is ON
• Service Brake is applied (switch is open)
• Clutch is pressed (switch is open)
2 = Vehicle Speed, Throttle Pedal, SEO Allows a temporary override if any of the Idle and/or PTO timer will be reset (shutdown
following occur: sequence will restart)
• SEO Override switch is ON
3 = Vehicle Speed, Throttle Pedal, Allows a continuous override if any of the Shutdown will not occur
Continuous Override with Throttle Pedal, following occur:
SEO • SEO Override switch is ON
4 = Disable No override allowed Override will not occur
NOTE: Idle / PTO Shutdown Override is ignored if Clean Idle is enabled. Instead, the Clean Idle specific override
conditions are used. Refer to Clean Idle section for further details.
Idle Shutdown with Ambient Air Temp

This option allows the override to be disabled based on ambient air temperature. If the upper and lower temperature limits are
set and the ambient temperature is within limits, the override will be disabled and the engine will be shutdown after the
specified time limit is met. If the ambient air temperature is outside the specified range, the override would be allowed by
increasing the percent throttle to greater than 1%.
For example, if the upper limit is set to 80°F and the lower limit is set to 65°F, the override would be disabled if the ambient
air temperature was between 65°F and 80°F. See the following figure.

8 Features
Figure 62. Ambient Air Temperature Override

An ambient air temperature sensor must be installed for this feature.
Idle Shutdown with Ambient Air Temp Continuous Override
It is possible for idle shutdown to be overridden continuously based on ambient air temperature. This allows the engine to
continue to run while the temperature is such that power from the engine is required to heat or cool the air to keep the cab
temperature comfortable.
Continuous override is only available if an ambient air temperature sensor is configured for use (Ambient Air Temp Sensor
Enable) and overrides are enabled (Enable Idle PTO Shtdn Override).
There are two modes of operation: operator override and automatic override. In both cases, the override will only be allowed
if the ambient air temperature is reading extreme (i.e. it is outside the limits "Lo Amb Air Override Temp" and "Hi Amb Air
Override Temp."
If automatic override is enabled "Idle Shutdown Auto Override," idle shutdown will always be overridden while the ambient
air temperature is reading extreme. If automatic override is not enabled and operator override is, the operator may explicitly
activate the override by pumping the accelerator pedal, or Service Brake while idle shutdown is in progress and the CEL is
flashing.
Note that the definition of a "pump" of the accelerator pedal depends upon the idle/PTO shutdown mode:
• Idle/PTO shutdown with/without park brake status - in either of these modes, pumping the accelerator pedal is done simply
by pressing the pedal.
• Idle/PTO shutdown with edge triggered accelerator pedal - in this mode, pumping the accelerator pedal is done by moving
it from below 40% to above 80%.
The continuous operator override will remain active until the ambient air temperature is no longer extreme, the park brake is
not applied, the ignition is turned off, or the operator pumps the pedal again. Note that pumping the pedal will only cancel the
override if it has already been in effect for at least 10 seconds.

Table 252.
Ambient Temp Idle Time Parameters
Parameter Parameter Description Options Default Access

Group
17 Hi Amb Air Time before Shutdown 0 to 65534 seconds 0 DDRS, VEPS, DDDL 7.X
Temp Idle Time occurs with ambient air
temperature above max
setting
17 Lo Amb Air Time before Shutdown 0 to 65534 seconds 0 DDRS, VEPS, DDDL 7.X
Temp Idle Time occurs with ambient air
temperature below
minimum setting
Vehicle Power Shutdown

Vehicle Power Shutdown is used with Idle Timer Shutdown or Engine Protection Shutdown. After the idle timer times out or
engine protection shuts the engine down, the Vehicle Power Shutdown relay shuts down the rest of the electrical power to the
vehicle.
A Vehicle Power Shutdown relay can be installed to shutdown all electrical loads when the engine is shutdown. See the
following figure:
Figure 63. Vehicle Power Shutdown Relay

All electrical loads that should be turned OFF when the engine shuts down should be wired through this relay.
Maximum Engine Load Shutdown
This option, when enabled (Max Engine Load for PTO Shutdown), allows the setting of a maximum load above which
Idle/PTO Shutdown is disabled.

8 Features

All the Idle Shutdown timer options are listed in the following table:
Table 253.
Idle Shutdown Timer Programming Options
13 1 02 DI Selection Configure pin 1/02 on 0 = Disabled 1 = Enable Park VEPS, DDRS

CPC4 1 = Enable Park Brake Interlock
Brake Interlock
13 Park Brake Switch Park Brake 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS

Config Configuration 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
17 Enable Idle Enables or Disables 0 = Disable 1 = Enable Idle DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Shutdown the Idle Shutdown 1 = Enable Idle Shutdown with Park VEPS
feature. Shutdown with Park Brake Status
Brake Status
2 = Enable Idle
Shutdown without
Park Brake
3 = Enable Idle
Shutdown with Edge
Triggered Accel
Pedal
17 Idle Shutdown Time The amount of 1 to 5000 seconds 300 sec. DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
engine idle time that VEPS
is allowed before the
Idle Shutdown
feature stops fueling
the engine.
17 Enable PTO Enables or disables 0 = Disable 0 = Disable DDDL 7.X, DDRS,

Shutdown the Idle Timer 1 = Enable PTO VEPS
Shutdown feature Shutdown with Park
when operating in Brake status
PTO mode. 2 = Enable PTO
shutdown without
Park Brake status
3 = Enable PTO
Shutdown with Edge
Triggered Accel
Pedal
17 PTO Shutdown Time The amount of 1 to 5000 seconds 300 sec. DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
engine idle time that VEPS
is allowed before the
PTO shutdown
feature stops fueling
the engine.
17 Min Coolant Temp Minimum coolant -40°C to 200°C (-40 10°C (50°F ) VEPS, DDRS
temperature before to 392°F)
an idle shutdown will
occur.

Idle Shutdown Timer Programming Options
17 Enable Idle PTO Enables/disables 0 = Vehicle Speed 1 = Vehicle Speed,

Shtdn Override override of Idle or Throttle Pedal Throttle Pedal, SEO,
PTO Shutdown 1 = Vehicle Speed, Clutch, Service Brake
Throttle Pedal, SEO,
Clutch, Service Brake
2 = Vehicle Speed,
Throttle Pedal, SEO
3 = Vehicle Speed,
Throttle Pedal,
Continuous Override
with Throttle Pedal,
SEO
4 = Disable
17 Max Engine Load PTO shutdown 0 to 5000 Nm (0 to 100 N·m (73.8 lb·ft) VEPS, DDRS
PTO Shutdown disabled for engine 3687.8 lb·ft)
loads greater than
this value
17 Lo Amb Air Override Extreme low ambient -40°C to 75°C (-40 to -4°C (24.8°F)
Temp air temp to allow 167°F)
override.
17 Hi Amb Air Override Extreme high -40°C to 75°C (-40 to 32°C (89.6°F)
Temp ambient air temp to 167°F)
allow override.
17 Idle Shutdown Auto Enables auto 0 = No automatic 0 = No automatic

Override override of Idle/PTO override performed override performed
Shutdown based on 1 = Automatic
ambient air override performed
temperature.
8.17 Limiters
The CPC4 supports two optional programmable engine limiters: Limiter 0 (LIM0) and Limiter 1 (LIM1). These Limiters are
each associated with a digital input. When the input is switched to ground, the limiter becomes active. If more than one
Limiter input is grounded at the same time, the Limiter with the lowest limitation parameter setting will prevail.
The vehicle speed limit on Limiter 0 is only considered when the current vehicle speed is below the calibrated threshold
already.
The CPC4 can also limit the minimum and maximum engine speeds.
Operation
When the appropriate input is grounded, Limiters can decrease the speed/load/torque from the setting of the Common Limiter
parameters, but cannot increase them beyond the Common Limiter settings.
Each Limiter can set:
• Maximum engine speed (speed limiting applications)
• Minimum engine speed (switched high idle applications)
• Maximum engine torque (torque limiting applications)
• Road speed limit (alternate road speed limit)
• Maximum vehicle acceleration

8 Features
"Maximum Engine Speed" will limit the upper engine speed all the time. Limiter switches can further limit the maximum
engine speed if programmed. "Minimum Engine Speed" defines the lower limit of engine speed operation . Limiter switches
can increase the limit if programmed and installed.
Installation
The Limiter pin assignments are listed in the following table:
Table 254.
Limiter Pin
Limiter 0 1/11
Limiter 1 2/11
NOTE: Due to VSS signal quality at low speeds, it is recommended that the vehicle speed limit be set above a
minimum of 48 kph to insure smooth road speed limiting. DDC cannot guarantee smooth speed limiting for
maximum speeds set below 48 kph.
DDEC 13 will exit the Minimum Engine Speed Mode for Automated/Automatic Transmissions for the following:
• Shift in Progress message received over j1939
• Valid TSC1 command received from the transmission
• Transmission in gear (selected gear or current gear)

Limiter 0 and Limiter 1 parameters are listed in the following table:
Table 255.
Limiter 0 and Limiter 1 Parameters
Parameter Group Parameter Range Default Access
3 Idle Configuration for 0= Disabled 3 = Enabled if neutral and DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Limiter Inputs 1 = Enabled Park Brake
2 = Enabled if neutral
3 = Enabled if neutral and
Park Brake
4 = Enabled if Park Brake
5 Limiter0 Min Eng Speed 0-4000 rpm 500 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Enabled
5 Limiter0 Max Eng Speed 0-4000 rpm 4000 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Enabled
5 Limiter0 Max Road Spd 0-152 kph (94.4 mph) 152 kph (94.4 mph) DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Enabled
5 Limiter0 Max Eng Trq 0-5000 N·m (3687.8 lb·ft) 5000 N·m (3687.8 lb·ft) DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Enabled
5 Limiter1 Min Eng Speed 0-4000 rpm 500 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Enabled

Limiter 0 and Limiter 1 Parameters
5 Limiter1 Max Eng Speed 0-4000 rpm 4000 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Enabled
5 Limiter1 Max Road Spd 0-152 kph (94.4 mph) 152 kph (94.4 mph) DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Enabled
5 Limiter1 Max Eng Trq 0-5000 N·m (3687.8 lb·ft) 5000 N·m (3687.8 lb·ft) DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Enabled
5 Limiter0 Max Vehicle -15.625 — 15.625m/s 2 10m/s 2 DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Accel
5 Limiter1 Max Vehicle -15.625 — 15.625m/s 2 10m/s 2 DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Accel
The parameters for min and max engine speed are listed in the following table:
Table 256.
Minimum and Maximum Engine Speed Parameters
3 Min Engine Speed 0 to 4000 rpm 600 rpm DDRS, VEPS
3 Max Engine Speed 0 to 4000 rpm 4000 rpm DDRS, VEPS
8.18 Low Gear Torque Reduction

Low Gear Torque Reduction is an optional feature that allows a transmission to be used with engines capable of producing
more torque than the transmission’s peak torque rating.
Operation
Low Gear Torque Reduction reduces the available torque if the ratio of vehicle speed to engine speed is below a set point.
This limits full torque in lower gears and allows a transmission to be used with engines above the transmission’s regular
torque rating. Two torque limits can be programmed.
NOTE: With R22 or later Software, Low Gear Torque Limiting is not allowed in the top two gears.
Example 1 – One Torque Limit

The customer wants to hold the torque to 550 ft. lbs (on an engine rated at 860 ft. lbs) up to 8th gear. The transmission
operates with the ratios listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 257.
Transmission Ratios
Ratio Low Gear Threshold* CPC4 – Output/Input

Gear
Shaft Speed
5 3.57 0.280
6 2.79 0.358
7 2.14 0.467
Desired Gear Down ProtectRatio Gear Down Protect Ratio Parameter
8 1.65 0.606
9 1.27 0.787
10 1.00 1.0
*The low gear threshold is determined by taking the inverse of the gear ratios and choosing a value in between the gears you want to limit.
The "torque factor" is determined by dividing the desired torque by the rated torque. The "threshold" is determined by taking
the inverse of the gear ratios and choosing a value in between the gears you want to limit.
To summarize, the customer wants to limit torque up to the 8th gear to 550 ft·lb. Estimate the "threshold" between 7th and
8th (0.5). From 8th gear on up, the full rated torque will be available. Set Gear Ratio Gear Down Protect to 0.5 and set the
Torque Factor Gear Down Protect to 0.64 (550/860).
Example 2 – Two Torque Limits
The customer wants to hold the torque to 450 ft·lbs (on an engine rated at 860 ft·lbs) up to 6th gear and up to 550 ft·lbs up to
8th gear. The transmission operates with the ratios listed in the following table:
Table 258.
Transmission Ratios
Ratio Low Gear Threshold* CPC4 – Output/Input

Gear
Shaft Speed
5 3.57 0.280
Desired Gear Down Protection Ratio Gear Down Protection Ratio Parameter
6 2.79 0.358
7 2.14 0.467
Desired Gear Ratio for High Gear Power Gear Ratio for High Gear Power Parameter
8 1.65 0.606
9 1.27 0.787
10 1.00 1.0
*The low gear threshold is determined by taking the inverse of the gear ratios and choosing a value in between the gears you want to limit.
The "torque factor" is determined by dividing the desired torque by the rated torque. The "threshold" is determined by taking
the inverse of the gear ratios and choosing a value in between the gears you want to limit.
To summarize, the customer wants to limit torque up to the 6th gear to 450 ft·b and 550 ft·lbs up to 8th gear. Estimate the
"threshold" between 5th and 6th (0.32) and 7th and 8th (0.5). From 8th gear on up, the full rated torque will be available.
Set "Gear Ratio for Gear Down Protection" to 0.32 and set the "Torque Factor for Gear Down Protection" to 0.52 (450/860).
Set "Gear Ratio for High Gear Power" to 0.5 and the "Torque Factor High Gear Power" to 0.64 (550/860).


A VSS or output shaft speed message over SAE J1939 is required. VEPS or DDRS can enable the parameters listed in the
following table:
Table 259.
Low Gear Torque Limiting Parameters
Parameter Group Parameter Description Range Default Access
23 Torque Factor* Provides a limit on

Gear Dwn Protect the available torque if
the ratio of vehicle
0.00 to 1.00 1.00 VEPS or DDRS
speed to engine
speed is below a set
point.
23 Gear Ratio Gear The gear ratio below

Down Protect which torque is
0.000 to 2.00 0.01 VEPS or DDRS
limited. (output shaft
rpm/input shaft rpm)
23 Torque Factor* Provides a limit on

High Gear Power the available torque if
the ratio of vehicle
0.000 to 1.00 1.00 VEPS or DDRS
speed to engine
speed is below a set
point.
23 Gear Ratio for High The gear ratio below

Gear Power which torque is
0.00 to 2.00 0.02 VEPS or DDRS
limited. (output shaft
rpm/input shaft rpm)
* % of maximum torque at the current engine speed.
8.19 Optimized Idle

Optimized Idle® with DDEC 13 reduces engine idle time by running the engine only when required. Optimized Idle
automatically stops and restarts the engine to accomplish the following:
• Keep the engine oil temperature between factory set limits 16°C (60°F ) - 40°C (104°F )
• Keep the battery charged greater than 12.2 V (12 V system)
• Keep the cab/sleeper or passenger area at the desired temperature (using the optional thermostat) - On-highway truck and
coach applications
Other benefits include overall reduction in exhaust emissions and noise, and improved starter and engine life (by starting a
warm engine and eliminating starting aids). Optimized Idle run times can be accessed through DDEC 13 Reports. The
Optimized Idle Active Lamp is steadily illuminated when Optimized Idle run times are logged.
Operation
To activate Optimized Idle, the following conditions must be met:
• Ignition ON with the vehicle idling
• Hood and cab closed
• Transmission in neutral
• Park brake set
• Idle shutdown timer must be enabled
Once the above conditions are met:

8 Features
• Turn the Cruise Master Switch to the ON position (if in the ON position, turn to OFF then to ON), the Optimized Idle
Active Lamp will flash.
• Turn on Thermostat Mode (if equipped and the mode is desired) by turning ON the thermostat, setting the fan controls in
the bunk and cab to HIGH and enabling the vehicle heating and cooling system.
Once these conditions are met, the Optimized Idle Active Lamp will flash until the Idle Shutdown timer expires. Optimized
Idle allows the operation of all DDEC 13 features such as PTO, throttle control, and Cruise Switch PTO, while the active
light is flashing.
Once Optimized Idle becomes active, the engine will either shutdown if Optimized Idle parameters are satisfied or ramp to
900 RPM. While the system is active (OI Active Lamp is steadily illuminated), the throttle, PTO, Cruise Switch PTO
functions are disabled and the engine speed is controlled by DDEC 13.
Optimized Idle Start Up Sequence
The following occurs during every OI engine start:
1. Optimized Idle Active Light is ON. DDEC 13 determines when the engine needs to start to charge the battery, warm the
engine, or heat/cool the vehicle interior.
2. The alarm (mounted in the engine compartment) will sound for five seconds.
3. After a short delay, the starter will engage and the engine will start. If the engine does not start, Optimized Idle will
attempt a second engine start in 45 seconds. The alarm will sound again prior to the second engine start. If the engine
does not reach a specified RPM within a few seconds, the system will be disarmed for the rest of the ignition cycle.
4. Once the engine starts, it will ramp up to 900 rpm (default). This value is customer selectable with DDDL 7.X or
DDRS.
5. Vehicle accessories will be turned on thirty seconds after any thermostat based engine start and will not be turned on for
an engine mode start. If the engine is running in engine mode, and the thermostat mode is requested, the vehicle
accessories will be turned on thirty seconds after the request.
If two or more conditions exist at the same time, DDEC 13 will satisfy all parameters before shutting down the engine. For
example, if the engine started due to battery voltage, the engine will run for a minimum of two hours. If the thermostat
becomes unsatisfied and requests the engine to run during this time, DDEC 13 will control the HVAC fans through the
Vehicle Power Shutdown relay, turning them on and off as required by the thermostat. At the end of the two hours, if the
thermostat was not satisfied, the engine would continue to run.
OI Target Engine RPM
If an Ambient Air Temperature Sensor is installed, the speed will be determined based on the temperatures listed in the
following table:
Table 260.
OI Target Engine RPM
Ambient Air Temperature OI Target Engine RPM
-40°C (-40°F) OI Target Engine rpm ae 0
-17.77°C (0°F) OI Target Engine rpm ae 1
4.44°C (40°F) OI Target Engine rpm ae 2
If an Ambient Air Temperature Sensor is not installed, the speed will be based on the parameter "OI Target Engine RPM ae
0." If you want the engine to only run at one speed, set all parameters to the same number.
Engine Mode
Engine Mode automatically stops and restarts the engine to maintain oil temperature and battery voltage. The Optimized Idle
Active Light is illuminated whenever Engine Mode is active. Optimized Idle starts and stops the engine to keep the following
parameters within limits while in Engine Mode.
Battery Voltage

- The engine will start when the battery voltage drops below 12.2 Volts for 12 Volt systems. This is the default. If an
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT Sensor) is installed, the customer can select an option to use a AAT Sensor vs.
voltage table to determine the start threshold for the battery. The thresholds are listed in the following table:
Table 261.
Voltage Threshold Based on Ambient Air Temperature
Ambient Air Temperature Voltage Threshold
-40°C (-40°F) 12.5 V
-17.77°C (0°F) 12.4 V
4.44°C (40°F) 12.3 V
26.66°C (80°F) 12.2 V
48.86°C (120°F) 12.2 V
There are three battery run modes: Normal Battery Run Mode, Alternate Battery Run Mode, and Continuous Battery Run
Mode.
Normal Battery Run Mode –
While in normal battery run mode, all battery voltage Optimized Idle starts are two hours long. This mode is customer
selectable by setting the Alternate Time to 0, the default mode as listed in the following table:
Table 262.
Normal Battery Run Mode
Alternate Time Battery Time Single Event First Consecutive Event Second Consecutive
Event
0 2 Hours 2 Hours 2 Hours 2 Hours
Alternate Battery Run Mode –

This mode is allowed only when the Alternate Time is set to a non-zero value. This parameter is customer selectable. While
in Alternate Battery Run Mode, all voltage starts are based on Alternate Time unless a critical battery restart event is
detected. A critical battery restart event is detected when the engine starts and runs to recharge the battery for the alternate
time and then detects another battery start within one hour after the engine stops. At this point, the run time will change to
two hours. The Alternate Battery Run Mode parameters are listed in the following table:
Table 263.
Alternate Battery Run Mode
Alternate Time Battery Time Single Event First Consecutive Event Second Consecutive
Event
a 2 Hours a 2 Hours 2 Hours

(Customer Selectable)
Continuous Battery Run Mode –

In this mode, the engine continues to idle without shutting down when two consecutive critical battery restart events have
occurred. This feature is customer selectable. The parameters for Continuous Battery Run Mode are listed in the following
table. A fault code is logged when this move is initiated (PID 168 FMI 14).

8 Features
Table 264.
Continuous Battery Run Mode
Alternate Time Battery Time Single Event First Consecutive Second Further Events
Event Consecutive Event
0 2 Hours 2 Hours 2 Hours Continuous Continuous
a 2 Hours a 2 Hours 2 Hours Continuous

(Customer
Selectable)
Oil Temperature –
The engine will start when the oil temperature drops below 15.55°C (60°F ) and will run until the oil temperature reaches
40°C (104°F ).
Thermostat Mode
Thermostat Mode automatically stops and restarts the engine to maintain oil temperature, battery voltage and cab
temperature. For on-highway applications, Thermostat Mode is used to keep the cab/sleeper (on-highway truck) and
passenger area (coach) at the desired temperature and maintain the Engine Mode parameters. The optional thermostat must be
turned ON for Thermostat Mode to be active. The Optimized Idle Active Light is illuminated whenever Thermostat Mode is
active.
Engine mode parameters as well as the interior temperature are monitored in Thermostat Mode. The thermostat informs the
ECU when to start/stop the engine to keep the interior warm/cool based on the thermostat setting. Ambient temperature is
also monitored to determine if the ambient temperature is extreme enough that the engine should run continuously.
Any accessories (HVAC fans) connected to the Vehicle Power Shutdown relay will turn ON for Thermostat Mode engine
starts. The HVAC fans will remain OFF for Engine Mode starts.
If Optimized Idle starts the engine for Engine Mode, and Thermostat Mode is then requested, the HVAC fans will turn ON
approximately 30 seconds after the Thermostat Mode is requested.
Thermostat Mode can be enabled for a maximum amount of time. After which, the engine will ignore any requests from the
thermostat.
Two automatic conditions which help keep the operator comfortable and reduce engine cycling are Continuous Run Mode
and Extended Run Mode.
Table 265.
Ambient Air Temp Sensor Enable
Parameter Parameter Options Default Access

Group
31 Ambient Air Temp Sensor 0 = Not available 0 = Not available DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Enable 1 = Hardwired DDC Sensor
2 = J1939 PGN 65269
3 = J1587
4 = PT CAN
5 = hardwired MBTrucks
sensor
Ambient Air Temp Sensor Enable should be enabled and configured for Thermostat mode operation. This parameter is
required only for those trucks equipped with an OI thermostat.
Continuous Run Mode –
This mode allows the engine to run continuously if the outside temperature (determined by the skin temperature sensor or
AAT Sensor if installed and configured) falls outside the hot or cold set limits and the thermostat set point can not be met.

The default set limits are 25°F (-3.9°C) for heat mode and 90°F (32°C) for cool mode. When a skin temperature sensor is
installed, these values are customer programmable in the thermostat and are password protected. When an ATT Sensor is
installed these limits can be set by DDDL 7.X or DDRS. When the thermostat is in the Continuous Run Mode, the
thermometer icon will flash along with the heat or cool icon on the thermostat if a skin temperature sensor is installed. If the
thermostat set point is satisfied, the engine will shutdown regardless of the outside temperature.
Extended Idle Mode –
If the Continuous Run Mode is not needed and the thermostat set point is not met within 45 minutes, the engine will
shutdown for fifteen minutes and restart and run for fifteen minutes. This fifteen-minute on and off cycle will continue until
the thermostat set point is reached or until the thermostat is turned off. This may be an indication that the heat or cool setting
on the thermostat does not match the vehicle heating or cooling system setting. It could also be an indication of low freon,
blockage in the heater system or system tampering.
Extended Idle Mode can be disabled with a customer selectable parameter. After running 45 minutes, the engine will
shutdown instead of cycling at 15 minute intervals.
Disable OI Thermostat Mode Based on Ambient Air Temperature –
This feature allows the thermostat mode to be disabled if the ambient air temp is below a programmable value. The
thermostat disable feature could be used to avoid starts in cold ambient air conditions (i.e. if an external heater system is
attached and the maintenance of cab temperature is not necessary by optimized idle). If the thermostat disable feature is
active then all OI engine start requests are ignored if the ambient air temperature is below a programmable value. In this case
the vehicle power shutdown relay will not be energized.
Table 266.
Parameters Description Options Default Access
OI Enable Therm Ext Enables / Disables the 0 = Disable 0 = Disable DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Mode feature of disabling OI 1 = Enable
thermostat mode based
on ambient air
temperature
OI Lower Limit Limit for disabling OI -40°C to100°C (-40°F to -4°C (24.8°F) DDDL 7.X, DDRS, VEPS
Continuous Run Thermostat Mode 212°F)
Installation
Optimized Idle utilizes the following inputs: Park Brake, Neutral Switch, Hood Tilt Switch, OI Thermostat (optional), and
Cruise Enable. Optimized Idle utilizes three digital outputs: Vehicle Power Shutdown Relay, OI Alarm, and the Optimized
Idle Active Light. A hardwired Vehicle Speed Sensor is required. See the following figure for the Optimized Idle overall
system schematic. New installations must be approved by Detroit™.
Prior to installation, check the following items:
• The transmission must provide a reliable neutral signal (switch) — hardwired or via J1939.
• A Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) must be installed.
• There must be an electric starter; air starters cannot be used with Optimized Idle.
• Automatic transmissions may be used, but they must have a Starter Lockout Feature installed based on a reliable neutral
signal.

8 Features
Figure 64. Optimized Idle System
NOTE: Circuit 4/10 is not required if VEHICLE POWER SHUTDOWN is multiplexed.

The digital inputs and outputs listed in the following table can be programmed.
Table 267.
Optimized Idle Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs
Parameter Group Parameter / Description Setting
12 Optimized Idle Enable 1 = Enable
8 Vehicle Speed Sensor 4 = Magnetic Pickup Vehicle Speed Sensor
13 3 01 AI Selection 0 = No Sensor
2 = OI Thermostat input
13 Trans Neutral Input Config 0 = Hardwired

1 = ETC2
2 = ETC5

Optimized Idle Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs
Parameter Group Parameter / Description Setting
13 Park Brake Switch Config 0 = Hardwired

2 = CCVS2
13 4 18 DI Selection 2 = Enable Engine Hood (Optimized Idle)
35 4 09 DO Selection 10 = Optimized Idle Active Lamp
35 4 10 DO Selection 0 = Disabled
3 = Vehicle Power Shutdown / Ignition Relay
35 3 17 DO Selection 4 = Optimized Idle Alarm
17 Enable Idle Shutdown 1 = Enable Idle Shutdown with Park Brake

Status
17 Enable PTO Shutdown 1 = Enable PTO Shutdown with Park Brake

Status
MCM2.1 Starter Type Control 1 = Starter Activated via MCM
13 1 02 DI Selection 1 = Enable Park Brake Interlock
35 3 17 DO Fault Detection 9 = Set Fault + Diag
35 4 09 DO Fault Detection 9 = Set Fault + Diag
35 4 10 DO Fault Detection 0 = Fault Detection Off

17 Enable Idle PTO Shtdn Override 0 = Vehicle Speed, Throttle Pedal
Optimized Idle options for battery charging and continuous run are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 268.
Optimized Idle Options
Parameter Description Range Default
OI Continuous Batt Time Enable When enabled and OI has 0 = Disable

started the engine for battery
0 = Disable
three consecutive times, the
1 = Enable
engine will run continuously in OI
Mode
OI Variable Volt Thresh Enable When enabled, the battery 0 = Disable

0 = Disable
voltage threshold will be based
1 = Enable
on ambient air temperature.
OI Alternate Battery Run Time Sets the alternate run time for 0 to 30600 sec. 0 sec.
battery starts.
OI Upper Limit Continuous Run Set the continuous run upper 40°C to 100°C (-40°F to 212°F) 32°C (89.6°F)
limit. When the ambient air
temperature is above this limit,
the engine will run continuously.
OI Lower Limit Continuous Run Sets the continuous run lower 40°C to 100°C (-40°F to 212°F) –4°C (24.8°F)
limit. When the ambient air
temperature is below this limit,
the engine will run continuously.
OI Thermostat Max Time Maximum amount of time the 0 to 459000 sec. 0 sec.
engine can run in Thermostat
Mode.
OI Target Engine rpm (ae 0 - ae Sets the speed the engine will 800 to 1000 rpm 1000 rpm
4) operate at in OI Mode .
Refer to OI Target Engine RPM
Table.
Optimized Idle installations should have the parameters listed in the following table set to shutdown:
NOTICE: DDC recommends that Shutdown be enabled for all Engine Protection parameters with Optimized Idle
installations.
Table 269.
Engine Protection Parameters
Parameter Description Setting
Coolant Temp Eng Protect Shtdn Indication of the type of engine protection 1 = Engine Shutdown
based on high engine coolant temp.
Oil Press Eng Protect Shtdn Indication of the type of engine protection 1 = Engine Shutdown
based on low engine oil pressure.
Cool Level Eng Protect Shtdn Indication of the type of engine protection 1 = Engine Shutdown
based on low coolant level.

The Vehicle Power shutdown feature is used by Optimized Idle to turn off all accessory loads when the engine is shutdown.
Optimized Idle will turn these loads on for Thermostat Mode starts.

No other DDEC 13 features can be used when Optimized Idle is active.
8.20 Parked DPF Regeneration

Regeneration is the oxidation of soot in the Aftertreatment Device (ATD). This process happens during the normal operation
cycle of the vehicle; it can occur both passively and actively. If the ATD is not capable of completing a successful
regeneration due to duty cycle constraints or other restrictions, a parked regeneration may need to occur.
Operation
To initiate a parked regeneration, the following must occur:
• Park Brake must be ON and the clutch must be released
• Engine should be on the idle governor (can not be in Fast Idle or PTO Mode – not applicable for fire truck applications
• The engine should be fully warmed up and operating on thermostat temperature [greater than 60°C (140°F)]
• Transmission in neutral
• Vehicle speed must be 0
• Hold the Regen Switch to the ON position for five seconds and release
• Engine Speed is less than 1000 rpm
When the request is accepted, the DPF Regeneration Lamp will turn on for one second and then go off for the rest of the
parked regeneration and the engine rpm will increase to approximately 1100 rpm (calibrated value). If the DPF is clean, the
engine will deny the request. The HEST Lamp will flash once every 10 seconds. Once the stationary regen is successfully
completed , the DPF Regeneration Lamp will remain off and the engine will return to base idle.
If any of the above requirements are removed, the engine will return to idle.
Parked regen initiated by the tool will continue and complete regeneration even if the tool is disconnected and the filter is
clean.
To cancel the Parked regeneration, the driver can toggle the Regen Switch to ON for five seconds. The DPF Regeneration
Lamp will turn on for one second to show acceptance of the cancellation request and then return to the appropriate state as
defined by the current level of soot in the engine.
Regeneration Options
Two new regeneration options are available:
• DPF Zone Turn On Regen Switch –This feature can be configured to allow a DPF Regeneration via the DPF Regen
Switch based on the zone that is programmed (DPF_Zone_Turn_On_Regen_Switch). The switch request will only be
honored for the zone programmed or greater.
• Park Brake on Dosing Inhibit –This feature if enabled will not allow dosing unless the park brake is grounded.

8 Features
Figure 65. DPF Zone Turn On Regen Switch

DPF Parked (Stationary) Regeneration for hazardous applications ONLY
The ACM2.1 should be configured to not allow automatically triggered over-the-road regenerations (DPF Parked Regen
Only Enable = Enabled). These are controlled at order entry or by the Customer Support Center.
The appropriate options, based on the ACM2.1, are listed in the following table:
Table 270.
Parked Regeneration Options
Application ACM2.1 Setting
Standard DPF Parked Regen Only Enable – Disabled
Hazardous DPF Parked Regen Only Enable – Enabled
Table 271.
ACM2.1 Parameters
Parameter Setting Access
DPF Zone Turn on Regen Switch 1-5 DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS
Extended Idle Auto RPM Elevate 0 = Disable DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS
1 = Enable

The parameters listed in the following table must be set for manual transmissions.

Table 272.
Parameter Settings for Manual Transmissions
13 Clutch Switch Config 1 = 1 Clutch Switch
13 4 08 DI Selection 1 = 1 Clutch Switch
13 Trans Neutral Input Config 0 = Hardwired

255 = Not Available (typical setting)
13 Park Brake Switch Config 0 = Hardwired (typical setting)

1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
8 Vehicle Speed Sensor 4 = Magnetic Pickup Vehicle Speed Sensor
The parameters listed in the following table must be set for Allison, Eaton UltraShift transmissions:
Table 273.
Parameter Settings for J1939 Transmissions (Allison, Eaton UltraShift, Eaton AutoShift)
13 Clutch Switch Config 0 = No Clutch Switch
13 4 08 DI Selection 0 = Disable
13 Trans Neutral Input Config 1 = ETC2

2 = ETC5
13 Park Brake Switch Config 0 = Hardwired (typical setting)

1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
8 Vehicle Speed Sensor 3 = J1939 ETCI
8.21 PasSmart
The PasSmart® feature is available on selected on-highway engines equipped with a Vehicle Speed Sensor.
Operation
The PasSmart feature allows a fleet manager to enable a second Vehicle Speed Limit (VSL) above the normal VSL (Max
Road Speed) to assist while passing other vehicles on the highway. This second VSL (Max Road Speed + PS Speed
Increment) is programmed for a limited duration (PS Pass Speed Duration) during a given time period (PS Pass Speed
Interval). The passing speed interval starts when the feature is programmed. An interval of 8, 12, or 24 hours will always
reset at midnight.
The driver activates PasSmart by double-pumping the accelerator pedal. Starting at the full throttle position, the driver
releases the throttle completely, returns the throttle to the full throttle position, releases it again and then returns to full
throttle. If the driver completes this action within five seconds, PasSmart is activated.
After double-pumping the accelerator pedal, the vehicle is given 20 seconds to accelerate to a speed above the normal VSL
(Max Road Speed). If the vehicle speed does not exceed the normal VSL (Max Road Speed) in 20 seconds, the driver must
repeat the double-pump action. Once the normal VSL (Max Road Speed) has been exceeded, a new higher VSL (Max Road

8 Features
Speed + PS Speed Increment) becomes the maximum vehicle speed limit. This limit is the normal VSL plus the PS Pass
Speed Increment.
A passing speed duration timer starts when vehicle speed exceeds the normal VSL (Max Road Speed) and continues to count
until the vehicle speed drops back below the normal VSL (Max Road Speed). At the end of the passing event when the
vehicle speed drops back below the normal VSL (Max Road Speed), PasSmart is automatically deactivated and the driver
cannot exceed the normal VSL (Max Road Speed) unless the Accelerator Pedal is double-pumped again.
PasSmart operates only with the foot pedal and not with the Cruise Control switches or hand throttle. However, activating
PasSmart does not disturb or deactivate Cruise Control if it is on when the passing event begins. Once the driver has passed
the other vehicles and PasSmart has deactivated, Cruise Control automatically takes over. To deactivate Cruise Control
during the pass, the driver must turn the Cruise Control switch to off.
When the Passing Speed Duration time expires, the AWL will begin to flash one minute prior to ramping the VSL back down
to the normal VSL (Max Road Speed). The rampdown event always takes 5 seconds regardless of the Passing Speed
Increment programmed into the controller. The ramp down alert can be distinguished from an engine fault warning in that the
AWL flashes for the PasSmart alert and remains on constantly for an engine fault.
If intervals of 8, 12, or 24 hours are selected, the interval will always reset after the chosen interval and at midnight. This
allows fleets to synchronize the reset with driver change periods. All other intervals reset from the time they are selected. For
example, if you select 4 hours, then a reset will occur every 4 hours from the time of programming but not necessarily at
midnight.
PasSmart still operates when there is an active (non-shutdown) system fault. In this situation, the AWL goes from constant
illumination to flashing one minute before the VSL ramps down. At the end of the passing event when PasSmart is
deactivated, the AWL will return to constant illumination if the fault is still active.
If there is an active stop engine fault, the ramp down/shutdown activity overrides PasSmart. The additional passing speed is
not available until the fault is cleared. For example, if the normal fleet speed limit is 65 mph, the fleet manager can increase
the VSL an additional 10 mph for a maximum of 30 minutes per reset interval. An example of these limits is listed in the
following table:
Table 274.
PasSmart Settings
Parameter Setting
PS Pass Speed Duration 30 minutes
PS Pass Speed Interval 8 hours
PS Pass Speed Increment 10 mph
Each time the driver exceeds 65 mph, the 30 minute clock counts down as long as the speed remains above 65 mph. The
driver can continue to enter and exit the PasSmart extra speed zone to pass vehicles until the entire 30 minutes of higher VSL
(Max Road Speed + PS Speed Increment) is used up. The driver is warned by the AWL one minute before the time expires.
The vehicle speed is then limited to 65 mph until the 8 hour period expires and an additional 30 minutes of passing time is
available.
Installation
An OEM supplied Vehicle Speed Sensor or output shaft speed over the SAE J1939 Data Link is required. Refer to section
"OEM-installed Sensors " for additional information.

The PasSmart parameters are programmable at engine order entry or with DDDL 7.X, Vehicle Electronic Programming
System (VEPS), and DDRS as listed in the following table:

Table 275.
PasSmart Parameters
23 PasSmart Enable Enables/disables the 0 = Disable 0 = Disable DDDL 7.X, VEPS or

feature. 1 = Enable DDRS
23 PS Pass Speed The duration of time 0 to 255 minutes 0 DDDL 7.X, VEPS or
Duration per interval that is DDRS
permitted at the
higher speed. A value
of zero will disable
the feature.
23 PS Pass Speed The period of time 1 to 24 hours* 8 DDDL 7.X, VEPS or

Interval when the CPC4 DDRS
resets to begin a new
period.
23 PS Pass Speed The additional vehicle 0 to 40 km/h (0 to 0 DDDL 7.X, VEPS or

Increment speed permitted 24.9 mph) DDRS
above the
programmed vehicle
speed limit. A value
of zero will disable
the feature.
*The time within which the road speed limit will return to the programmed road speed limit when the feature is deactivated .

PasSmart will increase the Vehicle Speed Limit. A vehicle can be set up with PasSmart, GHG Emissions, and Fuel Economy
Incentive, but the extra speed increments provided by the other features do not add together (also see GHG Emission for
limitations). For example, if Fuel Economy Incentive is set up to give 7 mph of extra speed when the driver hits the
maximum fuel economy target and the PasSmart increase is 5 mph, the resulting speed increase is 7 mph, not 12 mph.
8.22 Passwords
DDEC 13 is capable of providing password protection for groups of parameters or a fleet password for all parameters.
Operation
The lockout passwords may be up to 4 ASCII characters. Each level can have its own unique password.
Passwords can be activated with DDDL 7.X, VEPS or DDRS. Once activated, the parameters may not be changed until the
correct password is reentered. The CPC4 is automatically locked at the next ignition cycle.
Groups selected for additional password protection are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 276.
Level Parameters Protected
1 General Password – all parameters in all groups will be protected

when this level is set
2 Vehicle Speed Settings – parameter groups that contain primary

settings governing the speed of the vehicle. All parameters in
following groups are protected when this password is set:
• PGR003 – Common Limiters
• PGR008 – Vehicle Speed Sensor
• PGR015 – Cruise Control (minus the "Cruise Power" parameter for
rating changes)
3 PTO / Idle Settings - parameter groups that contain settings related

to idle, idle shutdown, and PTO of the vehicle. All parameters in the
following groups are protected when this password is set:
• PGR007 – PTO Control on PTO and CC pin
• PGR017 – Idle and PTO Shutdown
4 System Settings – parameter groups that contain settings related to

systems on the vehicle. All parameters in the following groups are
protected when this password is set:
• PGR002 – Vehicle Parameters I
• PGR010 – Engine Brake
• PGR012 – Optimized Idle
• PGR019 – Automatic Fan Activation
5 Engine Protection Settings – the parameter group that contain

settings for engine shutdown options and Engine Rating Selection –
There is one parameter in this section, the "Cruise Power" parameter
from group 15. This parameter allows the user to select from up to 3
different ratings within the same engine family (high power, low
power, and cruise-power) where applicable are protected when this
password is set:
• PGR018 – Engine Protection Shutdown
• Cruise Power (in Parameter Group 15 Cruise Control)
6 TBD
7 Export Settings
Back Door Password

In cases where the Password for a locked module is not available, a separate "back door” Password may be obtained from the
Detroit™ Customer Support Center (CSC). Detroit™ requires the VIN and Seed values read from the locked module with
DDDL 7.X or DDRS. The new unlock code will be provided by Detroit™ Customer Support Center (CSC) for entry into the
tool. When the correct Back Door Password is entered, all parameters with write access by the Service tool may be changed.
Changing the Password
The Password itself may be changed. The CPC4 is automatically locked at the next ignition cycle. By leaving the "Enter New
Password" prompt blank and clicking "Send," you will disable Password protection. When the Password is changed, the
ignition must be off for at least 15 seconds.
8.23 Progressive Shift

The Progressive Shift option offers a high range maximum Vehicle Limit Speed to encourage the use of high (top) gear
during cruise operation. Progressive Shift encourages the driver to upshift from a lower to a higher gear prior to reaching the
engine’s governed speed. The resulting lower engine speed in high range should result in improved fuel economy.

Progressive shifting techniques should be practiced by every driver, but can be forced if fleet management considers it
necessary. The benefits from progressive shifting are best realized during stop-and-go driving cycles.
The rate of acceleration will be limited below the programmed speed to encourage up shifting.
As the driver accelerates beyond a specified speed, the rate of engine acceleration is limited in higher rpm, to encourage
(force) the operator to select the top gear.
• Progressive Shift should be used with 2100 rpm rated engines in fleet applications where the reduced driveability will not
impede trip times or productivity.
• Progressive Shift is not compatible with automatic transmissions.
NOTE: Progressive Shift should be selected only when Spec Manager is run. Progressive Shift selection without
Spec Manager could result in mismatched equipment, poor fuel economy, and poor performance. Your local
Detroit™ Distributor will run the program.
Operation
The Progressive Shift option has two sets of low ranges and one set of high range parameters, which are programmable with
DDDL 7.X, DDRS, or VEPS. The example shift pattern chart, shown in the following graphic, reflects default values when
the Progressive Shift option is chosen and the low and high gear parameters are not modified.
Figure 66. Progressive Shift Chart - Represents Default

An alternate use for the Progressive Shift option would be to encourage a driver (or force him/her) into top gear. Normally
this condition exists when the gearing selected at the time of order allows a Vehicle Limit Speed to be reached in a gear lower
than top gear. See the graphic under the following "High Range" section.
Low Range #1
The low range #1 area of operation is bound by PS Low Gear 1 Max. Vehicle Speed, PS Low Gear 1 RPM Limit, and PS
Low Gear 1 Max. RPM Limit. In the previous illustration, the default values are 12 mph (approximately 19.3 kmh), 1400
rpm and 1800 rpm, respectively. During vehicle acceleration, when the vehicle speed is below selected maximum vehicle
speed for range #1, the maximum rate the engine can be accelerated is reduced to 33 rpm/s. During light load operation, the
driver will feel this and be encouraged to up-shift to regain his/her rate of acceleration. If the engine continues to be operated
above PS Low Gear 1 rpm Limit, it may eventually reach PS Low Gear 1 Max. RPM Limit. When the PS Low Gear 1 Max.
RPM Limit is obtained, no additional increase in engine speed will be allowed. At this point, the transmission must be up-
shifted if the vehicle is to continue accelerating.
Low Range #2

8 Features
The low range #2 area of operation is bounded by a maximum speed, a maximum vehicle speed and a maximum engine turn-
off speed. In the previous illustration, the default values shown are 27 mph (approximately 43.5 km/h), 1600 rpm and 1800
rpm, respectively. (The lower vehicle speed boundary is the low range #1 maximum speed value.) The engine acceleration
rate for low range #2 is 25 rpm/sec.
High Range
Two high range parameters should be selected; PS High Gear On Vehicle Speed and PS High Gear RPM Limit (RPM). The
default values shown in the previous illustration, are 50 mph (approximately 80.5 km/h) and 1650 rpm, respectively. Once
the high range maximum engine speed is attained, the engine will not be allowed to operate above the high range maximum
engine speed. This is meant to encourage up-shifting to high gear in order to increase vehicle speed. See the following
graphic. Spec Manager should be used if the HIGH GEAR speed is set such that it reduces the vehicle speed and the engine
speed; this limit will not work as desired.
NOTE: The HIGH GEAR maximum engine speed could change the maximum Vehicle Limit Speed if the PS High
Gear RPM Limit (RPM) limits the Vehicle Limit Speed. With Progressive Shift enabled, the high gear rpm limit
overrides the rated speed of the engine rating.
Figure 67. Progressive Shift Corrects Problem with High and Low Gears Modified
Installation Information
A Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) must be installed. It must be enabled, and all proper calculations entered into the ECU with
DDRS, DDDL 7.X, or VEPS.

The Spec Manager program should be utilized to determine maximum vehicle speed for low range #1 and #2. If the
maximum engine speed and maximum vehicle speed coincide, the Progressive Shift logic may not correctly compensate
faster or slower on either side of the maximum vehicle speed. Spec Manager can alert the programmer to this dilemma and
advise accordingly on maximum vehicle speed set points.
Example:If the maximum vehicle speed #1 was 12 mph (approximately 19.5 kmh), the Progressive Shift logic may not
determine if the maximum engine speed is 1400 or 1600 rpm. Spec Manager would advise moving the maximum vehicle
speed #1 plus or minus 2 mph (approximately 3.2 kmh) to eliminate any possible confusion.

Enabling all areas required for Progressive Shift can be performed with DDDL 7.X, VEPS, or DDRS.
The Progressive Shift option has two sets of low gear and one set of high gear parameters as listed in the following table:
Table 277.
Progressive Shift Programming
Parameter Group Parameter Description Range Default
23 Progressive Shift Enable Indicates the enabled/ 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled

disabled status of the 1 = Enabled
progressive shift feature.
23 PS Low Gear 1 Max Sets the low gear #1 turn 0 to 250 km/h (0 to 155.3 29 km/h (18 mph)
Vehicle Spd off speed. mph)
23 PS Low Gear 1 RPM Limit Sets the low gear #1 RPM 0 to 4000 rpm 1600 rpm
limit.
23 PS Low Gear 1 Max RPM Sets the low gear #1 0 to 4000 rpm 1600 rpm
Limit maximum RPM limit.
23 PS Low Gear 2 Max Sets the low gear #2 turn 0 to 250 km/h (0 to 155.3 70.8 km/h (44 mph)
Vehicle Spd off speed. mph)
23 PS Low Gear 2 RPM Limit Sets the low gear #2 RPM 0 to 4000 rpm 1700 rpm
limit.
23 PS Low Gear 2 Max RPM Sets the low gear #2 0 to 4000 rpm 1700 rpm
Limit maximum RPM limit.
23 PS High Gear On Vehicle Sets the high gear turn on 0 to 250 km/h (0 to 155.3 70.8 km/h (44 mph)
Spd speed. mph)
23 PS High Gear RPM Limit Sets the high gear RPM 0 to 4000 rpm 1800 rpm
limit.

When Progressive Shift is enabled, DDEC10 or DDEC13 will treat "HIGH GEAR RPM LIMIT" as the rated speed of the
engine. Vehicle maximum speed or maximum Cruise Control settings can not be set higher then engine speed will allow
based on the VSS data entered.
8.24 Starter Lockout

The Starter Lockout function protects the starter motor from over-speed damage, e.g. re-engaging the starter motor while the
engine is running.
Operation
The Starter Lockout output circuit drives a normally closed relay, which interrupts the starting signal when the output has
been activated.

8 Features
If enabled, the Starter Lockout output will be activated when the engine speed exceeds the minimum speed for the starting
motor for a maximum amount of time. To ensure that the engine would start even under worst conditions, the over-speed
time condition will be added to the engine speed condition before the starter is locked out. Both values, maximum speed and
minimum over-speed time, are dependent on the coolant temperature. The output is disabled when the ignition switch has
been cycled to off or the engine is not running, i.e. the engine speed has a value of zero.
The cranking time is limited to a programmed value to keep the starting motor from over crank damage. The starter lockout
relay will be activated when cranking time exceeds this lockout limit.
Since the starter signal is not available, the engine speed will be monitored to detect when the engine is cranking. When the
starter engages, engine speed rises from zero to starter cranking speed. After this has been detected, engine speed will not be
below the programmed speed for over-crank detection for the programmed maximum starter crank time.
If the driver is still turning the start key and the engine doesn’t start while the maximum crank time expires, the starter
lockout relay will be activated to shut off the starting engine. In this instance, the starter lockout relay will remain activated
until the programmed lockout time expires and the engine has stopped. This allows the starting motor to cool down before the
driver is permitted to start the engine again.
Installation
The Starter Lockout output circuit drives a normally closed relay, which interrupts the starting signal when the output has
been activated. See the following figure.
Figure 68. Starter Lockout

Starter Lockout may be enabled or disabled as listed in the following table with VEPS or DDRS.

Table 278.
Starter Lockout
Parameter Group Parameter Setting Options Default
35 3 17 DO Selection 1 = Enable Starter 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled

Lockout 1 = Enable Starter
Lockout
2 = Enable kick down
output
3 = Not used
4 = Optimized Idle Alarm
5 = Split Valve2
6 = Starter Lockout +
AGS2 run signal / starter
lockout
7 = Engine brke disabled
for over speed
8 = Battery Voltage Low
Lamp
9 = Coolant Level Low
Lamp
10 = PTO1valve2
35 3 17 DO Fault Detection — 0 = Fault Detection Off 1 = Diag

1 = Diag
2= PulseWhenOff
3 = PulseWhenOff + Diag
4 = PulseWhenOn
5 = PulseWhenOn + Diag
6 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
10 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff
11 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
12 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn
13 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn + Diag
14 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault +
PulseWhenOn +
PulseWhenOff + Diag
8.25 Tachometer Drive

DDEC13 uses the Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP Sensor) signals to compute engine speed. The engine speed is transmitted
over the SAE J1939 Data Link. Engine speed can be displayed by connecting a tachometer from the CPC4 connector pin 1/9.
See the following figure.

8 Features
Figure 69. Tachometer Drive Installation

Operation
Pin 1/9 provides an engine speed signal for driving an external tachometer. To calculate the parameter:
Table 279.
F= Frequency to reach maximum scale of instrument (Hz)
N= Engine speed at maximum scale of instrument
K= 6000 x F/n
The parameter is listed in the following table:
Table 280.
Tachometer Parameter
9 Engine Speed Display N 200 – 30,000 counts/rev 1604 counts/rev VEPS, DDRS
Mot
8.26 Throttle Control/Governors

There are two types of engine governors that are used with throttle controls. The engine governors are:
• The Automotive Limiting Speed Governor (ALSG) for torque control, typical governor for on-highway applications
• The Power Take-off (PTO) for speed control, typical governor for off-highway applications

Automotive Limiting Speed Governor — On-Highway

In on-highway applications and some nonroad applications, ALSG is the primary throttle source. The throttle input in a
ALSG sets percent load. The amount of fuel input to the engine is determined by the throttle position. As the load on the
engine varies the resulting engine speed will vary between idle speed and governed speed
ALSG Accelerator Pedal
The accelerator pedal (AP) sends an input signal which the ALSG uses to calculate engine power. This assembly is also
referred to as the Accelerator Pedal Sensor (AP Sensor) assembly.
ALSG Accelerator Pedal Installation
DDEC13 is compatible with an AP which has an output voltage that meets SAE J1843 and has less than 5% of voltage
supply closed throttle variability.
If multiplexed, OEM must provide circuit malfunction detection (continuity checks) and populate data on broadcast faults per
J1939-73 requirements.
The AP is an OEM supplied part. Vendor sources may be contacted for additional design and installation details.
NOTE: An Idle Validation Switch is required and uses two digital inputs.
Figure 70. Accelerator Pedal Installation

ALSG Accelerator Pedal Assembly Diagnostics
Idle Validation Switch inputs provide redundancy to assure that the engine will be at idle in the event of an AP in-range
malfunction. The Idle Validation Switch is connected to two digital inputs on the CPC4. When the IVS Idle Position Switch
on the AP is switched to battery ground and the IVS throttle position is open, the engine speed will be at idle.
Dual Channel Analog Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APP)
The Dual Channel Analog Accelerator Pedal Sensor, sometimes referred to as the APP (Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor)
sends 2 Analog signals to the CPC4, APS1 and APS2. The voltage output of APS2 is approximately half of APS1 and a
rationality check is performed to confirm, for the system On Board Diagnostics. APP does not utilize Idle Validation
Switches, due to the redundant sensor.

8 Features
Common to all dual channel pedal types, the upper and lower mechanical positions have to be permanently learned
automatically.
Figure 71. Dual Analog Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Configuration
Table 281.
Sensor Connector and Pinout
Function CPC4 Pinout Connector Pinout Comments Connector Body
APS1 1/7 A Sensor 1 Signal
GND1 1/4 B APS1 GND
VCC1 (+5V) 1/8 C APS1 Power Supply
VCC2 (+5V) 3/3 D APS2 Power Supply
GND2 3/2 E APS2 GND
APS2 4/14 F Sensor 2 Signal Harness Connector and Seal (P/N:

12066317)
Terminal Female (P/N: 12103881)

Figure 72. Dual Analog Pedal Position Sensor Installation

Dual Channel Analog Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Diagnostics
If either circuit APS1 or APS2 has a fault, the channel that is functioning properly shall be used to determine:
• Measured Actual Pedal Position when the service brake is not applied
• Actual Pedal Position set to 0% when the service brake is applied
• Idle Status
If both APS1 and APS2 have a fault:
• Actual Pedal Position is set to 0%
• Idle Status is set to "Inactive."
Table 282.
Dual Channel Analog Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Parameters without kickdown
11 Dual-Chan AP Idle N/A 0 - 30% 19% VEPS

Range Min Perc
Chan1

Range Max Perc
Chan1
11 Dual-Chan AP Wide N/A 0 - 100% 39% VEPS

Range Min Perc
Chan2

Range Max Perc
Chan2

8 Features

Range Min Perc
Chan1

Range Max Perc
Chan1

Range Min Perc
Chan2

Range Max Perc
Chan2
11 Dual Chan Span Max Dual Channel Pedals: 0 - 100% 5.0% VEPS
Perc Max allowed
difference between
channel1 and
channel2
11 kickdown on percent Dual Channel AP: 0 - 100% 0% VEPS

Position-Threshold
for Kickdown On
11 kickdown off percent Dual Channel AP: 0 - 100% 0% VEPS

Position-Threshold
for Kickdown Off

11 Dual Chan1 Sig Diag Dual Channel Pedals: 0 - 50000V 4.55V VEPS
Max Volt Max allowed
difference between
channel1 and
channel2
11 Dual Chan1 Sig Diag Dual Channel Analog 0 - 50000V .75V VEPS
Min Volt Pedal: chan1 min
signal voltage
11 Dual Chan2 Sig Diag Dual Channel Analog 0 - 50000V 2.5V VEPS
Max Volt Pedal: chan2 max
signal voltage
11 Dual Chan2 Sig Diag Dual Channel Analog 0 - 50000V .35V VEPS
Min Volt Pedal: chan2 min
signal voltage
11 Accel Pedal Type Accel Pedal Type 0 = None 6 VEPS

1 = PWM Throttle
2 = Analog Pedal
Type1
3 = Analog Pedal
Type2
4 = Analog Pedal
Type3
5 = FUSO Analog
Pedal
6 = Williams Dual-
Channel Analog
Pedal
7 = ABE Pedal
(PWM)
Power Take-Off (PTO)

Power Take-off (PTO) control is available to fuel the engine in order to keep the selected PTO speed regardless of engine
torque without driver interaction. The engine torque cannot exceed a programmed limit.
The PTO throttle control options are:
• Cab PTO – Cruise Switch PTO
• Remote PTO – Preprogrammed Set Speeds
• Remote Accelerator Control
Cab PTO— (options 1–4) Turn on the Master Cruise switch which allows RPM capture by the use of the Cruise switches
(subject to Clean Idle shutdown/limits).
Remote PTO— (options 1–4) Three different programmable modes:
• Turn on the Remote PTO switch (which grounds pin 2/9) and ramp PTO set speed (up to three programmable speeds) by
toggling Remote PTO switch.
• Optional second and third Remote PTO switches may be used for Gray Coded or Binary Coded switch pulsing mode.
• Activating Remote PTO switch (which grounds pin 2/9) and Remote Throttle Select switch (which grounds pin 2/8) allows
for RPM adjustment with the remote device only. This will override Cab pedal and PTO set speeds.
Remote PTO is not subject to Clean Idle shutdown/limit.
Mobile PTO— (option 5) Same function as Cab PTO but no neutral/gear restriction. (Subject to Clean Idle shutdown/limits).

8 Features
Cruise PTO— (option 6) Option 6 enables the Cruise PTO functionality with pin 2/9 grounded and requires the Park Brake
to be applied. The Cruise Control switches are used to activate and control the Cruise Switch PTO option.
Remote PTO— (Ground Pins 2/8 and 2/9) Remote PTO is enabled and can exceed the 900 RPM limit without a shutdown
requirement.
Fast Idle— (Ground Pin 2/9)
• Remote PTO Speed Selection Mode = Pulsed Input. Allows for up to three fast idle speeds
• Remote PTO Speed Selection Mode = Gray coded or binary coded option. Allows for up to three fast idle speeds by
grounding pins 1/11 and 2/11.
Cruise Switches— (Ground Pin 2/9) Config PTO Speed Control = 6 (options 0-4 will not work). Set/Coast or Resume/Accel
can be used to increase/decrease the engine speed.
See the following figure for a diagram of PTO logic.
Figure 73. PTO Logic

Cab PTO – Cruise Switch PTO
The Cruise Control switches are used to activate and control the Cruise Switch PTO (Cab PTO) option. See the following
figure. Cab PTO option will function with either cab throttle or remote throttle enabled.
NOTE: Cab throttle and remote throttle can be overridden with the accelerator pedal unless PTO Remote Throt
Override Mode is disabled.

Figure 74. Cab PTO Mode

The Cruise On/Off switch must be turned ON and the park brake must be engaged (if configured). If Cruise Switch PTO is
inactive and the Cruise Switch PTO conditions are met, pressing and releasing the Resume/Accel Switch will activate Cruise
Switch PTO at the resume PTO speed (Resume Accel Switch PTO Set Speed). Pressing and releasing the Set/Coast Switch
will activate Cruise Switch PTO at the set PTO speed (Set Coast Switch PTO Set Speed). The Resume PTO Speed and the
Set PTO Speed cannot be greater than the PTO maximum speed (Max PTO Spd Resume Accel Sw) or lower than the PTO
minimum speed (Min PTO Spd Set Coast Sw).
Once the PTO set speed is established, the Resume/Accel Switch can be used to increment the set speed at a programmable
rate up to the maximum PTO speed (Max PTO Spd Resume Accel Sw). Releasing the Resume/Accel Switch will set the
engine speed at the current operating speed.
The Set/Coast Switch will decrement the set speed at a programmable rate, down to the minimum PTO speed (Min PTO Spd
Set Coast Sw). Releasing the Set/Coast Switch will set the engine speed at the current operating speed.
Cab PTO speed is disabled for any of the following:
• Turning the Cruise Master Switch off
• Vehicle speed is greater than "Max Road Speed in PTO Mode" [programmable – default 10 km/h (6.2 mph)]
• Whenever the limit for the maximum road speed limit in PTO overlaps with the minimum road speed limit for CC, Cruise
PTO is disabled
• VSS fault
• Park Brake is off (if configured)
• Park Brake or Service Brake Applied (PTO Dropout Serv Brk Prk Brk)

8 Features
• Clutch Pedal is pressed (PTO Dropout or Clutch Enabled)

• Cruise Switch Fault
• Optimized Idle is Active
• Clean Idle Limiting Feature inhibiting Cab PTO mode
• Parked Regeneration feature inhibits PTO mode
If PTO Throttle Override is disabled, the throttle pedal can override the PTO engine speed up to the maximum engine speed
for Throttle Override (Throttle Override Max Engine Spd). The previous PTO set speed will become active again, if it is
greater than the engine speed equivalent to the throttle pedal percentage.
DDEC13 will exit the Cab PTO Mode for Automated/Automatic Transmissions for the following:
• Shift in Progress message received over J1939
• Valid TSC1 command received from the transmission
• Transmission in gear (selected gear or current gear)
Programming Requirements & Flexibility (Cruise Switch PTO)
The digital inputs, listed in the following table, are required for Cruise Switch PTO.

Table 283.
Cruise Switch PTO Digital Inputs
13 Service Brake Switch 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS

Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
4 = Ebc1 (SPN 1121)
5 = J1939 PROP6 (T4PP
Cab only)
13 CC On Off Switch Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS

1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
13 CC Set Cst Res Accel Sw 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS

Config 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
13 Clutch Switch Config 0 = No Clutch Switch 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS

1 = 1 Clutch Switch
2 = 2 Clutch Switch
3 = CCVS1
4 = CCVS2
5 = CCVS3
6 = ETC1
info via PTCan
13 1 02 DI Selection 0 = Disabled 1 = Enable Park Brake VEPS, DDRS

1 = Enable Park Brake Interlock
Interlock
13 Park Brake Switch Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS

1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
13 Trans Neutral Input Config 0 = Hardwired 0 = Hardwired VEPS, DDRS

1 = ETC2
2 = ETC5
255 = Not Available
The Cruise Switch PTO parameters are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 284.
Cruise Switch PTO Parameters
7 Config PTO Speed Enables/disables the 0 = Disabled 3 = Cab/Remote PTO DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Control PTO function 1 = Enabled Enabled if neutral VEPS
2 = Cab/Remote PTO and Park Brake
Enabled if neutral
3 = Cab/Remote PTO
Enabled if neutral
and Park Brake
4 = Cab/Remote PTO
Enabled if Park Brake
5 = Cab PTO while
driving
6 = Cruise PTO with
Park Brake
7 = Cab/Remote PTO
While Driving
7 Max PTO Spd Sets the max PTO 500 - 3000 rpm 1200 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Resume Accel Sw speed VEPS
7 Min PTO Spd Set Sets the min PTO 500 - 3000 rpm 700 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Coast Sw speed VEPS
7 PTO Accel Pedal Enables/disables the 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Override Mode throttle pedal from 1 = Always On VEPS
overriding PTO mode 2 = Only at Speed #0
7 Throttle Override Max Sets the max engine 0 - 3000 rpm 1400 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Eng Spd speed that the throttle VEPS
can obtain when in
PTO mode
7 PTO Dropout Serv Enables/Disables the 0 = No PTO dropout 0 = No PTO dropout DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Brk Prk Brk status of the Service with Service Brake or with Service Brake or VEPS
Brake or Park Brake Park Brake activation Park Brake activation
for disabling of PTO 1 = Causes PTO to
drop out on Service
Brake or Park Brake
activation
2 = Drop out on
Service Brake
activation
3 = Drop out on Park
Brake activation
7 PTO Dropout on Enables/Disables the 0 = No PTO dropout 0 = No PTO dropout DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Clutch Enabled status of the Clutch with clutch pedal with clutch pedal VEPS
Switch for disabling 1 = Causes PTO to
of PTO dropout if the clutch
is being depressed
7 Max Road Speed in Sets the max vehicle 0 - 128 km/h (0 - 79.5 10 km/h (6.2 mph) DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
PTO Mode speed over which mph) VEPS
PTO is disabled

Cruise Switch PTO Parameters
7 Set Coast Switch Sets the initial speed 0 - 3000 rpm 500 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
PTO Set Speed when the Set/Coast VEPS
Switch is used to
enable Cab PTO
7 Set Coast Max PTO Sets the max engine 0 - 5000 N·m (3687.8 5000 N·m (3687.8 DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Torque torque that becomes lb·ft) lb·ft) VEPS
active once the Set/
Coast Switch is
activated
7 Resume Accel Sw Sets the initial speed 0 - 3000 rpm 500 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
PTO Set Spd when the Resume/ VEPS
Accel Switch is used
to enable Cab PTO
7 Resume Accel Max Sets the max engine 0 - 5000 N·m (3687.8 5000 N·m (3687.8 DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
PTO Torque torque that becomes lb·ft) lb·ft) VEPS
active once the
Resume/Accel Switch
is activated
7 PTO Ramp Rate Sets the rate of 25 – 2500 rpm/sec. 250 rpm/sec. DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
increase or decrease VEPS
7 PTO Cab Switches Allows switch control 0 = Always On 0 = Always On DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Mode options 1 = Disabled VEPS
2 = Only at speed #0
PTO Dosing Feature

PTO Dosing Feature enables Active Regeneration in PTO Mode. Active Regeneration is a DDEC feature that does not
require operator input. PTO Dosing Feature is used on certain applications only, for example, fire truck. Fast idle operation of
the engine to provide heat or cooling of the chassis typically does not generate sufficient load to support PTO dosing.
Certain vehicles will initiate an Active Regeneration in PTO Mode if the following conditions are met:
• Factory programming application for PTO Dosing is enabled (not adjustable).
• Minimum engine speed of 1000 RPM.
• Engine torque load - typically 20-25% engine load.
• DOC Inlet Temperature is greater than 280°C (536°F) in Regen mode.
• Ambient conditions such as extreme heat/cold will have an effect on exhaust temps and can affect the regen capabilities in
this mode.
The application code is programmed at the time of new vehicle order. Vehicles already delivered may have the PTO Dosing
Feature enabled by contacting Detroit™ Customer Support Center at 800-445-1980 or by e-mail at csc@daimler.com for
application code change. It is recommended that the dealer or distributor review a log file of a normal customer duty cycle to
ensure PTO dosing will fulfill the customer’s needs.
Before PTO Dosing initiates, make certain that the exhaust outlets are directed away from structures, trees, vegetation,
flammable materials, and anything else that may be damaged or injured by prolonged exposure to high heat. (This could be at
any PTO event, as PTO Dosing runs off triggers and has no input from driver under normal operating conditions).
This feature must be ordered or set by the Detroit™ Customer Support Center.
Remote PTO — Preprogrammed Set Speeds

The Remote PTO will override the Cab PTO mode when the Remote PTO Switch input on the CPC4 (2/9) is grounded. The
throttle pedal will override Remote PTO if "PTO Remote Throt Override Mode" is disabled.

8 Features
Remote PTO speed is disabled for any of the following:

• Turning the Remote PTO switch off for more than two seconds
• Vehicle speed is greater than Max Vehicle Speed in PTO [programmable - default 10 km/h (6.2 mph)]
• VSS fault
• Clutch Released Pedal or Service Brake Pedal are pressed (if configured)
• Park Brake is OFF (if configured)
• Park Brake or Service Brake is applied (PTO Dropout Serv Brk Prk Brk)
• Cruise Switch fault
• Clutch Pedal is pressed (PTO dropout on clutch enabled)
• Optimized Idle is active
• PTO While Driving option is programmed
If "PTO Remote Throt Override Mode" is disabled, the throttle pedal can override the PTO Engine speed up to the Maximum
Engine Speed for Throttle Override. If the throttle pedal or remote throttle engine speed is less than current PTO engine
speed, the engine will not respond to throttle requests less than the current PTO engine set speed. The previous PTO set speed
will become active again, if it is greater than the engine speed equivalent to the throttle pedal percentage.
NOTE: If remote PTO is active and then disabled due to one or more disabling conditions, PTO mode will
automatically reactivate when the disabling condition is removed.
There are three options using preprogrammed set speeds:

• Pulsed Input using pin 2/9
• Gray-Coded using pins 2/9, 1/11, 2/11
• Binary-Coded using pins 2/9, 1/11, 2/11
Pulsed Input Using Pin 2/9
Between one and three preset speeds can be set via "No of Speeds via Remote PTO" The first speed is selected by toggling
2/9 ON. The second speed is selected by toggling 2.9 OFF and ON within two seconds. The third speed is selected by
toggling 2.9 OFF and ON within two seconds.
Remote PTO speed is disabled for any of the following:
• Turning the Remote PTO switch off for more than two seconds
• Vehicle speed is greater than Max Road Speed in PTO Mode [programmable - default 9.6 km/h (6 mph)]
• VSS fault
• Clutch Released Pedal or Service Brake Pedal are pressed (if configured)
• Park Brake is OFF (if configured)
• Park Brake or Service Brake is applied (PTO Dropout Serv Brk Prk Brk)
• Cruise Switch fault
• Clutch Pedal is pressed (PTO dropout on clutch enabled)
• Optimized Idle is active
NOTE: If remote PTO is active and then disabled due to one or more disabling conditions, Remote PTO mode will
automatically reactivate when the disabling condition is removed.
See the following figure for a diagram of Remote PTO Mode.

Figure 75. Remote PTO Mode - Pulsed Input Using Pin 2/9
Installation
The Remote PTO Switch is wired to pin 2/9 of the CPC4. See the following figure.
Figure 76. Remote PTO Switch

Gray-Coded Using Pins 2/9, 1/11, 2/11 and Binary-Coded

8 Features
Gray Coded – In this mode, the engine speed set-point is received directly from two digital input pins (LIM0 AND LIM1) on
the CPC4. These digital inputs are used to read the status of the two remote PTO switches fitted to the vehicle. The inputs are
usually sent to the CPC4 from a separate control unit hardwired directly to the CPC4.
Gray code mode is the recommended interface for remote speed selection. Gray code mode has the advantage that only one
switch changes for one set-point select to the next, thus alleviating the problem of switch bounce and non-synchronous
switching. The coded inputs are listed in the following table:
Table 285.
Gray Coded Inputs
Remote PTO Enable Input (2/9) LIM0 (1/11) LIM1 (2/11) Speed Selection
OFF (Open) Don’t Care Don’t Care v Remote PTO OFF
ON (Ground) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) Remote PTO OFF
ON (Ground) ON (Ground) OFF (Open) Remote PTO Speed 1
ON (Ground) ON (Ground) ON (Ground) Remote PTO Speed 2
ON (Ground) OFF (Open) ON (Ground) Remote PTO Speed 3
Binary Coded – This interfacing method is designed for devices which are not capable of generating "Gray Code"and uses
the same two digital input signals (LIM0 AND LIM1). As mentioned previously, this method has a disadvantage. When
switching from speed 1 to speed 2 or from speed 3 to OFF two bits must toggle synchronously. When the contacts bounce (as
the usually do), an undesired speed set-point could be requested briefly. The preset speeds are selected with pin 1/11 and 2/11
as listed in the following table:
Table 286.
Binary Inputs
Remote PTO Enable Input (2/9) LIM0 (1/11) LIM1 (2/11) Speed Selection
OFF (Open) Don’t Care Don’t Care Remote PTO OFF
ON (Ground) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) Remote PTO OFF
ON (Ground) ON (Ground) OFF (Open) Remote PTO Speed 1
ON (Ground) OFF (Open) ON (Ground) Remote PTO Speed 2
ON (Ground) ON (Ground) ON (Ground) Remote PTO Speed 3
Installation for Gray Coded or Binary Input

See the following figure for the wiring of gray coded or binary input:

Figure 77. Remote PTO Gray Coded or Binary Input

Programming Requirements & Flexibility (Remote PTO)
The Remote PTO parameters are listed in the following table:
Table 287.
Remote PTO Parameters
13 2 08 DI Selection Enables Remote 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled DDRS, VEPS

Throttle Select Input 1 = Remote-Throttle
enable
Up Switch
3 = Evobus retarder
lever stage3
7 PTO Remote Throt Enables/disables the 0 = Disable 1 = Always On DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Override Mode throttle pedal from 1 = Always On VEPS
overriding PTO mode 2 = Only at Speed #0
7 Throttle Override Max Sets the max engine 0 – 3000 rpm 1400 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Eng Spd speed that the throttle VEPS
can obtain when in
PTO mode
13 2 09 DI Selection Configures Remote 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled DDRS, VEPS

Throttle Select Input 1 = Hardwired PTO
2 = J1939 PTO
7 Max Road Speed in Sets the max vehicle 0 - 128 km/h (0 - 79.5 9.6 km/h (6 mph) DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
PTO Mode speed over which mph) VEPS
PTO is disabled

8 Features
Remote PTO Parameters
7 PTO Ramp Rate Sets the rate of 25 - 2500 rpm/sec. 250 rpm/sec. DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
increase or decrease VEPS
when in PTO mode
7 No of Speeds via Sets the number of 1 to 3 1 DDDL 7.X, DDRS,

Remote PTO remote PTO speeds VEPS
that can be enabled
7 Spd 1 via Remote Sets the PTO #1 set 464 - 3000 rpm 900 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
PTO speed VEPS
7 Spd 1 Max Eng Trq Sets the max engine 0 - 5000 N·m (3687.8 5000 N·m (3687.8 DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Remote PTO torque for PTO lb·ft) lb·ft) VEPS
Speed #1
7 Spd 2 via Remote #2 PTO set speed 500 - 3000 rpm 1250 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
PTO VEPS
Speed #2
7 Spd 3 via Remote #3 PTO set speed 500 - 3000 rpm 1850 rpm DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
PTO VEPS
Speed #3
7 Remote PTO Spd Sets the PTO speed 0 = 1 pulsed input 0 = 1 pulsed input DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Selection Mode selection mode (Rem PTO) (Rem PTO) VEPS
1 = 2 gray coded
inputs (PTO)
2 = 2 binary coded
inputs (PTO)
20 Remote Accelerator Enable pin 314 for 0 = Remote AP 0 = Remote AP DDRS, VEPS
Enable remote throttle disabled disabled
1 = Remote AP
without IVS (idle
validation switches)
2 = Remote AP with
1 IVS
3 = Remote AP with
2 IVS
4 = Remote AP PWM
single channel on
FPO1 or FPO2
Remote Accelerator Control for PTO or ALSG

A Remote Accelerator Pedal can be installed to control either an analog Remote PTO (PTO) or analog Remote Accelerator
Pedal (ALSG).
The Remote PTO will start when the Remote PTO switch (CPC4, 2/9) is switched to battery ground. The Remote PTO logic
will override the Cab PTO.
The Remote Throttle Select Switch input (CPC4, 2/8) determines the active throttle control. When this pin is grounded, the
engine will respond to the remote throttle input. When this input is not grounded, the engine will respond to the cab throttle
pedal.

The PTO Enable input (CPC4, 2/9) determines if the engine will be in PTO or ALSG mode. If remote PTO is active and then
disabled due to one or more disabling condition, PTO mode will automatically reactivate when the disabling condition is
removed.
Remote Accelerator Control Example
Example:If a remote throttle is required to work from idle to rated speed, the parameters, listed in the following table, must
be set.
Table 288.
Remote Accelerator Control Parameter Settings
Parameter Set To
PTO Remote Throt Override Mode 1 = always On
Spd 1 Via Remote PTO Idle
Max PTO Spd Resume Accel Sw Rated (or highest RPM for the engine)
Installation
See the following figure for installation of a Remote Accelerator Control for PTO or ALSG.
Figure 78. Remote Accelerator Control for PTO or ALSG

Split-Shaft Applications
For split-shaft applications where the transmission is in gear with the PTO, the following parameter must be set:

8 Features
Table 289.
Split-Shaft Applications
7 Max Road Speed in 0 km/h (mph) 0 to 128 km/h (0 to 9.6 km/h (6 mph) DDRS, VEPS, DDDL
PTO Mode 79.5 mph) 7.X
RPM Freeze
When the RPM Freeze switch is ON (grounded), the current engine speed is maintained. The speed is held until the switch is
turned OFF or PTO mode is deactivated.
The options for RPM Freeze are listed in the following table:
Table 290.
RPM Freeze Programming Options
13 4 18 DI Selection 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS

1 = Enable Crank Inhibit
2 = Enable Engine Hood
(Optimized Idle)
3 = Not Used
4 = RPM Freeze
6 = Fast Engine Heat Up
Switch
7 = Service Brake active
Engine Brake Lockout
9 = Maneuver Mode
10 = Torque Curve
Selection, Bit 1
01 J1939 TSC1 RPM Freeze 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled VEPS, DDRS

Enable 1 = Enabled
8.27 Transmission Interface

DDEC 13 can be interfaced to manual or automatic/automated transmission over the J1939 data link.
Manual Transmissions
The interface for manual transmissions is provided through the J1939 data link.
The options for manual transmissions are listed in the following table:

Table 291.
Manual Transmission Options
2 Transmission Type DIRECT ENGINE START

0 = Manual, without Neutral Switch
MCM2.1 ENGINE START
3 = Manual, with Neutral Switch
10 Eng Brk Drvline Clsd Min Speed 1100
13 Clutch Switch Config 1 = 1 Clutch Switch
13 4 08 DI Selection 1 = Clutch Switch
13 Trans Neutral Input Config Optional

0 = Hardwired
255 = Not Available
48 Mechanical Transmission Type 1 = Unsynchronized Gearbox
NOTE: Engine Speed limiting (other than at standstill) is disabled with AMT transmissions. Progressive shift can
be used as a countermeasure for RPM limiting.
Allison Transmission
Low Range Torque Protection (LRTP) is an Allison feature supported by DDEC 13. If enabled (Trans-Torque-Limit Enable),
the CPC4 expects the TCFG2 J1939 message. A fault will be logged if the message is not received. The parameters, listed in
the following table, must be set for the Allison transmission.
Table 292.
Allison Transmission Parameters
2 Transmission Type DIRECT ENGINE START

2 = Allison, Eaton Ultrashift/Ultrashift ASW,
Autoshift, ZF ASTronic, AGS2 without ETC2
MCM2.1 ENGINE START
6 = Allison, Eaton Ultrashift ASW: MCM start
13 4 08 DI Selection 0 = Disabled

2 = ETC5
8 Vehicle Speed Sensor 3 = J1939 (ETC1)
3 Max Adjusted Idle Speed less than 800 rpm
3 Trans Torque Limit Enable 1 = Enabled
3 Idle Configuration for Limiter Inputs 0 = Disabled

3 = Enable if Neutral and Park Brake
10 Eng Brk Drvline Clsd Spd 950 rpm
10 Min Eng Spd for Engine Brakes 1100 rpm

8 Features
Allison Transmission Parameters
23 AL Conditions 1 = No AL During Shift
6 Fast Idle Spd Air Cond Input ≤800 rpm
3 Min Engine Speed ≤800 rpm
MCM2.1 Trans Limp Home Mode 1 = Automatic

4
48 Mechanical Transmission Type 3 = Automatic Transmission
Eaton Ultrashift Plus Transmission

The parameters listed in the following table must be set for the Eaton Ultrashift PLUS® transmission.
Table 293.
Eaton UltraShift PLUS Transmission Parameters
2 Transmission Type 8 = Eaton UltraShift PLUS
5 Limiter0 Max Eng Speed Enabled ≥ 2000 rpm
5 Limiter1 Max Eng Speed Enabled ≥ 2000 rpm
7 Config PTO Speed Control 0 = Disabled

3 = Cab/Remote PTO Enabled if Neutral and
Park Brake
8 Vehicle Speed Sensor 3 = J1939 ETC1
10 Eng Brk Drvline Clsd Min Spd 800 rpm
10 Min Eng Spd for Engine Brakes 1100 rpm
13 4 08 DI Selection 0 = Disabled

2 = ETC5
15 Enable Cruise Auto Resume 3 = Resume AMT Style
MCM2.1 Trans Limp Home Mode 1 = Automatic

4
48 Mechanical Transmission Type 1 = Unsynchronized Gearbox
8.28 Vehicle Speed Limiting

A Vehicle Speed Sensor is necessary for the Vehicle Speed Limiting feature.
Operation
Vehicle Speed Limiting discontinues engine fueling at any vehicle speed above the programmed limit. The CPC4 stops
fueling when maximum vehicle speed is reached. If the Limiter 0 Switch is OFF, the Maximum Road Speed Limit will be the
limit for the road speed. If the Limiter 0 Switch is ON, the Alternate Speed Limiter (Limiter 0) Speed will be the limit for the
road speed. Setting any of the limits to the maximum value will disable that road speed limit.
VSS Diagnostic Limits

There are two faults that can be enabled to log a fault while the engine is fueling and a vehicle speed is exceeded and when
the engine is not fueling and a vehicle speed is exceeded.
Installation
An OEM supplied Vehicle Speed Sensor or output shaft speed over the SAE J1939 Data Link is required. If the Limiter 0
switch is required, it is wired to CPC4 pin 1/11. This is a normally open switch.

The Vehicle Speed Limit parameters are listed in the following table:
Table 294.
Vehicle Speed Limiting Parameters
3 Max Road Speed Maximum vehicle 10 – 152 km/h (6.2 - 100 km/h (62.1 mph) VEPS, DDRS or
speed. Alternate 94.5 mph) DDDL 7.X
Road Speed Limiter 0
cannot exceed this
speed.
5 Limiter0 Max Road Maximum vehicle 0 – 152 km/h (0 - 152 km/h (94.4 mph) VEPS, DDRS or
Spd Enabled speed when CPC4 94.5 mph) DDDL 7.X
pin 1/11 is connected
to ground.
5 Limiter1 Max Road Maximum vehicle 0 – 152 km/h (0 - 152 km/h (94.4 mph) VEPS, DDRS or
Spd Enabled speed when CPC4 94.5 mph) DDDL 7.X
pin 2/11 is connected
to ground.
8 VSS Driving Vehicle speed over 0 – 200 km/h (0 - 160 km/h (99.4 mph) VEPS, DDRS or
Diagnostic Limit limit while engine is 124.3 mph) DDDL 7.X
fueling.
8 VSS Absolute Vehicle speed over 0 – 200 km/h (0 - 160 km/h (99.4 mph) VEPS, DDRS or
Diagnostic Limit limit while engine is 124.3 mph) DDDL 7.X
not fueling.
For more information on limiters, Refer to section "Limiters".
Global Road Speed Limit

The new Global Road Speed Limit Feature is a general absolute road speed limit which does not allow for any offsets or
incentives to increase the road speed beyond a preset limit and is required by law in certain areas (e.g. Ontario, Canada).
When the CPC software is programmed it will limit vehicle speed to the value programmed or a maximum of 152 km/h (94.4
mph). Absolute Maximum Road Speed limit cannot be exceeded nor overridden.
EXAMPLE: With the RSL set to 90km/h and the Absolute road speed limit to 93km/h,
• If FEI adds 10km/h the vehicle speed is limited to 93km/h
• If CDR adds 10km/h the vehicle speed is limited to 93km/h
• If Passmart adds 10km/h the vehicle speed is limited to 93km/h
• If cruise set speed is enabled to exceed RSL and CC max V-speed limit is set to 100km/h the vehicle speed is limited to
93km/h
• Different combinations of the above are possible, except Absolute road speed remains limited to 93km/h
The Global Road Speed Limit parameters are listed in the table below:

8 Features
Table 295.
23 Absolute Max V- Absolute Maximum 10 - 152 km/h (6.3 - 152 km/h (94.4 mph) DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
Speed Road Speed limit 94.4 mph) VEPS
03 Max Road Speed Maximum road speed 10 - 152 km/h (6.3 - 100 km/h (62.1 mph) DDDL 7.X, DDRS,
(legal) 94.4 mph) VEPS

The Cruise Control maximum set speed cannot exceed the Vehicle Speed Limit.
When Vehicle Speed Limiting is enabled and a VSS code is logged, the engine speed in all gears will be limited for the
duration of the ignition cycle to engine speed at the Vehicle Speed Limit in top gear.
NOTE: Due to VSS signal quality at low speeds, it is recommended that the vehicle speed limit not be set below a
minimum of 48 kph to insure smooth road speed limiting. DDC cannot guarantee smooth speed limiting for
maximum speeds set below 48 kph.
8.29 Vehicle Speed Sensor Anti-Tampering

VSS Anti-tampering can be used to detect fixed frequency oscillators or devices which track engine rpm and produce fewer
pulses per revolution than a VSS wheel. These devices are used to trick the CPC4 into believing that vehicle speed is low.
A VSS fault will be logged if the sensor appears to be working improperly but the vehicle speed is not zero. The engine speed
in all gears will be limited for the duration of the ignition cycle to the engine speed at the Vehicle Speed Limit in top gear.
This feature should only be enabled on installations with manual transmissions where a Vehicle Speed Sensor is wired
directly to the CPC4.
NOTE: Do Not use VSS anti-tampering with SAE J1939, automatic, semi-automatic, or torque converter
transmissions.

Vehicle Speed Limiting must also be enabled. The parameters are listed in the following table:

Table 296.
VSS Anti-tampering Parameters
8 Anti Tamper 0 = Disabled 0 = Disabled DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS

1 = Enable
8 Vehicle Speed Sensor 0 = No Sensor 4 = Magnetic Pickup DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS
1 = C3 Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor
2 = Square Wave (push
pull)
3 = J1939 (ETC1)
4 = Magnetic Pickup
Vehicle Speed Sensor
5 = J1939 (TCO)
6 = J1939 (CCVS) Source
1
2
3
9 = Square Wave (open
collector)
10 = Output Shaft Speed
from Transmission (PT-
Can)
11 = Square Wave for
Optimized Idle (Hall
Sensor)
8 Axle Ratio 1.00 to 20.00 4.33 DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS
8 Number of Output Shaft 0 - 250 16 DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS

Teeth
8 Tire Revs per Unit 160 to 1599 /km 313/km (504/mile) DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS
Distance
8 Top Gear Ratio 0.1 to 2.55 0.74 DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS
8 Second Highest Gear 0 to 5.75 1 DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS

Ratio
8.30 Vehicle Speed Signal Evaluation in Case of Split Gear PTO

VSS Evaluation in Case of Split Gear PTO is a feature that exists beginning with CPC4 R33 software. This feature prevents
the vehicle odometer from accruing miles, the speedometer from displaying a false road speed, and undesired warning buzzer
operation while the PTO is engaged and the vehicle is not moving (Road Speed = 0). For this feature to be active, the
following conditions must be met:
• Park Brake is applied
• Remote PTO is active
• ABS front wheel speed < 5 km/h (3.1 mph) only if EBC2 was received this ignition cycle - (ABS-equipped vehicle only)

VSS Evaluation in Case of Split Gear PTO must be enabled. The parameters are listed in the following table:

8 Features
Table 297.
Vehicle Speed Signal Evaluation in Case of Split Gear PTO
Parameter Options Required/ Access

Parameter Group
Recommended Settings
Config PTO Speed 0 = Disabled 4 = Cab/Remote PTO DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS
Control 1 = Cab/Remote PTO enabled if park brake
enabled 6 = Cruise PTO with park
2 = Cab/Remote PTO brake
enable if neutral
3 = Cab/Remote PTO
enabled if neutral and
7 park brake
4 = Cab/Remote PTO
enabled if park brake
5 = Cab PTO while driving
6 = Cruise PTO with park
brake
7 = Cab/Remote PTO
while driving
Max Road Speed in PTO 0 to 128 km/h (0 to 79.5 0 km/h (mph) DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS
7
Mode mph)
Vspeed Eval Split Gear 0 = Vspeed evaluation 1 = Set Vspeed to 0 DDDL 7.X, VEPS, DDRS
8
PTO 1 = Set Vspeed to 0

9 Communication Protocols
9.1 Communication Protocols - Overview

The key component of the DDEC 13 system is the serial communication link SAE J1939. Using this communication link
allows the following functionality:
• Transmitting sensor information via the data link at regular intervals and/or upon request to obtain data and to monitor for
failures
• Sharing information between stand-alone modules used in the system via the data link
• Sharing engine data with electronic dashboard displays and vehicle management information systems via the data link
• Transmitting and performing diagnostic procedures from external instrumentation such as the hand-held diagnostic data
readers or DDDL via the data link
• Transmitting customer requested changes to the CPC4 from external instrumentation via the data link
• Transmitting to the powertrain the messages assigned to both the engine and the transmission retarder
The following industry standard Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) documents can be used as a reference:
• SAE J1708, Serial Data Communications Between Microcomputer Systems In Heavy Duty Vehicle Applications
• SAE J1939/71, Vehicle Application Layer
• SAE J1939, Top Layer (Overview)
• SAE J1939/01, Truck and Bus Applications
• SAE J1939/11, Physical Layer
• SAE J1939/21, Data Link Layer
• SAE J1939/73, Application Layer Diagnostics
To obtain a copy of the above documents contact the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).
Table 298.
SAE International
400 Commonwealth Drive
Warrendale, PA 15096
Attention: Publications
Phone: (412) 776-4970
www.sae.org
SAE J1939 Messages and Message Format

J1939 (+), J1939 (-), and J1939 Shield are used as the J1939 communication link.
The message format uses the parameter group number as the label for a group of parameters. Each of the parameters within
the group can be expressed in ASCII, as scaled data, or as function states consisting of one or more Bits. Alphanumeric data
will be transmitted with the most significant byte first. Other parameters consisting of two or more data bytes shall be
transmitted least significant byte first. The type of data is also identified for each parameter.
The following sections identify the parameters that are supported by DDEC 13.
The J1939 source address can be set for various components as listed in the following table.

Table 299.
J1939 Source Address
1 EBC1 Source Address 0 – 255 33 VEPS, DDRS

SAE J1939
1 TSC1 Source Address 0 – 255 231 VEPS, DDRS

SAE J1939
1 CC1 Source Address SAE 0 – 255 23 VEPS, DDRS

J1939

J1939

J1939
1 CM1 DPF Source Addr 0 – 255 49 VEPS, DDRS

SAE J1939
1 CM1 Fan Source Addr1 0 – 255 25 VEPS, DDRS

SAE J1939
1 CM1 Fan Source Addr2 0 – 255 49 VEPS, DDRS

SAE J1939
Table 300.
ACM2.1 Address J1939 Messages
PGN (dec) Message Name Acronym
From SA61 (ACM2.1):
61454 Aftertreatment 1 Intake Gas 1 AT1IG1
64948 Aftertreatment 1 Intake Gas 2 AT1IG2
64946 Aftertreatment 1 Intermediate Gas AT1IMG
64908 Aftertreatment 1 Gas Parameters AT1GP
61455 Aftertreatment 1 Outlet Gas 1 AT1OG1
64923 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid A1DEFI

Information
64828 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Supply A1DEFSI

Information
61475 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Dosing System A1SCRDSI1

Information 1
64833 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Dosing System A1SCRDSI2

Information 2

Table 301.
MCM2.1 Address J1939 Messages
From SA1 (MCM2.1):
65194 Alternate Fuel 2 AF2
64929 Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Control 1 AT1FC1
64869 Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Control 2 AT1FC2
64981 Electronic Engine Controller 5 EEC5
65243 Engine Fluid Level/Pressure 2 EFL/P2
64938 Engine Fluid Level/Pressure 4 EFL/P4
61450 Engine Gas Flow Rate EGF1
65170 Engine Information EI
65129 Engine Temperature 3 ET3
64870 Engine Temperature 4 ET4
61466 Engine Throttle / Fuel Actuator Control TFAC

Command
64976 Inlet/Exhaust Conditions 2 IC2
65244 Idle Operation IO
65154 Ignition Timing 1 IT1
65178 Turbocharger Information 2 TCI2
65245 Turbocharger TC
Table 302.
SAE J1939 Supported Incoming CPC4 Messages
PGN (dec) PGN (hex) Message Name Acronym
65135 FE6F Adaptive Cruise Control ACC1
60928 EE00 Request For Address Claimed ACL
61183 EEFF Address Claimed ACL
65269 FEF5 Ambient Conditions AMB
65265 FEF1 Cruise Control Vehicle Speed CCVS
57344 E000 Cab Message #1 CM1
65226 FECA Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes DM1

SAE J1939 Supported Incoming CPC4 Messages
65235 FED3 Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset for DM11

active DTC’s
57088 DF00 Stop Start Broadcast DM13
65228 FECC Diagnostic Data Clear DM3
61441 F001 Electronic Brake Controller #1 EBC1
65215 FEBF Wheel Speed Information EBC2
61443 F003 Electronic Engine Controller #2 EEC2
61440 F000 Electronic Retarder Controller #1 ERC1
65281 FF02 Engine Start Stop (Daimler Prop) ESS (Prop02)
61442 F002 Electronic Transmission ETC1

Controller #1
61445 F005 Electronic Transmission ETC2

Controller #2
65098 FE4A Electronic Transmission ETC7

Controller #7
55809 DB00 UDS Functional ISO15765_Funct
55808 DA00 UDS Physical ISO15765_Phys
61184 EF00 Proprietary XCP PropA
65280 FF00 Proprietary UDE PropB00
65530 FFFA Proprietary Malaysian H/W Test PropB00
65283 FF03 Proprietary message KWP PropB03

Gateway
65297 FF11 Proprietary message for FUSO PropB11
65313 FF21 Proprietary message SAM CAB PropB21

A1
65314 FF22 Proprietary message SAM CAB PropB22

A2
65316 FF24 Proprietary message for FUSO PropB24
65380 FF64 Proprietary message for PropB64

Predictive CC
65381 FF65 Proprietary message for PropB65

Predictive CC
65264 FEF0 Power Takeoff Information PTO
65275 FEFB Retarder Fluids RF
59904 EA00 Request PGN RQST
65099 FE4B Transmission Configuration #2 TCFG2
65132 FE6C Tachograph #1 TCO1
0 0 Torque Speed Control #1 TSC1
65103 FEF4 Vehicle Dynamic Stability Control VDC1

1

Table 303.
SAE J1939 Supported Outgoing CPC4 Messages
65135 FE6F Adaptive Cruise Control #1 ACC1
60928 EE00 Request For Address Claimed ACL
59392 E800 Ack/Nack ACK/NACK
61183 EEFF Address Claimed ACL
61183 EEFF Cannot Claim Address ACL
64912 FD90 Advertised Engine Torque Curve AETC
65269 FEF5 Ambient Conditions AMB
64947 FDB3 Aftertreatment Outlet Gas #2 AT1OG2
64929 FDA1 Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Control 1 AT1FC1
64869 FD65 Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Control 2 AT1FC2
64920 FD98 Aftertreatment 1 Historical AT1HI

Information
61454 F003 Aftertreatment 1 Intake Gas 1 AT1IG1
65110 FE56 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Tank 1 AT1T11

Inform
64923 FD9B Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust A1DEFI

Fluid Information
64828 FD3C Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust A1DEFSI

Fluid Supply Information
61475 F023 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Dosing A1SCRDSI1

System Information 1
64833 FD41 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Dosing A1SCRDSI2

System Information 2
65261 FEED Cruise Control/Vehicle Speed CCSS

Setup
65266 FEF1 Cruise Control/Vehicle Speed CCVS
65259 FEEB Component Identification CI
57344 E000 Cab Message #1 CM1
64775 FD07 Direct Lamp control Command 1 DLCC1
65226 FECA Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes DM1
65227 FECB Previously Active Diagnostic DM2

Trouble Codes
54016 D300 Calibration Information DM19
61441 F001 Electronic Brake Controller #1 EBC1
65251 FEE3 Engine Configuration 1 EC1
65247 FEDF Electronic Engine Controller #3 EEC3
65214 FEBE Electronic Engine Controller #4 EEC4

64765 FCFD Electronic Engine Controller #9 EEC9
65263 FEEF Engine Fluid Level/Pressure #1 EFL_P1
65243 FEDB Engine Fluid Level/Pressure #2 EFL_P2
64938 FDAA Engine Fluid Level/Pressure #4 EFL_P4
61440 F000 Electronic Retarder Controller #1 ERC1
65262 FEEE Engine Temperature #1 ET1
65188 FEA4 Engine Temperature #2 ET2
65213 FEBD Fan Drive FD
65253 FEE5 Engine Hours, Revolutions HOURS
65270 FEF6 Inlet/Exhaust Conditions #1 IC1
64976 FDD0 Inlet/Exhaust Conditions #2 IC2
65244 FEDC Idle Operation IO
56064 DB00 UDS Functional ISO15765_Func
55808 DA00 UDS Physical ISO15765_Phys
65257 FEE9 Fuel Consumption LFC
65266 FEF2 Fuel Economy (Liquid) LFE
64892 FD7C Particulate Trap Control #1 PTC1
65264 FEF0 Power Take off Info PTO
65249 FEE1 Retarder Configuration RC
65252 FEE4 Shutdown SHUTDN
65242 FEDA Software Identification SOFT
65245 FEDD Turbocharger TC
65132 FE6C Tachograph TCO1
61466 F01A Engine Throttle/Fuel Actuator TFAC

Control Command
65254 FEE6 Time/Date TD
65248 FEE0 Vehicle Distance VD
65217 FEC1 High Resolution Vehicle Distance VDHR
65271 FEF7 Vehicle Electrical Power 1 VEP1
65255 FEE7 Vehicle Hours VH
65260 FEEC Vehicle Information VI
65279 FEFF Water in Fuel Indicator WFI
61436 EFFC Proprietary XCP PropA

65280 FF00 Proprietary Malaysian H/W Test PropB00
65280 FF00 Proprietary UDE PropB00
65282 FF02 Proprietary for FUSO PropB02
65361 FF51 Proprietary for FUSO PropB51
65376 FF60 Proprietary for Predictive CC PropB60
Table 304.
TCM Address J1939 Messages
61442 Electronic Transmission Controller 1 ETC1
65272 Transmission Fluids 1 TRF1
9.2 SAE J1939 Supported Messages

The format of SAE J1939 supported messages may be seen in the following sections.
ACC1 – Adaptive Cruise Control
Table 305.
Reception rate: 100 ms
Transmission rate: 1 second
Data length: 8 bytes
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 111
PGN: 65135 (0x00FE6F)
Byte : 1 Speed of Forward Vehicle - N/A
Byte : 2 Distance to Forward Vehicle - N/A
Byte : 3 Adaptive Cruise Control Set Speed - N/A
Byte : 4 ACC Status 1
Bits: 8,7 Not Defined
Bits: 6 - 4 Adaptive Cruise Control Set Distance Mode - N/A
Bits: 3 - 1 Adaptive Cruise Control Mode (SPN 1590)
110: Error
111: Not Available

Byte : 5 - 6 Road Curvature - N/A
Byte : 7 Bits: 8,7 Not Defined
Bits: 5,6 ACC Distance Alert Signal – N/A
Bits: 3,4 ACC System Shutoff Warning – N/A
Bits: 1,2 ACC Target Detected – N/A
Byte : 8 Not Defined
ACK/NACK – Acknowledge / Negative Acknowledge
Table 306.
Transmission Rate: As Needed
Data Length: 8 bytes
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 232
PDU specific: Destination Address
Default priority: 6
PGN: 59,392 (0x00E800)
Byte: 1 Control Byte
0: Positive Acknowledgment (ACK)
1: Negative Acknowledgment (NACK)
2: Access Denied (PGN supported but

access denied)
Byte: 2 Group Function Value (if applicable)- N/A
Bytes: 3 – 5 Reserved for assignment by SAE, send each of these bytes as "FF"
Byte: 6 – 8 Parameter Group Number of requested information
AETC - Advertised Engine Torque Curve
Table 307.
Transmission Repetition Rate: N/A
Data Length: Variable
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 253
PDU specific: 144 PGN Supporting Information:
Default priority: 6
PGN: 64,912 (0xFD90)

Table 308.
Start Position Length Parameter Name SPN
1.1 4 bits AETC Data Collection Standard 3558
1.5 4 bits Number of AETC data points 3559
a 2 bytes AETC Speed Value 3560
b 2 bytes AETC Torque value 3561
AMB – Ambient Condition
Table 309.
Transmission Rate: 1 sec.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 245
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,269 (0x00FEF5)
Byte: 1 Barometric Pressure (SPN 108)
Resolution: 0.5 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa offset
Byte: 2 Cab Interior Temperature - N/A
Bytes: 4,5 Ambient Air Temperature (SPN 171)
Resolution: 0.03125°C / Bit, -273°C offset
Byte: 6 Air Inlet Temperature (SPN 172)
Resolution: 1°C / Bit, -40°C offset
Bytes: 7,8 Road Surface Temperature - N/A
ATI2 - Aftertreatment Intake Gas 2
Table 310.
Transmission Repetition Rate: 500 ms
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 253
PDU specific: 180
Default priority: 6
PGN: 64948 (0xFDB4)

Bytes: 1 – 2 Exhaust Gas Temperature 1 (SPN 3241) – N/A
Bytes: 3 – 4 Particulate Trap Intake Gas Temperature (SPN 3242) (CPC4 Rel 2 or later)
Byte: 5 Exhaust Gas Temperature 1 Preliminary FMI (SPN 3243) – N/A
Byte: 6 Particulate Trap Intake Exhaust Gas Temperature Preliminary FMI – N/A
AT1FC1 - Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Control 1

Contains information about the aftertreatment 1 fuel system.
Table 311.
Data Length: 8
Data Page: 8
PDU Format: 253
PDU Specific: 161 PGN
Default Priority: 6
Parameter Group Number: 64929 (0x00FDA1)
1–2 2 bytes Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Pressure 1 3480
3–4 2 bytes Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Rate 3481
5–6 2 bytes Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Pressure 1 3479

Resolution: 0.05 L/h per bit, 0 Control
offset
Data Range: 0 to 3,212.75 L/h
7.1 2 bits Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Drain 4097

Actuator
7.3 2 bits Aftertreatment 1 Ignition 3484
7.5 2 bits Aftertreatment 1 Regeneration 3483

Status
7.7 2 bits Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Enable 3482

Actuator
8 1 byte Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Injector 1 4301

Heater Control
AT1HI - Aftertreatment 1 Historical Information
Table 312.
Transmission Repetition Rate: On request
Data Page: 0

PDU Format: 253
PDU Specific: 152
Default Priority: 6
Parameter Group Number: 64950 (0x00FD98)
Bytes: 1 - 4 Aftertreatment 1 Total Fuel Used SPN (3522) - NA
Resolution:
Bytes: 5 - 8 Aftertreatment 1 Total Regeneration Time SPN (3523)
Resolution: 1 Sec / Bit, 0 Sec Offset
AT1OG2 - Aftertreatment 1 Outlet Gas 2
Table 313.
Data Length: 8
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 253
PDU Specific: 179
Default Priority: 6
Parameter Group Number: 64947 (0x00FDB3)
Bytes: 1 - 2 Aftertreatment 1 Exhaust Gas Temperature 3 SPN (3245) - NA
Resolution:
Bytes: 3 - 4 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Particulate Filter Outlet Gas Temperature SPN (3246)
Resolution: .03125°C / Bit, -273°C Offset
AT1T1I - Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 1 Information
Table 314.
Data Length: 8
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 86
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65110 (0x00FE56)

Table 315.
1 1 byte Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid 1761

Tank Level
2 1 byte Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid 3031

Tank Temperature
3-4 2 bytes Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid 3517

Tank Level 2
5.1 5 bits Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid 3532

Tank Level Preliminary
5.6 3 bits Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid 5245

Tank Low Level Indicator
A1SCREGT - Aftertreatment 1 SCR Exhaust Gas Temperature
Table 316.
Data Length: 8
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 253
PDU specific: 62
Default priority: 5
PGN: 64830 (0x00FD3E)
Bytes: 1 -2 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst Intake Gas Temperature (SPN 4360)
Resolution: .03125° C/Bit, -273°C Offset
Byte: 3 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst Intake Gas Temperature (SPN 4361) - NA
Resolution:
Bytes: 4 -5 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst Outlet Gas Temperature (SPN 4363)
Resolution: .03125° C/Bit, -273°C Offset
CCSS – Cruise Control / Vehicle Speed Setup
Table 317.
Transmission Rate: On Request
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 237
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,261 (0x00FEED)

Byte: 1 Maximum Vehicle Speed Limit (SPN 74)
Resolution: 1 km/h / Bit, 0 km/h offset
Byte: 2 Cruise Control High Set Limit Speed. (SPN 87)
Byte: 3 Cruise Control Low Set Limit Speed (SPN 88)
Bytes: 4-8 Not Defined
CCVS – Cruise Control / Vehicle Speed
Table 318.
Transmission/Reception Rate: 100 ms
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 241
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,265 (0x00FEF1)
Byte: 1 Measured_SW1
Bits: 6,5 Cruise Control Pause Switch (SPN 1633)
00: Off
01: On
10: Error
11: Take No Action
Bits: 4,3 Parking Brake Switch (SPN 70)
00: Park Brake Not Set
01: Park Brake Set
10: Error
11: Not Configured
Bits: 2,1 Two Speed Axle Switch (SPN 69)
00: Low Speed Range
01: High Speed Range
10: Error
11: Not Configured
Byte: 2,3 Wheel Based Vehicle Speed (SPN 84)
Resolution: 1/256 km/h, 0 km/h Offset
Byte: 4 Measured_CC_SW1
Bits: 8,7 Clutch Switch (SPN 598)

00: Clutch Pedal Released
01: Clutch Pedal Depressed
10: Error
11: Not Configured
Bits: 6,5 Service Brake Switch (SPN 597)
00: Brake Pedal Released
01: Brake Pedal Depressed
10: Error
11: Not Configured
Bits: 4,3 Cruise Control Enable Switch (SPN 596)
00: Cruise Control Disabled
01: Cruise Control Enabled
10: Error
11: Not Configured
Bits: 2,1 Cruise Control Active (SPN 595)
00: Cruise Control Off
01: Cruise Control On
10: Error
11: Not Configured
Byte: 5 Measured _CC_SW2
Bits: 8,7 Cruise Control Accelerate Switch (SPN 602)
00: Accelerate Switch Off
01: Accelerate Switch On
10: Error
11: Not Configured
Bits: 6,5 Cruise Control Resume Switch (SPN 601)
00: Resume Switch Off
01: Resume Switch On
10: Error
11: Not Configured
Bits: 4,3 Cruise Control Coast Switch (SPN 600)
00: Coast Switch Off
01: Coast Switch On
10: Error
11: Not Configured
Bits: 2,1 Cruise Control Set Switch (SPN 599)
00: Set Switch Off
01: Set Switch On
10: Error

11: Not Configured
Byte: 6 Cruise Control Set Speed (SPN 86)
Resolution: 1 km/h/Bit, 0 km/h Offset
Byte: 7 State_CC
Bits: 8 – 6 Cruise Control State (SPN 527)
000: Off/Disabled
001: Hold
010: Accelerate
011: Decel/Coast
100: Resume
101: Set
110: Accelerator Override
111: Not Available
Bits: 5 –1 PTO State - (SPN 976)
00000: Disabled/Off
00001: Hold
00010: Remote Hold
00100: Remote Standby
00101: Set
00110: Decelerate/Coast
00111: Resume
01000: Accelerate
01001: Accelerator Override
01010: Programmed Speed 1
11111: Not Available
Byte: 8 Measured_Idle_SW1
Bits: 8,7 Engine Shutdown Override Switch (SPN 1237)
00: Switch Off
01: Switch On
11: Not Configured
Bits: 6,5 Engine Test Mode Switch – N/A
Bits: 4,3 Idle Decrement Switch (SPN 967)
00: Off
01: On
Bits: 2,1 Idle Increment Switch (SPN 968)
00: Off
01: On

CI – Component Identification
Table 319.
Transmission Rate : On Request
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 235
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,259 (0x00FEEB)
Bytes: 1 – 5 Make (SPN 586) – ASCII
Byte: 6 * - Delimiter
Bytes 7 – 14: Engine Model Number (SPN 587) – ASCII
Byte: 16 – 25 Engine Serial Number (SPN 588) – ASCII
Byte: 27 – 36 Unit Number (Power Unit) (SPN 233) - ASCII
Note: DDEC 13 also supports an alternate format of the component identification data to satisfy an AGS2 transmission.
CM1 – Cab Message1
Table 320.
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 224
PDU Specific: 218
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 57, 344(0x00E00016)
Byte: 1 Requested Percent Fan Speed (SPN 986)
Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0 offset
Bytes: 2 – 3 Cab Interior Temperature Command – N/A
Byte: 4
Bits: 2 – 1 Auxiliary Heater Coolant Pump Request – N/A
Bits: 4 – 3 Battery Main Switch Hold Request – N/A
Bits: 6 – 5 Operator Seat Direction Switch – N/A
Bits: 8 – 7 Seat Belt Switch – N/A
Byte: 5
Bits: 8 – 7 Vehicle Speed Governor Enable Switch – N/A

Bits: 6 – 5 Vehicle Limiting Speed Governor Increment Switch – N/A
Bits: 4 – 3 Vehicle Limiting Speed Governor Decrement Switch – N/A
Bits: 2 – 1 Not Defined
Byte: 6
Bits: 4 – 3 Particulate Trap Regeneration Force Switch (SPN 3696)

00: Not Active
01: Active
10: Error
11: Not Available
Bits: 2 – 1 Particulate Trap Regeneration Inhibit Switch (SPN 3695)

00: Not Active
01: Active
10: Error
11: Not Available
Byte: 7
Bits: 8 – 7 Request Cab Zone Heating – N/A
Bits: 6 – 5 Request Engine Zone Heating – N/A
Bits: 4 – 1 Auxiliary Heater Mode Request – N/A
Byte: 8 Selected Maximum Vehicle Speed Limit – N/A
DD-Dash Display (PGN 65276 (R)
Table 321.
Reception Rate: 1 sec.
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 252
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65276 (0xFEFC)
Byte: 1 Washer Fluid Level (SPN 80) - N/A
Byte: 2 Fuel Level 1 (SPN 96)

Resolution: 0.4%bit, 0 offset
Byte: 3 Engine Fuel Filter Differential Pressure (SPN 95) - N/A
Byte: 4 Engine Oil Filter Differential Pressure (SPN 99) - N/A
Byte: 5 - 6 Cargo Ambient Temperature (SPN 169) - N/A
Byte: 7 Fuel Level 2 (SPN 38) - N/A
DLCC1 – Direct Lamp Control Command 1

Table 322.
Transmission / Reception Rate: Every 1 s and on change of state but no faster than every 100 ms
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 253
PDU Specific: 07 PGN Supporting Information
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 64775 (0x00FD07)
Byte: 1 Bits: 1 – 2 Engine Protect Lamp Command (SPN 5077)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 3 – 4 Engine Amber Warning Lamp Command (SPN 5078)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 5 – 6 Engine Red Stop Lamp Command (SPN 5079)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 7 – 8 OBD Malfunction Indicator Lamp Command (SPN 5080)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Byte: 2 Bits: 1 – 2 Engine Brake Active Lamp Command (SPN 5081)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 3 – 4 Compression Brake Enable Switch Indicator Lamp Command (SPN 3987)
00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 5 – 6 Engine Oil Pressure Low Lamp Command (SPN 5082)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available

Bits: 7 – 8 Engine Coolant Temperature High Lamp Command (SPN 5083)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Byte: 3 Bits: 1 – 2 Engine Coolant Level Low Lamp Command (SPN 5084)
00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 3 – 4 Engine Idle Management Active Lamp Command (SPN 5085)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 5 – 6 Engine Air Filter Restriction Lamp Command (SPN 5086)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 7 – 8 Engine Fuel Filter Restricted Lamp Command (SPN 5469)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
DLCD1 – Direct Lamp Control Data 1
Table 323.
Transmission / Reception Rate: 1 second
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 253
PDU Specific: 05
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 64773 (0x00FD05)
Byte: 1 Bits: 1 – 2 Engine Protect Lamp Data (SPN 5093)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 3 – 4 Engine Amber Warning Lamp Data (SPN 5094)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available

Byte: 1 Bits: 5 – 6 Engine Red Stop Lamp Data (SPN 5095)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 7 – 8 OBD Malfunction Indicator Lamp Data (SPN 5096)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Byte: 2 Bits: 1 – 2 Engine Brake Active Lamp Data (SPN 5097)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 3 – 4 Compression Brake Enable Switch Indicator Lamp Data (SPN 5098)
00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 5 – 6 Engine Oil Pressure Low Lamp Data (SPN 5099)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 7 – 8 Engine Coolant Temperature High Lamp Data (SPN 5100)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available

Byte: 3 Bits: 1 – 2 Engine Coolant Level Low Lamp Data (SPN 5101)
00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 3 – 4 Engine Idle Management Active Lamp Data (SPN 5102)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 5 – 6 Engine Air Filter Restriction Lamp Data (SPN 5103)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 7 – 8 Engine Fuel Filter Restricted Lamp Data (SPN 5470)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Byte: 8 Bits: 7 – 8 Engine Wait-To-Start Lamp Data (SPN 5416)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
DM1 – Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Table 324.
Transmission / Reception Rate: Whenever a DTC becomes an active fault and at a normal update rate of one second or
longer, and then becomes inactive, a DM1 message will be transmitted to reflect this
state change. If a different DTC changes state within one second update period, a new
DM1 message is transmitted to reflect this new DTC.
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 202
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65226 (0x00FECA)
Byte: 1 Bits: 8 – 7 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Status (SPN 1213)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Error
11: Not Available
Bits: 6 – 5 Red Stop Lamp Status (SPN 623)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Error
11: Not Available

Bits: 4 – 3 Amber Warning Lamp Status (SPN 624)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Error
11: Not Available
Bits: 2 – 1 Protect Lamp Status (SPN 987) – N/A
Byte: 2 Bits: 8 – 1 Reserved for SAE assignment Lamp Status
Byte: 3 Bits: 8 – 1 SPN, 8 least significant bits of SPN (SPN 1214)

(most significant at bit 8)
Byte: 4 Bits: 8 – 1 SPN, second byte of SPN

Byte: 5 Bits: 8 – 6 SPN, 3 most significant bits

Bits: 5 – 1 FMI (SPN 1215)

Byte: 6 Bit: 8 SPN Conversion Method (SPN 1706)

Bits: 7 – 1 Occurrence Count (SPN 1216)
Byte: 7 Bits: 8 – 1 Not Defined
DM2 – Previously Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Table 325.
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 203
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65227 (0x00FECB)
Byte: 1 Bits: 8 – 7 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Status (SPN 1213)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Error
11: Not Available
Bits: 6 – 5 Red Stop Lamp Status (SPN 623)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Error
11: Not Available
Bits: 4 – 3 Amber Warning Lamp Status (SPN 624)

00: Lamp Off
01: Lamp On
10: Error
11: Not Available
Bits: 2 – 1 Protect Lamp Status (SPN 987) – N/A

Byte: 2 Bits: 8 – 1 Reserved for SAE Assignment Lamp Status
Byte: 3 Bits: 8 – 1 SPN, 8 least significant bits of SPN (most significant at bit 8) (SPN 1214)
Byte: 4 Bits: 8 – 1 SPN, second byte of SPN (most significant at bit 8) (SPN 1214)
Byte: 5 Bits: 8 – 6 SPN, 3 most significant bits (most significant at bit 8) (SPN 1214)
Bits: 5 – 1 FMI (most significant at bit 5) (SPN 1215)
Byte: 6 Bit: 8 SPN conversion Method (SPN 1706)
Bits: 7 – 1 Occurrence count (SPN 1216)
DM3 - Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset of Previously Active DTCs
Table 326.
Reception Rate: On Request using PGN 59904
Data Length: 0
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 204
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65,228 (0x00FECC)
Note: All of the non-permanent diagnostic information pertaining to previously active (inactive) visible diagnostic trouble codes will be erased
when this PG is requested. The diagnostic data associated with active trouble codes will not be affected. Upon reception of this PG request,
DDEC 13 will respond with a Positive Acknowledgement (ACK). This message clears both CPC4 and MCM2.1 previously active DTCs.
DM11 – Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset for Active DTCs
Table 327.
Reception Rate: On Request Using PGN 59904
Data Length: 0
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 211
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65,235 (0x00FED3)
Note: All of the non-permanent diagnostic information pertaining to active visible diagnostic trouble codes will be erased when this PG is
requested. The diagnostic data associated with previously active (inactive) trouble codes will not be affected. Upon reception of this PG
request, DDEC 13 will respond with a Positive Acknowledgement (ACK). This message clears both CPC4 and MCM2.1 previously active
DTCs.
DM13 – Stop Start Broadcast

Table 328.
Reception Rate : As Received
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 223
Default priority: 3
PGN: 57,008 (0x00DF00)
Byte: 1 SAE Primary Links
Bits: 8 - 7 Current Data Link (SPN 1230)
00: Stop Broadcast
01: Start Broadcast
11: Don't Care
00: Stop Broadcast
01: Start Broadcast
11: Don't Care
Bits: 4 - 3 J1922 (SPN 622) – N/A
Bits: 2 - 1 J1939 Network #1, Primary Vehicle Network (SPN 639)
00: Stop Broadcast
01: Start Broadcast
11: Don't Care
Byte: 2 Other Networks #1
Bits: 8 - 7 J1939 Network #2 - N/A
Bits: 6 - 5 ISO 9141 - N/A
Bits: 4 - 3 J1850 - N/A
Bits: 2 - 1 Other, Manufacture Specified Port - N/A
Byte: 3 Other Networks #2
Bits: 8 - 7 J1939 Network #3 - N/A
Byte: 4 Control Flags
Bits: 8 – 5 Hold Signal (SPN 1236)
0000: All Devices
0001: Devices whose broadcast state has been modified
0010 – 1110: Not Defined
1111: N/A
Bits: 4 – 1 Suspended Signal – N/A
Byte: 5 – 6 Suspended Duration – N/A
Byte: 7 – 8 SAE Reserved

DPFC1 – Diesel Particulate Filter Control 1
Table 329.
Transmission Reception Rate: 1 second or on change
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 253
PDU Specific: 124
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 64, 892 (OxFD7C)
Byte: 1
Bits: 8 – 4 Reserved
Bits: 3 – 1 Diesel Particulate Filter Lamp Command (SPN 3697)

000: Off
001: On – solid
010: Reserved for SAE assignment
100: On – fast blink (1 HZ)
111: Not Available
Byte: 2
Bit: 8 Reserved
Bits: 7 – 5 Diesel Particulate Filter Status (SPN 3701) – N/A
Bits: 4 – 3 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Status (SPN 3700)

00: Not Active
01: Active
10: Regeneration needed – automatically initiated active regeneration imminent
11: Not Available
Bits: 2 – 1 Diesel Particulate Filter Passive Regeneration Status (SPN 3699) – N/A
Byte: 3
Bits: 8 – 7 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Service Brake Active (SPN
3705) – N/A
Bits: 6 – 5 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Clutch (SPN 3704)
00: Not Inhibited
01: Inhibited
11: Not Available
Bits: 4 – 3 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Inhibit Switch (SPN 3703)
00: Not Inhibited
01: Inhibited
11: Not Available

Bits: 2 – 1 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Status (SPN 3702)
00: Not Inhibited
01: Inhibited
11: Not Available
Byte: 4
Bits: 8 – 7 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Vehicle Speed Above
Allowed Speed (SPN 3709)
00: Not Inhibited
01: Inhibited
11: Not Available
Bits: 6 – 5 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Out of Neutral (SPN 3708) –
N/A
Bits: 4 – 3 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Accelerator Pedal Off Idle
(SPN 3707)
00: Not Inhibited
01: Inhibited
11: Not Available
Bits: 2 – 1 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to PTO Active (SPN 3706)
00: Not Inhibited
01: Inhibited
11: Not Available
Byte: 5
Bits: 8 – 7 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to System Time-out (SPN
3713)
00: Not Inhibited
01: Inhibited
11: Not Available
Bits: 6 – 5 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to System Fault Active (SPN
3712) – N/A
Bits: 4 – 3 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Low Exhaust Gas
Temperature (SPN 3711)
00: Not Inhibited
01: Inhibited
11: Not Available
Bits: 2 – 1 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Parking Brake Not Set (SPN
3710)
00: Not Inhibited
01: Inhibited
11: Not Available
Byte: 6
Bits: 8 – 7 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Vehicle Speed Below
Allowed Speed (SPN 3717) – N/A

Bits: 6 – 5 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Engine Not Warmed Up
(SPN 3716) – N/A
Bits: 4 – 3 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Permanent System Lockout
(SPN 3715) – N/A
Bits: 2 – 1 Diesel Particulate Filter Active Regeneration Inhibited Due to Temporary System Lockout
(SPN 3714) – N/A
Byte: 7
Bits: 8 – 6 Reserved
Bits: 5 – 3 Exhaust System High Temperature Lamp Command (SPN 3698)

000: Off
001: On – solid
100: On – fast blink (1 HZ)
111: Not Available
Bits: 2 – 1 Diesel Particulate Filter Automatic Active Regeneration Initiation Configuration (SPN
3718) –N/A
Byte: 8 Not Defined
EBC1 -- Electronic Brake Controller #1
Table 330.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 240
PDU specific: 1
Default priority: 6
PGN: 61,441 (0x00F001)
Byte : 1 Status EBC1
Bits: 1-2 ASR Brake Control Active – N/A
Bits: 3-4 Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) Active (SPN 563)
Bits: 5-6 00: ABS Passive but installed

01: ABS Active
10: Reserved
11: Not Available
Bits: 7-8 EBS Brake Switch – N/A
Byte : 2 Brake Pedal Position – N/A
Byte : 3 Status EBC2
Bits: 1-2 ABS Off-Road Switch – N/A
Bits: 3-4 ASR Off-Road Switch – N/A
Bits: 5-6 ASR "Hill Holder" Switch – N/A

Bits: 7-8 Traction Control Override Switch – N/A
Byte : 4 Measured Aux.1
Bits: 1-2 Accelerator Interlock Switch – N/A
Bits: 3-4 Engine Derate Switch – N/A
Bits: 5-6 Auxiliary Engine Shutdown Switch – N/A
Bits: 7-8 Remote Accelerator Enable Switch (SPN 969)
00: Off
01: On
Byte : 5 Engine Retarder Selection (SPN 973)
Resolution: 0.4% / Bit, 0% Offset
Byte : 6 EBC Lamp Status – N/A
Byte : 7 Source Address of Controlling Device for Brake Control – N/A
Byte : 8 Not Defined
EBC2 – Wheel Speed Information
Table 331.
Reception Rate : 100 ms
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 191
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,215
Bytes : 1 - 2 Front Axle Speed (SPN 904)
Resolution: 1/256 km/h per bit, 0 offset
Byte: 3 Relative Speed, Front Axle, Left Wheel – N/A
Byte: 4 Relative Speed, Front Axle, Right Wheel – N/A
Byte: 5 Relative Speed, Front Axle #1, Left Wheel – N/A
Byte: 6 Relative Speed, Front Axle #1, Right Wheel – N/A
Byte: 7 Relative Speed, Front Axle #2, Left Wheel – N/A
Byte: 8 Relative Speed, Front Axle #2, Right Wheel – N/A
EC1 – Engine Configuration 1

Table 332.
Transmission Rate : 5 sec.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 227
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,251 (0x00FEE3)
Bytes: 1 - 2 Engine Speed At Idle, Point 1 (SPN 188)
Resolution: 0.125 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset
Byte: 3 Percent Torque At Idle, Point 1 (SPN 539)
Resolution: 1% / Bit, -125% offset
Bytes: 4 - 5 Engine Speed At Point 2 (SPN 528)
Byte: 6 Percent Torque At Point 2 (SPN 540)
Bytes: 16 - 17 Engine Speed At High Idle, Point 6 (SPN 532)
Bytes: 18 - 19 Engine Gain (KP) Of Endspeed Governor - N/A
Bytes: 20 -21 Reference Engine Torque (SPN 544)
Resolution: 1 Nm / Bit, 0 Nm offset
Bytes: 22 -23 Maximum Momentary Engine Override Speed, Point 7 (SPN 533)
Byte: 24 Maximum Momentary Engine Override Time Limit (SPN 534)
Resolution: 0.1 s / Bit, 0 s offset
Byte: 25 Requested Speed Control Range Lower Limit - 300 RPM – N/A
Byte: 26 Requested Speed Control Range Upper Limit – N/A

Byte: 27 Requested Torque Control Range Lower Limit – N/A
Byte: 28 Requested Torque Control Range Upper Limit – N/A
Bytes: 29 -30 Extended Range Requested Speed Control Range Upper Limit – N/A
Bytes: 31 - 32 Engine Moment of Inertia (SPN 1794)
Resolution: 0.004 kgm 2/Bit, 0 kgm 2/Bit Offset
Bytes: 33 - 34 Default Engine Torque Limit – N/A
EEC1 -- Electronic Engine Controller #1
Table 333.
Transmission Rate: 10 ms
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 240
PDU specific: 4
Default priority: 3
PGN: 61,444 (0x00F004)
Byte : 1 Status_EEC1
Bits: 8 - 5 Not Defined
Bits: 4 - 1 Engine / Retarder Torque Mode (SPN 899)
0000: Low Idle Governor
0001: Accelerator Pedal
0010: Cruise Control
0011: PTO Governor
0100: Road Speed Governor
0101: ASR Control
0110: Transmission Control
0111: ABS Control
1000: Torque Limiting
1001: High Speed Governor
1010: Braking System
1011: Remote Accelerator - N/A
1100: Not Defined
1101: Not Defined
1110: Other
1111: Not Available
Byte: 2 Drivers Demand Engine - Pct Torque (SPN 512)
Byte: 3 Actual Engine - Percent Torque (SPN 513)

Bytes: 4 - 5 Engine Speed (SPN 190)
Byte: 6 Source address of controlling device for engine control (SPN 1483)
Bits: 1 – 4 Engine Starter Mode (SPN 1675)
0000: Start Not Requested
0001: Starter Active, Gear Not Engaged
0010: Starter Active, Gear Engaged
0011: Starter Finished; Starter Not Active After Having Been

Actively Engaged
0100: Starter Inhibited Due To Engine Already Running
0101: Starter Inhibited Due To Engine Not Ready For Start

(preheating)
0110: Starter Inhibited Due To Driveline Engaged Or Other

Transmission Inhibit
0111: Starter Inhibited Due To Active Immobilizer
1000: Starter Inhibited Due To Starter Over-Temp
1001-1011: Reserved
1100: Starter Inhibited - Reason Unknown
1101: Error
1110: Error
1111: Not Available
Byte: 8 Engine Demand – Percent Torque (SPN 2432)
Table 334.
Transmission/Reception Rate : 50 ms
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 240
PDU specific: 3
Default priority: 3
PGN: 61,443 (0x00F003)
Byte: 1 Status_EEC2
Bits: 8 – 7 Accelerator Pedal 2 Low Idle Switch – N/A
Bits: 6 – 5 Road Speed Limit Status (SPN 1437)
00: Active

01: Not Active
Bits: 4 – 3 AP Kickdown Switch (SPN 559)
00: Kickdown Passive
01: Kickdown Active
11: Not Configured
Bits: 2 – 1 AP Low Idle Switch (SPN 558)
00: Not In Low Idle Condition
01: In Low Idle Condition
10: Error Detected
11: Not Configured
Byte: 2 Accelerator Pedal Position (SPN 91)
Resolution: 0.4% / Bit, 0% offset
Byte: 3 Percent Load At Current Speed (SPN 92)
Resolution: 1% / Bit, 0% offset
Byte: 4 Remote Accelerator (SPN 974)
Byte: 5 Accelerator Pedal Position 2 (SPN 29)
Byte: 6 Vehicle Acceleration Rate Limit Status
Bits: 2 – 1 Vehicle Acceleration Limit Status (SPN 2979)
00: Limit Not Active
01: Limit Active
10: Reserved
11: Not Defined
Byte: 7 Actual Maximum Available Engine percent Torque – (SPN 3357)
Byte: 8 Not Defined
Table 335.
Transmission Rate : 250 ms
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 223
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,247 (0x00FEDF)
Byte: 1 Nominal Friction - Percent Torque (SPN 514)

Resolution: 1%/Bit, -125% Offset
Bytes: 2 - 3 Engine’s Desired Operating Speed (SPN 515)
Resolution: 0.125 rpm/Bit, 0 rpm Offset
Byte 4: Engine’s Desired Operating Speed Asymmetry Adjustment (SPN 519)
Ratio: 0 to 250
Byte 5: Engine Controlled Cooling Fan Losses – Percent Torque (SPN 2978)
Resolution: 1%/Bit, -125% Offset
Bytes: 6 – 7 Exhaust Gas Mass (SPN 3236) – N/A
Resolution: 0.2 kg/hr/Bit, 0 kg/hr Offset
Byte: 8 Aftertreatment
Bits: 7-8 Aftertreatment Intake Dew Point Message – N/A
Bits: 5-6 Aftertreatment Exhaust Dew Point Message – N/A
Bits: 3-4 Aftertreatment Intake Dew Point Message – N/A
Bits: 1-2 Aftertreatment Exhaust Dew Point Message – N/A
EEC4 – Electronic Engine Controller #4
Table 336.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 190
Default priority: 7
PGN: 65,214 (0x00FEBE)
Bytes: 1 - 2 Rated Engine Power (SPN 166)
Resolution: 0.5 kW / Bit, 0 kW offset (0.67 hp / Bit, 0 hp offset)
Bytes: 3 - 4 Rated Engine Speed (SPN 189)
Bytes: 5 - 8 Not Defined
EFL/P1 – Engine Fluid Level/Pressure1
Table 337.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 239

Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,263 (0x00FEEF)
Byte: 1 Fuel Delivery Pressure (SPN 94)
Resolution: 4 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa Offset
Byte: 2 Extended Crankcase Blow-by Pressure – N/A
Byte: 3 Engine Oil Level (SPN 98)
Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0% Offset
Byte: 4 Engine Oil Pressure (SPN 100)
Byte: 5 - 6 Crankcase Pressure (SPN 101)
Resolution: 1/128 kPa / Bit, – 250 kPa Offset
Byte: 7 Coolant Pressure (SPN 109 )
Byte: 8 Coolant Level – (SPN 111)

EFL/P2 – Engine Fluid Level/Pressure #2
Table 338.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 219
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,243 (0x00FEDB)
Bytes:1 - 2 Injection Control Pressure – N/A
Bytes: 3 - 4 Injector Metering Rail Pressure (SPN 157)
Resolution: 1/256 MPa / Bit, 0 MPa offset
Bytes: 5 - 6 Injector Timing Rail 1 Pressure – N/A
Bytes: 7 - 8 Injector Metering Rail 2

Pressure – N/A
ERC1 - Electronic Retarder Controller #1
Table 339.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 240

PDU specific: 0
Default priority: 6
PGN: 61,440 (0x00F000)
Byte : 1 Status_ERC1
Bits: 8 - 7 Retarder Enable - Shift Assist Switch (SPN 572)
00: Retarder Brake Assist Disabled

01: Retarder Brake Assist Enabled
10: Error
11: Not Available
Bits: 6 - 5 Retarder Enable - Brake Assist Switch (SPN 571)
00: Retarder Brake Assist Disabled

01: Retarder Brake Assist Enabled
10: Error
11: Not Available
Bits: 4 - 1 Engine/Retarder Torque Mode (SPN 900)
0000: No Request (default)

0001: Operator Selection
0011: Cruise Control
0011: PTO Governor
0100: Road Seed Governor – N/A
0101: ASR Control
0110: Transmission Control
0111: ABS Control
1000: Torque Limiting – N/A
1001: High Speed Governor – N/A
1010: Braking System
1011: Remote Accelerator – N/A
1100: Not Defined
1101: Not Defined
1110: Other
1111: Not Defined
Byte : 2 Actual Retarder - Percent Torque (SPN 520)
Resolution: 1%/Bit, –125% Offset
Byte : 3 Intended Retarder Percent Torque - N/A
Byte : 4
Bits: 4 – 3 Retarder Requesting Brake Light – N/A
Bits: 2 – 1 Engine Coolant Load Increase – N/A
Byte : 5 Source address of controlling device for retarder control (SPN 1480)
Resolution: 1 Source Address/Bit, 0 Offset
Byte : 6 Drivers Demand Retarder – Percent Torque – N/A
Byte : 7 Retarder Selection, non-engine (SPN 1716)
Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0 Offset
Byte : 8 Actual Maximum Available Retarder – Percent Torque – N/A
ET1 – Engine Temperature #1

Table 340.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 238
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,262 (0x00FEEE)
Byte: 1 Engine Coolant Temperature (SPN 110)
Byte: 2 Fuel Temperature (SPN 174)
Bytes: 3 - 4 Engine Oil Temperature (SPN 175)
Bytes: 5 - 6 Turbo Oil Temperature -N/A
Byte: 7 Engine Intercooler Temperature (SPN 52)
Byte: 8 Engine Intercooler Thermostat Opening–N/A
ET2 – Engine Temperature #2
Table 341.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 164
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,188 (00FEA416)
Bytes: 1 – 2 Engine Oil Temperature 2 – N/A
Bytes: 3 – 4 Engine ECU Temperature (SPN 1136)
Resolution: 0.01325°C/Bit, –273°C offset
Bytes: 5 – 6 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Differential Pressure (SPN 411)
Resolution: 1/128 kPa/Bit, –250 kPa offset
Bytes: 7 – 8 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature (SPN 412)
ETC1 -- Electronic Transmission Controller #1

Table 342.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 240
PDU specific: 2
Default priority: 3
PGN: 61,442 (0x00F002)
Byte : 1 Status_ETC1
Bits: 6 - 5 Shift in Progress (SPN 574)
00: Shift is not in process
01: Shift in process
11: Not Available
Bits: 4 - 3 Torque Converter Lockup Engaged (SPN 573)
00: Torque Converter Lockup Disengaged
01: Torque Converter Lockup Engaged
11: Not Available
Bits: 2 - 1 Driveline Engaged (SPN 560)
00: Driveline Disengaged
01: Driveline Engaged
11: Not Available
Bytes: 2 - 3 Output Shaft Speed (SPN 191)
Byte: 4 Percent Clutch Slip (SPN 522)
Byte: 5 Command_ETC1
Bits: 4 - 3 Progressive Shift Disabled (SPN 607)
00: Progressive Shift is Not Disabled
01: Progressive Shift Is Disabled
11: Take No Action
Bits: 2 - 1 Momentary Engine Overspeed Enable (SPN 606)
00: Momentary Engine Overspeed Is Disabled
01: Momentary Engine Overspeed Is Enabled
11: Not Available
Bytes: 6 - 7 Input Shaft Speed (SPN 161)
Resolution: 0.125 rpm/Bit, 0 Offset
Byte : 8 Source Address of Controlling Device for Transmission Control – N/A

ETC2 -- Electronic Transmission Controller #2
Table 343.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 240
PDU specific: 5
Default priority: 6
PGN: 61,445 (0x00F005)
Byte : 1 Transmission Selected Gear (SPN 524)
Resolution: 1 Gear Value / Bit, – 125 Offset
Byte: 2 - 3 Transmission Actual Gear Ratio – N/A
Byte: 4 Transmission Current Gear (SPN 523)
Resolution: 1 Gear Value/Bit, – 125 Offset
Byte: 5 - 6 Transmission Requested Range – N/A
Byte: 7 - 8 Transmission Current Range – N/A
ETC7 – Electronic Transmission Controller 7
Table 344.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 74
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,098
Byte : 1 Transmission Request State
Bits: 7 - 8 Transmission Requested Range Display Flash State (SPN 1849) – N/A
Bits: 5 - 6 Transmission Requested Range Display Blank State (SPN 1850) – N/A
Byte : 2 Transmission Switches
Bits: 7 - 8 Transmission Shift Inhibit Indicator (SPN 1851) – N/A
Bits: 5 - 6 Transmission Engine Crank Enable (SPN 2900)
00: Cranking disabled; engine cranking is prohibited by the transmission

type
01: Cranking enabled; engine cranking is allowed by transmission
10: Error
11: Not Available
Bits: 3 - 4 Active Shift Console Indicator (SPN 2945) – N/A

Bits: 1 - 2 Transmission ready for Brake Release (SPN 3086) – N/A
Byte : 3 Transmission Mode Indicators
Bits: 7 - 8 Transmission Mode 1 Indicator (SPN 2536) – N/A
Byte : 4 Transmission Requested Gear Feedback (SPN 3289) – N/A
Bytes : 5 - 6 Not Defined
FD – Fan Drive
Table 345.
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 189
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65, 213 (Ox00FEBD)
Byte: 1 Estimated Percent Fan Speed (SPN 975)
Resolution: 0.4%/bit, 0% offset
Byte: 2 Fan Drive State (SPN 977)
0000: Fan Off

0001: Engine System General
0010: Excessive Engine Air Temperature
0011: Excessive Engine Oil Temperature
0100: Excessive Engine Coolant Temperature
0101: Excessive Transmission Oil Temperature
0110: Excessive Hydraulic Oil Temperature
0111: Default Operation
1000: Not Defined
1001: Manual Control
1010: Transmission Retarder
1011: A/C System
1100: Timer
1101: Engine Brake
1110: Other
1111: Not Available
Bytes: 3 - 4 Fan Speed (SPN 1639)
Resolution: 0.125 rpm/bit, 0 rpm offset
Hours – Engine Hours, Revolutions

Table 346.
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 229
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65,253 (0x00FEE5)v
Bytes: 1 – 4 Total Engine Hours (SPN 247)
Resolution: 0.05 hr./bit, 0 hr./bit offset
Bytes: 5 – 8 Total Engine Revolutions (SPN 249)
Resolution: 1000 rev/bit, 0 rev/bit offset
IC1 – Inlet/Exhaust Conditions #1
Table 347.
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 246
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65,270 (0x00FEF6)
Byte: 1 Particulate Trap Inlet Pressure – N/A
Byte: 2 Boost Pressure (SPN 102)
Resolution: 2 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa / Bit Offset
Byte: 3 Intake Manifold Temperature (SPN 105)
Resolution: 1°C / Bit, -40°C / Bit Offset
Byte: 4 Air Inlet Pressure (SPN 106)
Resolution: 2 kPa / Bit, 0kPa / Bit Offset
Byte: 5 Air Filter Differential Pressure (SPN 107)
Resolution: 0.05 kPa / Bit, 0 kPa Offset
Byte: 6 Exhaust Gas Temperature (SPN 173)
Resolution: 0.03125°C / Bit, –273°C Offset
Byte: 8 Coolant Filter Differential Pressure – N/A
IO – Idle Operation

Table 348.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 220
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,244 (0x00FEDC)
Bytes: 1 - 4 Total Idle Fuel Used (SPN 236)
Resolution: 0.5 L / Bit, 0 L offset
Bytes: 5 - 8 Total Idle Hours (SPN 235)
Resolution: 0.05 hr. / Bit, 0 hr. offset
LFC – Fuel Consumption (Liquid)
Table 349.
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 233
Default Priority: 0
PGN: 65,257 (0x00FEE9)
Bytes: 1 – 4 Trip Fuel (SPN 182)
Resolution: 0.05 L/bit, 0 L/bit offset
Bytes: 5 – 8 Total Fuel Used (SPN 250)
Resolution: 0.05 L/bit, 0 L/bit offset
LFE – Fuel Economy (Liquid)
Table 350.
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 242
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65,266 (0x00FEF2)
Bytes: 1 - 2 Fuel Rate (SPN 183)

Resolution: 0.05 L/h/bit, 0 km/L offset
Bytes: 3 - 4 Instantaneous Fuel Economy (SPN 184)
Resolution: 1/512 km/ l/bit, o km/ l offset
Bytes: 5 - 6 Average Fuel Economy (SPN 185)
Resolution: 1/512 km/ l/bit, o km/ l offset
Byte: 7 Throttle Position (SPN 51)
Resolution: 0.4%/Bit, 0% offset
Byte: 8 Not Defined
PTO – Power Takeoff Information
Table 351.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 240
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,264 (0x00FEF0)
Byte: 1 Power Takeoff Oil Temperature - N/A
Byte: 2 - 3 Power Takeoff Speed - N/A
Byte: 4 - 5 Power Takeoff Set Speed (SPN 187)
Byte: 6 Measured_PTO_1
Bits: 6 - 5 Remote PTO Variable Speed Control Switch - N/A
Bits: 4 - 3 Remote PTO Preprogrammed Speed Control Switch (SPN 979)
00: Switch Off
01: Switch On
11: Not Configured
Bits: 2 - 1 PTO Enable Switch (SPN 980)
00: Switch Off
01: Switch On
11: Not Configured
Byte: 7 Measured_PTO_2
Bits: 8 - 7 PTO Accelerate Switch (SPN 981)
00: Switch Off
01: Switch On
11: Not Configured

Bits: 6 - 5 PTO Resume Switch (SPN 982)
00: Switch Off
01: Switch On
11: Not Configured
Bits: 4 - 3 PTO Coast/Decelerate Switch (SPN 983)
00: Switch Off
01: Switch On
11: Not Configured
Bits: 2 - 1 PTO Set Switch (SPN 984)
00: Switch Off
01: Switch On
11: Not Configured
Byte: 8 Not Defined
RC – Retarder Configuration
Table 352.
Transmission Rate: 5 sec. or upon receipt of a destination specific request
Data Page: 0
PDU Format: 254
PDU Specific: 225
Default Priority: 6
PGN: 65, 249 (OxOOFEE1)
Byte: 1 Type and Location
Bits: 8 – 5 Retarder Location (SPN 902)
0000: Engine Compression Release Brake

0001: Engine Exhaust Brake
0010: Transmission Input
0011: Transmission Output
0100: Driveline
0101: Trailer
0110: Not Defined
0111: Not Defined
1000: Not Defined
1001: Not Defined
1010: Not Defined
1011: Not Defined
1100: Not Defined
1101: Not Defined
1110: Other
1111: Not Available
Bits: 4 – 1 Retarder Type (SPN 901)

0000: Electric/Magnetic
0001: Hydraulic
0011: Cooled Friction
0011: Compression Release (Engine Retarder)
0100: Exhaust
0101: Not Defined
0110: Not Defined
0111: Not Defined
1000: Not Defined
1001: Not Defined
1010: Not Defined
1011: Not Defined
1100: Not Defined
1101: Not Defined
1110: Other
1111: Not Available
Byte: 2 Retarder Control Method (SPN 557)
0 – DVB
1 – Konstandrossel
2 – Low/High Compression
3 – Low/Med/High Compression
255 – Not Configured
Bytes: 3 – 4 Retarder Speed at Idle, Point 1 (SPN 546)
Byte: 5 Percent Torque at Idle, Point 1 (SPN 551)
Resolution: 1%/Bit, – 125% offset
Bytes: 6 – 7 Maximum Retarder Speed, Point 2 (SPN 548)
Byte: 8 Percent Torque at Maximum Speed, Point 2 (SPN 552)
Bytes: 9 – 10 Retarder Speed, Point 3 (SPN 549)
Byte: 11 Percent Torque, Point 3 (SPN 553)
Bytes: 12 – 13 Retarder Speed, Point 4 (SPN 550)
Byte: 14 Percent Torque, Point 4 (SPN 554)
Bytes: 15 – 16 Retarder Speed at Peak Torque, Point 5 (SPN 547)
Bytes: 17 – 18 Reference Retarder Torque (SPN 556)
Resolution: 1 Nm/Bit, 0 Nm offset
Byte: 19 Percent Torque at Peak Torque, Point 5 (SPN 555)

Requests
Table 353.
Reception Rate: As Needed
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 234
Default priority: 6
PGN: 59,904 (0x00EA00)
Bytes : 1 – 3 Requested PGN
NOTE: It is recommended that requests occur no more than 2 or 3 times per second.
Shutdown – Idle Shutdown
Table 354.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 228
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,252 (0x00FEE4)
Byte: 1 Idle Shutdown_1
Bits: 8 - 7 Idle Shutdown Timer State (SPN 590)
00: Inactive
01: Active
Bits: 6 - 5 Idle Shutdown Timer Override (SPN 592)
00: Inactive
01: Active
Bits: 4 - 3 Driver Alert Mode (SPN 594)
00: Inactive
01: Active
Bits: 2 - 1 Engine Has Shutdown by Idle Shutdown (SPN 593)
00: Engine has not shutdown by idle shutdown
01: Engine has shutdown by idle shutdown
Byte: 2 Idle Shutdown_2
Bits: 8 - 7 Idle Shutdown Timer Function (SPN 591)
00: Disabled in Calibration

01: Enabled in Calibration
Byte: 3 Bits: 8 - 7 Not Defined
Bits: 6 - 5 Refrigerant High Pressure Switch- N/A
Bits: 4 - 3 Refrigerant Low Pressure Switch- N/A
Bits: 2 - 1 A/C High Pressure Fan Switch (SPN 985)
00: Pressure Normal
01: Pressure High Fan May be Engaged
Byte: 4 Lamp_Commands
Bits: 2 - 1 Wait to Start Lamp (SPN 1081)
00: Inactive
01: Active
Byte: 5 Engine Shutdown_1
Bits: 8 - 7 Engine Protection System Timer State (SPN 1107)
00: Timer not Active
01: Timer Active
Bits: 6 - 5 Engine Protection System Timer Override (SPN 1108)
00: Override Off
01: Override On
Bits: 4 - 3 Engine Shutdown Approaching (SPN 1109)
00: Not Approaching
01: Approaching
Bits: 2 - 1 Engine Has Shutdown By Engine Protection System (SPN 1110)
00: Not Shutdown
01: Has Shutdown
Byte: 6 Engine Shutdown_2
Bits: 8 - 7 Engine Protection System Configuration (SPN 1111)
00: Not Enabled In Calibration
01: Enabled In Calibration
SOFT – Software Identification
Table 355.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254

PDU specific: 218
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,242 (0x00FEDA)
Byte: 1 Number of Software Identification Fields - 15 (SPN 965)
Byte: 2 1st digit of Major Version Level - ASCII
Byte: 3 2nd digit of Major Version Level - ASCII
Byte: 4 3rd digit of Major Version Level - ASCII
Byte: 6 1st digit of Minor Version Level - ASCII
Byte: 7 2nd digit of Minor Version Level - ASCII
Byte: 8 3rd digit of Minor Version Level - ASCII
Byte: 10 1st Digit of Edit Build Version - ASCII
Byte: 11 2nd Digit of Edit Build Version - ASCII
Byte: 12 3rd Digit of Edit Build Version - ASCII
Byte: 14 1st Digit of Config ID - ASCII
Byte: 15 2nd Digit of Config ID - ASCII
Byte: 16 3rd Digit of Config ID - ASCII
Byte: 18 Software Release Type - ASCII
X - Experimental
T - Pre-production
R - Production
Byte: 20 CPC4 Hardware Major Version - ASCII
Byte: 22 Edit Letter - ASCII
Byte: 24 1st Digit of Diagnostic Version - ASCII
Byte: 25 2nd Digit of Diagnostic Version - ASCII
Byte: 26 3rd Digit of Diagnostic Version - ASCII
Byte: 28 1st Digit of Diagnostic Variant - ASCII
Byte: 29 2nd Digit of Diagnostic Variant - ASCII
Byte: 30 3rd Digit of Diagnostic Variant - ASCII
Bytes: 32,33 Software Year – ASCII

Bytes: 35,36 Software Month – ASCII
Bytes: 38,39 Software Day – ASCII
Bytes: 41,42 Software Hour – ASCII
Bytes: 44,45 Software Minute – ASCII
Bytes: 47,48 ECU Serial Number – Production Year – ASCII
Bytes: 50-53 Production Day
Bytes: 55-59 Production Unit
TC – Turbocharger
Table 356.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 221
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65, 245 (0x00FEDD)
Byte: 1 Turbo Oil Pressure - N/A
Bytes: 2,3 Turbocharger 1 Speed (SPN 103)
Resolution: 4 rpm / Bit, 0 rpm offset
Byte: 4 Bits: 8–7 Turbo Oil Level Switch–N/A
Bits: 6–1 Not Defined
TCFG2 – Transmission Configuration

Table 357.
Transmission Reception Rate : On request or sender may transmit every 5 seconds until
acknowledged by reception of the engine configuration message
PGN 65251 SPN 1846
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 75
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65, 099 (0xFE4B)
Bytes: 1–2 Transmission Torque Limit (SPN 1845)
Resolution: 1 Nm/Bit, 0 offset
Bytes: 3–8 Not Defined
TCO1 – Tachograph
Table 358.
Reception Rate: 50 ms
Data Length: 8
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 108
Default priority: 3
PGN: 65,132 (0x00FE6C)
Byte : 1 Driver Status
Bits: 7,8 Drive Recognize (SPN 1611) – N/A
Bits: 4–6 Driver 2 Working State (SPN 1613) – N/A
Bits: 1–3 Driver 1 Working State (SPN 1612) – N/A
Byte : 2 Driver 1
Bits: 7,8 Overspeed (SPN 1614) – N/A
Bits: 4–6 Driver card, Driver 1 (SPN 1615) – N/A
Bits: 1–3 Driver 1 Time Related States (SPN 1617) – N/A
Byte : 3 Driver 2
Bits: 5,6 Driver card, driver 2 (SPN 1616) – N/A
Bits: 1–4 Driver 2 Time Related States (SPN 1618) – N/A
Byte : 4 TCO1 Information
Bits: 7,8 Direction Indicator (SPN 1619) – N/A
Bits: 5,6 Tachograph Performance (SPN 1620) – N/A
Bits: 3,4 Handling Information (SPN 1621) – N/A

Bits: 1,2 System Event (SPN 1622) – N/A
Bytes: 5,6 Tachograph Output Shaft Speed (SPN 1623)
Resolution: 0.125 rpm/bit, 0 offset
Bytes: 7,8 Tachograph Vehicle Speed (SPN 1624)
Resolution: 1/256 km/h per bit, 0 offset
TD – Time/Date
Table 359.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 230
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,254 (0x00FEE6)
Byte: 1 Seconds (SPN 959)
Resolution: 0.25 sec. / Bit, 0 sec. offset
Byte: 2 Minutes (SPN 960)
Resolution: 1 min / Bit, 0 min offset
Byte: 3 Hours (SPN 961)
Resolution: 1 hour / Bit, 0 h offset
Byte: 4 Month (SPN 963)
Resolution: 1 month / Bit, 0 month offset
Byte: 5 Day (see Note) (SPN 962)
Resolution: 0.25 day / Bit, 0 day offset
Byte: 6 Year (SPN 964)
Resolution: 1 year / Bit, 1985 year offset
Byte: 7 Local Minute Offset – N/A
Byte: 8 Local Hour Offset – N/A
Note: The Day field represents days elapsed (e.g. 1/1/98 at 12:00 am would be 0 for byte 5 (Day) and 1/1/98 at 1:00
PM would be 2 for byte 5 and 1/15/98 at 1:00 PM would be 62 for byte 5).
TSC1 – Torque Speed Control
Table 360.
Reception Rate : 10 ms when active to the engine, 50 ms when active to the retarder
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 0

Default priority: 3
PGN: 0 (0x000000)
Byte : 1 Control Bits
Bits: 6,5 Override Control Mode Priority (SPN 897)
00: Highest
01: High
10: Medium
11: Low
Bits: 4,3 Engine Requested Speed Control Conditions (SPN 696)
00: Transient optimized for driveline disengaged and non-lockup conditions
01: Stability optimized for driveline disengaged and non-lockup conditions
10: Stability optimized for driveline engaged and/or in lockup condition 1 (e.g.
vehicle driveline)
11: Stability optimized for driveline engaged and/or in lockup condition 2 (e.g.
PTO driveline)
Bits: 2,1 Override Control Modes (SPN 695)
00: Override Disabled
01: Speed Control
10: Torque Control
11: Speed/Torque Limit Control
Byte: 2,3 Requested Speed / Speed Limit (SPN 898)
Resolution:
Byte: 4 Requested Torque / Torque Limit (SPN 518)
0-125% for engine torque requests
-125-0% for retarder torque requests
Note: The CPC4 will honor TSC1 messages from the following source addresses:
• TSC1 Source Address J1939 — Customer Selectable
• Transmission (Source Address 3)
• ABS (Source Address 11)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (Source Address 42)
VD – Vehicle Distance

Table 361.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 224
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,248 (0x00FEE0)
Bytes: 1-4 Trip Distance (SPN 244)
Resolution: 0.125 km / Bit, 0 km offset
Bytes: 5-8 Total Vehicle Distance (SPN 245)
Resolution: 0.125 km / Bit, 0 km offset
VDHR – High Resolution Vehicle Distance
Table 362.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 193
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,217 (0x00FEC1)
Bytes: 1-4 High Resolution Total Vehicle Distance (SPN 917)
Resolution: 5 m / Bit, 0 m offset (16.4 ft./Bit, 0 ft. offset)
Bytes: 5-8 High Resolution Trip Distance (SPN 918)
Resolution: 5 m / Bit, 0 m offset (16.4 ft./Bit, 0 ft. offset)
VEP1 – Vehicle Electrical Power 1
Table 363.
Transmission Rate : 1000 msec.
Extended Date Page: 0
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 247
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,271 (0x00FEF7)

Byte: 1 Net Battery Current - N/A
Byte: 2 Alternator Current (SPN115) - N/A
Bytes: 3,4 Charging System Potential (voltage) - N/A
Bytes: 5,6 Battery Potential / Power input 1 (SPN 168)
Resolution: 0.05 V / Bit, 0 V offset
Bytes: 7,8 Keyswitch Battery Potential (SPN 158)
Resolution: 0.05 V / Bit, 0 V offset
VH – Vehicle Hours
Table 364.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 231
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,255 (0x00FEE7)
Bytes: 1-4 Total Vehicle Hours -N/A
Bytes: 5-8 Total Power Takeoff Hours (SPN 248)
Resolution: 0.05 h / Bit, 0 h offset
VI – Vehicle Identification
Table 365.
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 236
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65, 260 (0x00FEEC)
Bytes: 1-XX Vehicle Identification Number (SPN 237)

Up to 200 characters ('X' delimited)
WIF – Water-In-Fuel Indicator

Table 366.
Transmission Rate : 10 s
Data Length: 8
Data Page: 0
PDU format: 254
PDU specific: 255
Default priority: 6
PGN: 65,279 (0xFEFF)
Byte : 1 Water-In-Fuel Indicator
Bits: 2–1 Water-In-Fuel Indicator (SPN 97)

00: No
01: Yes
10: Error
11: Not Available

10 Appendix A: Harness Wiring Diagram
10.1 GHG14 Aftertreatment Control Module (ACM2.1)

Shown is the GHG14 Aftertreatment Control Module (ACM2.1) wiring schematic:

10 Appendix A: Harness Wiring Diagram
Figure 79. GHG14 Aftertreatment Control Module (ACM2.1)

11 Appendix B: Parameter Lists
11.1 PARAMETER LIST

The following table lists the DDEC13 parameters:
Table 367.
GHG14 DDEC13 Parameters
Diagnostic Param Min Max Default Access Range
Name eter
Group
1 01 DI 13 0 4 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Enable Dual Speed Axle
2 = Enable Transmission Retarder Input
3 = Clutch Switch
4 = Evobus Cruise Control Lever Quit signal
Selection VEPS 1 = Enable Park Brake Interlock
1 05 DO Fault 35 0 15 1 DDRS, 0 = Fault Detection Off
Detection VEPS 1 = Diag
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
6 = PulseWhenOn + PulseWhenOff
7 = PulseWhenOn + PulseWhenOff + Diag
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
14 = SetFault + PulseWhenOn + PulseWhenOff
15 = SetFault + PulseWhenOn + PulseWhenOff + Diag
Selection VEPS, 1 = Enable Aux Shutdown
DDDL 7.X 2 = FUSO Accelerator Switch
3 = Evobus Retarder Lever Stage0
Selection VEPS 1 = Engine Shutdown/Tier4 Inducement Override
2 = FUSO CC-Cancel
Selection VEPS 1 = Throttle Inhibit
Selection VEPS, 1 = Remote-Throttle Enable
DDDL 7.X 2 = Fast Engine Heat Up Switch
Selection VEPS, 1 = Hardwired
DDDL 7.X 2 = J1939 PTO
Selection VEPS 1 = Fan Override Switch


Name eter
Group
Selection Note: Set to VEPS 1 = Engine Brake Low
3 when 2 = Evobus Retarder Lever Stage 2
utilizing the 3 = CC Hysteresis Low
CC Limit 4 = RemAP IVS1
Switch
Selection Note: Set to VEPS 1 = Engine Brake Low
3 when 2 = Evobus Retarder Lever Stage 2
utilizing the 3 = CC Hysteresis High
CC Limit 4 = RemAP IVS1
Switch
2nd Axle Speed 13 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = Hardwired
Switch Config VEPS 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
3 01 AI Selection 13 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = No Sensor
VEPS 1 = Air Filter Restriction Sensor
2 = Optimized Idle Thermostat input
3 = FUSO Idle Volume sensor input
3 05 AO_01 9 0 4 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Not Used
2 = 5 Bar Oil Pressure Gauge
3 = 10 Bar Oil Pressure Gauge
4 = Fuel Filter Sensor
3 06 AO_02 9 0 2 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Coolant Temperature Lamp
2 = Coolant Temperature Gauge
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
3 07 DO 35 0 8 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Decompression Valve
2 = Grid Heater
3 = Not Used
4 = Expansion Tank Pressure Control Valve 1
5 = Service Brake Request Lamp
6 = DEF Low Lamp
7 = TIER4 DEF Lamp
8 = EU6 Inducement Lamp


Name eter
Group
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
3 08 DO 35 0 12 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Exhaust Brake Only
2 = Exhaust and Decompression Brake via Single Valve
3 = Not Used
4 = Not Used
5 = Not Used
6 = Not Used
7 = Expansion Tank Pressure Control Valve 2
8 = CC Limiter Active Lamp
9 = CC Limiter Active Lamp with ECE R89
10 = CC Limiter Lamp ECE R89 only
11 = Tier4 Limitation Active Lamp
12 = EU6 Limitation Active Lamp
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
3 09 DO 35 0 11 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Grid Heater Hardwired
2 = Not Used
4 = Engine Brake Valves Ground
5 = FUSO Engine Brake Relay
6 = WIF Lamp
7 = Expansion Tank Pressure Control Valve Ground
8 = DEF Low Lamp
9 = TIER4 DEF Lamp


Name eter
Group
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
Selection VEPS 1 = Air Filter Lamp
2 = Not Used
3 = Not Used
4 = Not Used
5 = Fuso Retarder Control 1
6 = DEF Low Lamp
7 = TIER4 DEF Lamp
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
Selection VEPS 1 = Oil Level Lamp
2 = Not Used
3 = Oil Pressure Low Lamp
4 = Cruise / PTO Active Lamp
5 = Fuso rRtarder Control 2
6 = Battery Voltage Low Lamp
7 = Fuel Filter Restriction Lamp


Name eter
Group
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
3 17 DO 35 0 10 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Enable Starter Lockout
2 = Enable Kick Down Output
3 = Not Used
4 = Optimized Idle Alarm
5 = Split Valve 2
6 = Starter Lockout and AGS2 Run Signal / Starter Lockout
7 = Engine Brake Disabled for Over–Speed
8 = Battery Voltage Low Lamp
9 = Coolant Level Low Lamp
10 = PTO1valve2
3 18 DI 13 0 12 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Enable ABS Input
4 = Not Used
5 = Switchable Torque Demand
6 = Drive On Super Structure
7 = Throttle Inhibit Super Structure
8 = Split Select
9 = FUSO Engine Brake Stage 2 Cancel Switch
10 = DPF Inhibit Regen Switch
11 = PTO2stat
12 = Engine Shutdown/Tier4 Inducement Override
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag


Name eter
Group
Selection VEPS 1 = Grid Heater Lamp
2 = Accelerator Pedal Idle Position
3 = Run Signal / Starter Lockout
5 = Maneuver Mode
6 = Service Brake Request Lamp
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag
4 07 DO 35 0 15 13 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Accelerator Pedal Kick Down
2 = Actual Torque
3 = Road Speed
4 = Engine Speed
5 = Coolant Temperature
6 = Pedal Torque
7 = Boost Temperature
8 = Oil Pressure (Threshold)
9 = Coolant Temperature (Eng. Controller Threshold)
11 = Optimized Idle ACC Bus (Ignition Relay)
12 = Split Valve 1
14 = AUX-Relay
15 = PTO2valve2
Selection VEPS 1 = Clutch Switch
2 = PulseWhenOff
4 = PulseWhenOn
8 = SetFault
9 = SetFault + Diag


Name eter
Group
4 09 DO 35 0 17 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Accelerator Pedal Idle Position
2 = Actual Torque
3 = Road Speed
4 = Engine Speed
5 = Coolant Temperature
6 = Pedal Torque
7 = Boost Temperature
8 = Oil Pressure (Threshold)
9 = Coolant Temperature (Eng. Controller Threshold)
10 = Optimized Idle Active Lamp
11 = Deceleration Lamp
12 = Not Used
13 = WIF lamp
14 = Cruise/PTO Active Lamp
15 = Check Transmission Lamp
17 =PTO1valve1
2 = Pulse when off
3 = Pulse when off + Diag
4 = Pulse when on
5 = Pulse when on + Diag
6 = Pulse when on + Pulse when off
7 = Pulse when on + Pulse when off + Diag
8 = Set Fault
Selection VEPS 1 = Not Used
2 = Not Used
6 = PTO2 valve1
4 13 DI 13 0 11 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Selection VEPS 1 = Enable ABS Input
4 = Enable Grid Heater Detection
5 = Switchable Torque Demand
6 = Drive On Super Structure
7 = Throttle iIhibit Super Structure
8 = Split Select
9 = FUSO Engine Brake Stage 2 Cancel Switch
10 = DPF Inhibit Regen Switch
11 = Engine Shutdown/Tier4 Inducement Override
Selection VEPS 1 = 2 Clutch Switch
2 = DPF Regeneration Switch
3 = PTO1stat


Name eter
Group
Selection VEPS 1 = Enable Crank Inhibit
2 = Enable Engine Hood (Optimized Idle)
3 = Not Used
4 = RPM Freeze
6 = Fast Engine Heat Up Switch
7 = Service Brake Active
8 = Driver requested Engine Brake Lockout
9 = Maneuver Mode
10 = Torque Curve Selection, Bit 1
Absolute Max 25 10 152 152 DDRS, —
Vspeed VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
AC Fan Speed 19 0% 100% 100% DDRS, —
Active Pct VEPS
AC Fan Vehicle 19 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Speed Enable VEPS 1 = Enabled
AC Fan Vehicle 19 0 km/h 250 km/h 32.2 km/h DDRS, —
Speed Thresh (mph) (155.3 (20 mph) VEPS
mph)
Adaptive Cruise 43 0 2 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Control Enable VEPS 1 = Eaton Vorad Adaptive Cruise Device
2 = Meritor Wabco Adaptive Cruise Device
Idle 3 0 4 3 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Configuration for VEPS, 1 = Enabled
Limiter Inputs DDDL 7.X 2 = Enabled if Neutral
3 = Enabled if Neutral and Park Brake
4 = Enabled if Park Brake
Air Condition 19 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Enable Auto Fan VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X
Ambient Air 31 0 4 0 DDRS, 0 = Not Available
Temp Sensor VEPS 1 = Hardwired DDC sensor
Enable 2 = J1939 PGN 65269
3 = J1587
4 = PTCAN
5 = Hardwired MBTrucks Sensor
Anti Tamper 8 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X
Axle Ratio 8 1 20 4.33 DDRS, —
VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Cab PTO Switch 13 0 6 0 DDRS, 0 = Hardwired
Config VEPS 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3


Name eter
Group
CC Hyst Variant 15 0 3 2 DDRS, Hysteresis concept:
VEPS A = Continuous and Store
B = Continuous without Store
C = CC Band Switch
0 = Variant A
1 = Variant B
2 = Variant C
3 = Variant D
255 = Inactive
CC ON OFF 13 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = hardwired
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
CC Pause 13 0 14 0 DDRS, 0 = hardwired
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
4 = CCVS1 or CCVS2
5 = CCVS2 or CCVS3
6 = CCVS1 or CCVS3
7 = CCVS1 or CCVS2 or CCVS3
11 = CCVS1 or CCVS2 or hardwired
14 = CCVS1 or CCVS2 or CCVS3 or hardwired
CC Regular 15 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = 0.5 km/hr (mph)
Increment Mode VEPS. 1 = 1.0 km/hr (mph)
DDDL 7.X
CC Set Cst Res 13 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = Hardwired
Accel Sw Config VEPS 1 = CCVS1
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
Soft Cruise 15 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Not Active
Manual VEPS 1 = Active
Activation
CC1 Source 1 0 255 23 DDRS, —
Address SAE VEPS
J1939
Address SAE VEPS
J1939
Address SAE VEPS
J1939
CDR Mode 23 0 5 0 DDRS, 0 = Off
VEPS. 1 = Cruise Control
DDDL 7.X 2 = Top Gear
3 = Cruise Control + Top Gear
4 = Idle Time
5 = Cruise Control + Top Gear + Idle Time
CDR Reset 23 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = Off
Frequency VEPS. 1 = daily
DDDL 7.X 2 = weekly
3 = 4 weeks


Name eter
Group
Clutch Switch 13 0 7 0 DDRS, 0 = No Clutch Switch
Config VEPS 1 = 1 Clutch Switch
2 = 2 Clutch Switch
3 = CCVS1
4 = CCVS2
5 = CCVS3
6 = ETC1
7 = 1 Clutch Switch, clutch info. via PTCAN
CM1 DPF 1 0 255 49 DDRS, —
Source Addr VEPS
SAE J1939
CM1 Fan Source 1 0 255 25 DDRS, —
Addr1 SAE VEPS
J1939
CM1 Fan Source 1 0 255 49 DDRS, —
Addr2 SAE VEPS
J1939
Config PTO 7 0 7 3 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Speed Control VEPS, 1 = Cab/Remote PTO Enabled
DDDL 7.X 2 = Cab/Remote PTO Enabled if Neutral
3 = Cab/Remote PTO Enabled if Neutral and Park Brake
4 = Cab/Remote PTO Enabled if Park Brake
5 = Cab PTO While Driving
6 = Cruise PTO with Park Brake
7 = Cab/Remote PTO While Driving
Cool Level Eng 18 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Warning
Protect Shtdn VEPS, 1 = Engine Shutdown
DDDL 7.X
Cool Level 32 0 5 3 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Sensor Input VEPS, 1 = Dual Level Probe Sensor (IMO_ACTROS), Fix Threshold
Enable DDDL 7.X Evaluation
2 = Single Level Probe Sensor (Rusty Nail), Temperature
Dependent Evaluation
3 = Dual Level Float Sensor (FTL), Fix Threshold Evaluation
4 = Single Level Probe Sensor (Rusty Nail), Fix Threshold
Evaluation
5 = Dual Level Probe Sensor (IMO_SFTP), Fix Threshold
Evaluation
Coolant Temp 18 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Warning
Eng Protect VEPS, 1 = Engine Shutdown
Shtdn DDDL 7.X
Cruise Control 10 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Enable Eng Brk VEPS, 1 = Enable Automatic Engine Brake Operation with Cruise
DDDL 7.X Control
Cruise Power 15 0 2 0 DDRS, 0 = High Power Only
VEPS, 1 = Low Power Only
DDDL 7.X 2 = Cruise Power Enabled
Cruise V Speed 15 0 1 0 VEPS 0 = Disabled
may exceed 1 = Enable Max Cruise Speed to Exceed Road Speed Limit
RSL
DPF J1939 46 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Not Active
Inhibit Sw VEPS 1 = Active
Enable
DPF J1939 46 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Not Active
Regen Sw VEPS 1 = Active
Enable


Name eter
Group
EBC1 Source 1 0 255 33 DDRS, —
Address SAE VEPS
J1939
Enable Cruise 15 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = disabled
Auto Resume VEPS, 1 = enable automatic cruise resume function after clutch has
DDDL 7.X been released once
2 = release clutch twice
3 = resume AMT style
Enable Idle PTO 17 0 4 1 DDRS, 0 = vehicle speed, throttle pedal
Shtdn Override VEPS, 1 = vehicle speed, throttle pedal, SEO, clutch, service brake
DDDL 7.X 2 = vehicle speed, throttle pedal, SEO
3 = vehicle speed, throttle pedal, continuous override with
throttle pedal, SEO
4 = disabled
Enable Idle 17 0 3 1 DDRS, 0 = disabled
Shutdown VEPS, 1 = enable idle shutdown with Park Brake status
DDDL 7.X 2 = enable idle shutdown without Park Brake status
3 = enable idle shutdown with edge triggered accelerator
pedal
Enable PTO 17 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = disabled
Shutdown VEPS, 1 = enable PTO shutdown with Park Brake status
DDDL 7.X 2 = enable PTO shutdown without Park Brake status
3 = enable PTO shutdown with edge triggered accelerator
pedal
Eng Brake 10 0s 5s 0 DDRS, —
Activation Del VEPS,
Time DDDL 7.X
Eng Brk Drvline 10 800 4000 rpm 800 rpm DDRS, —
Clsd Min Spd VEPS
Eng Brk Stage 10 1 5 3 DDRS 1 = Low
On Service VEPS DDDL 2 = Medium
Brake 7.X 3 = High
4 = Stage #4
5 = Stage #5
Eng Speed Limit 3 0 rpm 4200 rpm 3000 rpm DDRS, —
While Veh Stop VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Engine Brake 10 0 3 3 DDRS, 0 = No Engine Brake
Configuration VEPS 1 = Decompression Valve Only or Exhaust Flap Only
2 = Decompression Valve + Exhaust Flap or Fuso Two–
stage Jake
3 = Jake Compression Brake or Decompression Valve +
Brake Gate
Engine Brake 13 0 255 0 DDRS, 0 = hardwired
Switch Config VEPS 1 = info from J1939 (muxed)
2 = Info from LIN
255 = Not Available
Engine Hour 37 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Sync Fault VEPS 1 = Enabled
Enable
Engine Speed 9 200 30000 1604 DDRS, —
Display N Mot counts/ counts/rev counts/rev VEPS
rev
Evobus Cc 13 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Lever Enable VEPS 1 = Enabled


Name eter
Group
Evobus Retarder 13 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Lever Enable VEPS 1 = Enabled via ERC1
2 = Enabled via TSC1
3 = Enabled for EBM Only
Fan AC Hold 19 0s 600 s 180 s DDRS, —
Time VEPS
Fan Vehicle 19 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Speed Enable VEPS 1 = Enabled
Fan Vehicle 19 0 250 0 km/h DDRS, —
Speed (mph) VEPS
Threshold
Fast Idle Spd Air 6 500 3000 rpm 600 rpm DDRS, —
Cond Input rpm VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
FEI Conversion 23 0 75.7 7.57 DDRS, —
Factor km/h/k km/h/km/L km/h/km/L VEPS,
m/L (20 mph/ (2 mph/ DDDL 7.X
(mph/ mpg) mpg)
mpg)
FEI Max Vehicle 23 0 km/h 20 km/h 5 km/h (3.1 DDRS, —
Speed Reward (mph) (12.4 mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
FEI Minimum 23 1.7 8.5 km/L 2.98 km/L DDRS, —
Fuel Economy km/L (20 mpg) (7 mpg) VEPS,
(4 DDDL 7.X
mpg)
FEI Use Trip 23 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Based on Filtered Fuel Economy
Mileage VEPS, 1 = Based on Trip Fuel Economy
DDDL 7.X
Fleet 27 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Management VEPS, 1 = Enabled
Enable DDDL 7.X
FM Alert Update 27 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Enable VEPS, 1 = enabled
DDDL 7.X
FM Daily Usage 27 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Enable VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X
FM Fuel Density 27 0 kg/l 65.535 0.835 kg/l DDRS, —
kg/l (547 (7 lb/gal) VEPS
lb/gal)
FM Incident 27 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Update Enable VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X
FM Monthly Trip 27 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
DDDL 7.X
FM Serv Interval 27 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Update Enable VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X


Name eter
Group
FM Total Data 27 0 6 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Adjust Selection VEPS 1 = Adjust Total Time Only
2 = Adjust All Engine Times
3 = Adjust All Engine Times and Total Revs
4 = Adjust All Engine, OI, Fan Times
5 = Adjust All Engine, OI, Fan Times and Total Revs
6 = Report All Fields as Maximum if Total Does Not Match
Engine Hours
Fuel Economy 23 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Incentive Enable VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X
Gear Ratio for 23 0 2 0.02 DDRS, —
High Gear VEPS
Power
Gear Ratio Gear 23 0 2 0.01 DDRS, —
Down Protect VEPS
Hi Amb Air 17 –40°C 75°C 32°C (0°F) DDRS, —
Override Temp (– (167°F) VEPS,
40°F) DDDL 7.X
Hi Amb Air 17 0 65534 0 DDRS, —
Temp Idle Time VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Hi Eng Brk Max 10 0 km/h 48 km/h 10 km/h DDRS, —
Cruise RSL Spd (mph) (29.8 (6.2 mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
Hi Eng Brk Min 10 0 km/h 48 km/h 6 km/h (3.7 DDRS, —
Cruise RSL Spd (mph) (29.8 mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
Hold Time Fan 19 0s 600 s 0s DDRS, —
VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Idle Shutdown 17 0 1 0 dDRS, 0 = No Automatic Override Performed
Auto Override VEPS, 1 = Automatic Override Performed
DDDL 7.X
Idle Shutdown 17 1s 5000 s 300 s DDRS, —
Time VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
J1939 Fan 19 0 3 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Request Enable VEPS 1 = CM1 from SA1 (see 001/008) and SA2 (see 001/009)
2 = CM1 from SA1 (see 001/008) Only
3 = CM1 from SA2 (see 001/009) Only
J1939 PropB04 1 0 255 254 DDRS, 0 - 254, 255 = snv
Source Address VEPS
J1939 TSC1 1 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
RPM Freeze VEPS 1 = Enabled
Enable
J1939 TSC1 1 0 255 59 VEPS —
Source Address
4
Limiter0 Max 5 0 rpm 4000 rpm 4000 rpm DDRS, —
Eng Speed VEPS,
Enabled DDDL 7.X
Limiter0 Max 5 0 N·m 5000 N·m 5000 N·m DDRS, —
Eng Trq Enabled (lb·ft) (3687.8 (3687.8 VEPS,
lb·ft) lb·ft) DDDL 7.X


Name eter
Group
Limiter0 Max 5 0 km/h 152 km/h 152 km/h DDRS, —
Road Spd (mph) (94.4 (94.4 mph) VEPS,
Enabled mph) DDDL 7.X
Limiter0 Max 5 – 15.625 10 m/ss DDRS, —
Vehicle Accel 15.625 m/ss VEPS,
m/ss DDDL 7.X
Limiter0 Min Eng 5 0 rpm 4000 rpm 500 rpm DDRS, —
Speed Enabled VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Eng Speed VEPS,
Enabled DDDL 7.X
Eng Trq Enabled VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Limiter1 Max 5 0 km/h 152 km/h 152 km/h DDRS, —
Road Spd (mph) (94.4 (94.4 mph) VEPS,
Enabled mph) DDDL 7.X
Limiter1 Max 5 – 15.625 10 m/ss DDRS, —
Vehicle Accel 15.625 m/ss VEPS,
m/ss DDDL 7.X
Limiter1 Min Eng 5 0 rpm 4000 rpm 500 rpm DDRS, —
Speed Enabled VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Lo Amb Air 17 –40°C 75°C –4°C DDRS, —
Override Temp (– (167ºF) (24.8ºF) VEPS,
40°F) DDDL 7.X
Lo Amb Air 17 0 65534 0 DDRS, —
Temp Idle Time VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Low Eng Brk 10 0 km/h 48 km/h 5 km/h (3.1 DDRS, —
Max Cruise RSL (mph) (29.8 mph) VEPS,
Spd mph) DDDL 7.X
Low Eng Brk Min 10 0 km/h 48 km/h 2 km/h (1.2 DDRS, —
Cruise RSL Spd (mph) (29.8 mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
Low Gear Trq 23 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Active
Limiting Enable VEPS 1 = Not Active on Low Torque Rating with Multi-torque
fuelmap
Manual Cruise 43 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Enable VEPS 1 = Enabled
Max Adjusted 3 0 rpm 4000 rpm 500 rpm DDRS, —
Idle Speed VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Max CDR 23 0 40 0 DDRS, —
Incentive for CC VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Max Cruise Set 15 48 152 km/h 104.61 DDRS, —
Speed km/h (94.4 km/h (65 VEPS,
(29.8 mph) mph) DDDL 7.X
mph)
Max Engine 17 0 N·m 5000 N·m 100 N·m DDRS, —
Load PTO (lb·ft) (3687.8 (73.8 lb·ft) VEPS
Shutdown lb·ft)


Name eter
Group
Max Engine 3 0 rpm 4000 rpm 4000 rpm DDRS, —
Speed VEPS
Max Hyst 15 0 160 km/h 160 km/h DDRS, SFTP = Maximum Hysteresis
Vspeed (99.4 (99.4 mph) VEPS, NAFTA = Hysteresis Value for cc limit switch Position
mph) DDDL 7.X Maximum (250 = No Engine Brakes in Retarder Switch
Position Zero)
Max PTO Spd 7 500 3000 rpm 1200 rpm DDRS, —
Resume Accel rpm VEPS,
Sw DDDL 7.X
Max Road 3 10 152 km/h 100 km/h DDRS, —
Speed km/h (94.4 (62.1 mph) VEPS,
(6.2 mph) DDDL 7.X
mph)
Max Road 7 0 km/h 128 km/h 9.6 km/h (6 DDRS, —
Speed in PTO (mph) (62.1 mph) VEPS,
Mode mph) DDDL 7.X
Med Eng Brk 10 0 km/h 48 km/h 7 km/h (4.3 DDRS, —
Max Cruise RSL (mph) (29.8 mph) VEPS,
Spd mph) DDDL 7.X
Med Eng Brk 10 0 km/h 48 km/h 5 km/h (3.1 DDRS, —
Min Cruise RSL (mph) (29.8 mph) VEPS,
Spd mph) DDDL 7.X
Min Coolant 17 –40°C 200°C 15.5ºC DDRS, —
Temp (-40°F) (392ºF) (60ºF) VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Min Cruise Set 15 15 152 km/h 32 km/h DDRS, 15 - 152 km/h (9.3 - 94.4 mph)
Speed High km/h (94.4 (19.9 mph) VEPS,
(9.3 mph) DDDL 7.X
mph)
Min Cruise Set 15 15 152 km/h 32 km/h DDRS, 15 - 152 km/h (9.3 - 94.4 mph)
Speed Low km/h (94.4 mph (19.9 mph) VEPS,
(9.3 DDDL 7.X
mph)
Min Eng Spd for 10 0 rpm 4000 rpm 1100 rpm DDRS, —
Engine Brakes VEPS
Min Engine 3 0 rpm 4000 rpm 600 rpm DDRS, —
Speed VEPS
Min Hyst High 15 0 250 km/h 9 km/h (6 DDRS, Variant: SFTP = Minimum Hysteresis in Economy Mode
Vspeed (155.3 mph) VEPS, NAFTA = Hysteresis Value for cc limit switch Position
mph) DDDL 7.X Medium
Min Hyst Vspeed 15 0 250 km/h 5 km/h (3.1 DDRS, SFTP = Minimum Hysteresis in No Economy Mode
(155.3 mph) VEPS, NAFTA = Hysteresis Value for cc limit switch Position Low
mph) DDDL 7.X
Min PTO Spd 7 464 3000 rpm 700 rpm DDRS, —
Set Coast Sw rpm VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Min Road Spd 10 0 km/h 200 km/h 0 km/h DDRS, —
Eng Brk (mph) (124.3 (mph) VEPS,
Operation mph) DDDL 7.X
Mode of AC 5 0 4 2 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Status Input VEPS 1 = AC Active Closed
2 = AC Active Open
3 = LIM Active Closed
4 = LIM Active Open


Name eter
Group
No of Speeds 7 1 3 1 DDRS, —
via Remote PTO VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Norm Hyst 15 0 250 km/h 9 km/h DDRS, Default Hysteresis if No cc limit switch is Installed or Any
Vspeed (155.3 (5mph) VEPS, Hysteresis Error Occurs
mph) DDDL 7.X
Number of 8 0 250 16 DDRS, —
Output Shaft VEPS,
Teeth DDDL 7.X
OI Alternate 12 0s 30600 s 0s DDRS, —
Battery Run VEPS,
Time DDDL 7.X
OI Continuous 12 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Dsabled
Batt Time VEPS, 1 = Enabled
Enable DDDL 7.X
OI Enable 12 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Therm Ext Mode VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X
OI Extended 12 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Enabled
Mode Disable VEPS, 1 = Disabled
DDDL 7.X
OI Lower Limit 12 –40°C 100°C –4°C DDRS, —
Continuous Run (-40°F) (212°F) (24.8°F) VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
OI Target 12 800 1000 rpm 1000 rpm DDRS, —
Engine RPM ae rpm VEPS,
0 DDDL 7.X
1 DDDL 7.X
2 DDDL 7.X
3 DDDL 7.X
4 DDDL 7.X
OI Thermostat 12 0s 459000 s 0s DDRS, —
Max Time VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
OI Upper Limit 12 –40°C 100°C 32°C DDRS, —
Continuous Run (-40°F) (212°F) (89.6°F) VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
OI Variable Volt 12 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Thresh Enable VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X
Oil Press Eng 18 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Protect Shtdn VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X
Optimized Idle 12 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Enable VEPS 1 = Enabled


Name eter
Group
Park Brake 13 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = Hardwired
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
PasSmart 23 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
DDDL 7.X
PCC Enable 54 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
VEPS 1 = Enabled
Note: If both Predictive Cruise and Soft Cruise are enabled/
active, Soft Cruise is the default if PCC map data is not
available
PCC Eng Brake 54 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Overspeed with tandard thresh.
Mode VEPS, 1 = Overspeed with alternate thresh.
DDDL 7.X
PCC Lower Veh 54 -20 0 -6 DDRS, —
Spd Limit VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
PCC RSL Mode 54 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = RSL limit only, PCC offset ignored
VEPS, 1 = RSL limit add PCC offset
DDDL 7.X
PCC Upper Veh 54 0 20 6 DDRS, —
Spd Limit VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Progressive Shift 23 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
DDDL 7.X
PS High Gear 23 0 km/h 250 km/h 70.79 km/h DDRS, —
On Vehicle Spd (mph) (155.3 (44 mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
PS High Gear 23 0 rpm 4000 rpm 1800 rpm DDRS, —
RPM Limit VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
PS Low Gear 1 23 0 rpm 4000 rpm 1600 rpm DDRS, —
Max RPM Limit VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
PS Low Gear 1 23 0 km/h 250 km/h 28.97 km/h DDRS, —
Max Vehicle Spd (mph) (155.3 (18 mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
RPM Limit VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Max RPM Limit VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
PS Low Gear 2 23 0 km/h 250 km/h 70.7 km/h DDRS, —
Max Vehicle Spd (mph) (155.3 (44 mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
RPM Limit VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
PS Pass Speed 23 0 min 255 min 0 min DDRS, —
Duration VEPS,
DDDL 7.X


Name eter
Group
PS Pass Speed 23 0 km/h 40 km/h 0 km/h DDRS, —
Increment (mph) (24.9 (mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
PS Pass Speed 23 1h 24 h 8h DDRS, —
Interval VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
PTO Accel 7 0 2 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Pedal Override VEPS, 1 = Always On
Mode DDDL 7.X 2 = Only at Speed #0
PTO Cab 7 0 2 0 DDRS, 0 = Always On
Switches Mode VEPS, 1 = Disabled
DDDL 7.X 2 = Only at Speed #0
PTO Dropout on 7 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = No PTO drop out with clutch pedal
Clutch Enabled VEPS, 1 = Causes PTO to drop out if the Clutch is being depressed
DDDL 7.X
PTO Dropout 7 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = No PTO drop out on service brake or park brake
Serv Brk Prk Brk VEPS, activation
DDDL 7.X 1 = Causes PTO to drop out on Service Brake or Park Brake
activation
2 = Drop out on Service Brake activation
3 = Drop out on Park Brake activation
PTO Enable 19 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Auto Fan VEPS, 1 = Enabled
Activation DDDL 7.X
PTO Ramp Rate 7 25 2500 250 rpm/s DDRS, —
rpm/s rpm/s VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
PTO Remote 7 0 2 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Throt Override VEPS, 1 = Always On
Mode DDDL 7.X 2 = Only at Speed #0
PTO Shutdown 17 1s 5000 s 300 s DDRS, —
Time VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
PTO Source 1 0 255 23 DDRS, —
Address SAE VEPS
J1939
Ramp Fan 19 1 %/s 100 %/s 100 %/s DDRS, —
VEPS
Ramp Rate 3 0 8191 .875 100 rpm/s DDRS, —
Adjusted Idle rpm/s rpm/s VEPS,
Spd DDDL 7.X
Remote 20 0 4 0 DDRS, 0 = Remote AP disabled
Accelerator VEPS, 1= Remote AP without IVS (idle validation switches)
Enable DDDL 7.X 2 = Remote AP with 1 IVS
3 = Remote AP with 2 IVS
4 = Remote AP PWM single channel on FPO1 or FPO2
Remote PTO 7 0 2 0 DDRS, 0 = 1 pulsed input (RemPTO)
Spd Selection VEPS, 1 = 2 gray coded inputs (PTO)
Mode DDDL 7.X 2 = 2 binary coded inputs (PTO)
Restart Enable 17 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disable Restart in the Same Ignition Cycle
VEPS 1 = Enable Restart in the Same Ignition Cycle
Resume Accel 7 0 N·m 5000 N·m 5000 N·m DDRS, —
Max PTO (0 lb·ft) (3687.8 (3687.8 VEPS,
Torque lb·ft) lb·ft) DDDL 7.X


Name eter
Group
Resume Accel 7 0 rpm 3000 rpm 500 rpm DDRS, —
Sw PTO Set Spd VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Road Spd Limit 10 0 5 0 DDRS, 0 = Off
Max Stage Num VEPS 1 = Low
2 = Medium
3 = High
4 = Stage 4
5 = Stage 5
RPM Increment 7 0.125 500 25 DDRS, Cruise PTO Increment Rate for toggling CC+ and CC-
VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
SCruise Eng 10 0 31.75 2 DDRS, Soft Cruise alternative engine brake activation threshold
Ret1 On Thres VEPS, stage 1
Spd DDDL 7.X
Spd DDDL 7.X
Spd DDDL 7.X
SCruise Eng 10 0 31.75 2 DDRS, Soft Cruise alternative engine brake deactivation threshold
Ret1 Off Thres VEPS, stage 1
Spd DDDL 7.X
Spd DDDL 7.X
Spd DDDL 7.X
Second Highest 8 0 5.75 1 DDRS, —
Gear Ratio VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Service Brake 13 0 5 0 DDRS, 0 = Hardwired
2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
4 = Ebc1 (SPN 1121)
5 = J1939 PROP6 (T4PP Cab only)
Service Brk 10 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Enable Eng NOTE:For VEPS, 1 = Enable Automatic Engine Brake when Applied Service
Brakes Detroit DDDL 7.X Brake
Transmissio 2 = Operator Selection and Service Brake for Engine Brake
n equipped Activation
vehicles, 3 = Enable Automatic Engine Brake when Applied Service
this must be Brake
set to “0.”
Set Coast Max 7 0 N·m 5000 N·m 5000 N·m DDRS, —
PTO Torque (0 lb·ft) (3687.8 (3687.8 VEPS,
lb·ft) lb·ft) DDDL 7.X
Set Coast 7 0 rpm 3000 rpm 500 rpm DDRS, —
Switch PTO Set VEPS,
Speed DDDL 7.X
Set-Speed 15 0 1 1 DDRS, 0 = km/hr
Increment Mode VEPS, 1 = mph
DDDL 7.X


Name eter
Group
Single Step 3 0 rpm 100 rpm 16 rpm DDRS, —
Adjusted Idle VEPS,
Spd DDDL 7.X
Soft Cruise Alt 53 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Eng Brk Thres VEPS, 1 = Enabled
DDDL 7.X
Spd 1 Max Eng 7 0 N·m 5000 N·m 5000 N·m DDRS, —
Trq Remote (0 lb·ft) (3687.8 (3687.8 VEPS,
PTO lb·ft) lb·ft) DDDL 7.X
Spd 1 via 7 464 3000 rpm 900 rpm DDRS, —
Remote PTO rpm VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
DDDL 7.X
DDDL 7.X
Stop Eng 13 0 3 0 DDRS, 0 = Hardwired
Override Sw VEPS 1 = CCVS1
Config 2 = CCVS2
3 = CCVS3
Throttle Inhibit 11 0 2 0 DDRS, 0 = Cab and Remote Throttle
Selection VEPS 1 = Cab Throttle
2 = Remote Throttle
Throttle Override 7 0 3000 rpm 1400 rpm DDRS, —
Max Eng Spd VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Tire Revs per 8 160 1599 1/km 313 1/km DDRS, —
Unit Distance 1/km (2573 1/ (512 1/mile) VEPS,
(257 1/ mile) DDDL 7.X
mile)
Top Gear Max 23 0 40 0 DDRS, —
CDR Incentive VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Top Gear Ratio 8 0.1 2.55 0.740 DDRS, —
VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Torque Factor 23 0 1 1 DDRS, —
for Cruise Power VEPS
Gear Dwn VEPS
Protect
High Gear VEPS
Power
Trans Neutral 13 0 255 0 DDRS, 0 = Hardwired
Input Config VEPS 1 = ETC2
2 = ETC5
255 = Not Available


Name eter
Group
Trans Retarder 19 0% 100% 0 DDRS, —
Fan Percent VEPS
Trans Ret Min 55 0 4000 700 DDRS, —
Eng Spd VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Trans Ret 55 0 500 50 DDRS, —
Hysteresis Min VEPS,
Speed DDDL 7.X
Trans Ret Min 55 0 200 8 DDRS, —
Vspeed VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Trans Ret 4 Min 55 0 48 12 DDRS, —
Ovs Vspeed VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Trans Ret 4 Max 55 0 48 12 DDRS, —
Ovs Vspeed VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Trans Ret 5 Max 55 0 48 14 DDRS, —
Ovs Vspeed VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Trans Ret 5 Min 55 0 48 10 DDRS, —
Ovs Vspeed VEPS,
DDDL 7.X
Trans Ret 55 0 5 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Number of VEPS 1 - 5 = signal
Stages
Trans Ret Ctrl 55 0 8 0 DDRS 0 = Progr. 0, All
Mode 1 = Progr. 1, EBM priority
2 = Progr. 2, Transm.Ret. priority
3 = Progr. 3, Transm.Ret. Min.
4 = Progr. 4, Transm.Ret. Max.
5 = Progr. 5, EBM Mix 1
6 = Progr. 6, EBM Mix 2
7 = Progr. 7, Variation 1
8 = Progr. 8, Variation 2
Trans Torque 3 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Disabled
Limit Enable VEPS 1 = Enabled
Transmission 2 0 9 0 DDRS, 0 = Manual, without Neutral Switch
Type VEPS, 1 = Not Used in NAFTA: Automated
DDDL 7.X 2 = Allison, Eaton Ultrashift/Ultrashift ASW, Autoshift, ZF
ASTronic, AGS2 without ETC2
3 = Manual, with Neutral Switch
4 = Not Used in NAFTA: Automated with Starter Lock
5 = Eaton Autoshift, Ultrashift, ZF ASTronic, AGS2 with
ETC2
6 = Allison, Eaton Ultrashift ASW: MCM start
7 = Reserved
8 = Eaton Ultrashift PLUS
9 = Detroit Transmission
TSC1 Source 1 0 255 231 DDRS, —
Address SAE VEPS
J1939


Name eter
Group
Two Spd Axle 8 1 20 1 DDRS, —
Second Axle VEPS,
Ratio DDDL 7.X
Vehicle Speed 8 0 11 4 DDRS, 0 = No Sensor
Sensor VEPS, 1 = C3 sensor
DDDL 7.X 2 = Square Wave (Hall Sensor)
3 = J1939 ETC1
4 = Magnetic Pickup Vehicle Speed Sensor
5 = J1939 TCO
6 = J1939 CCVS Source1
9 = Square Wave (Open Collector)
10 = Output Shaft Speed from Transmission (PT-CAN)
11 = Square Wave for OI (Hall Sensor)
VSS Absolute 8 0 Km/h 200 Km/h 160.9 Km/h DDRS, —
Diagnostic Limit (mph) (124.3 (100 mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
VSS Driving 8 0 Km/h 200 Km/h 160.9 Km/h DDRS, —
Diagnostic Limit (mph) (124.3 (100 mph) VEPS,
mph) DDDL 7.X
Water in Fuel 18 0 1 0 DDRS, 0 = Warning and Derate
Shutdown VEPS, 1 = Derate and Shutdown
Enable DDDL 7.X

12 Appendix C: Acronyms
12.1 ACRONYMS
The following list is a set of acronyms commonly used in the Electronic Controls Application and Installation manuals.
Table 368.
Acronyms
Acronym Meaning
AAT Sensor Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
ACC Air Conditioner Clutch
AFTDOCM Aftertreatment Diesel Oxidation Catalyst Missing
AFTDPF Aftertreatment Diesel Particulate Filter
AFTDPFIP Aftertreatment Diesel Particulate Filter Inlet Pressure
AFTDPFM Aftertreatment Diesel Particulate Filter Missing
AFTDPFOBT Aftertreatment Diesel Particulate Filter Outlet B Temperature
AFTDPFOP Aftertreatment Diesel Particulate Filter Outlet Pressure
AFTDPFOT Aftertreatment Diesel Particulate Filter Outlet Temperature
AFTGOCIT Aftertreatment Gas Oxidation Catalyst Inlet Temperature
AFTGOCOBT Aftertreatment Gas Oxidation Catalyst Outlet B Temperature
AFTGOCOT Aftertreatment Gas Oxidation Catalyst Outlet Temperature
AFTSCRIT Aftertreatment Selective Catalyst Reduction Inlet Temperature
AFTSCROT Aftertreatment Selective Catalyst Reduction Outlet Temperature
AM Air Mass Flow
ARH Ambient Relative Humidity
AT1FC2 Aftertreatment 1 Fuel Control 2
AT1HI Aftertreatment 1 Historical Information
AT1IG1 Aftertreatment 1 Intake Gas 1
AT1IG2 Aftertreatment 1 Intake Gas 2
AT1IMG Aftertreatment 1 Intermediate Gas
A1DEFI Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Information
A1DEFSI Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Supply Information
A1SCRDSI1 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Dosing System Information 1
A1SCRDSI2 Aftertreatment 1 SCR Dosing System Information 2
BARO Barometric Pressure
BV Battery Voltage
CAC Charge Air Cooler
CACODP Charge Air Cooler Outlet Differential Pressure
CACOP Charge Air Cooler Outlet Pressure
CACOT Charge Air Cooler Outlet Temp
CCBA Crankcase Breather Actuator
CKPOS Crankshaft Position
CMPOS Camshaft Position
DEFALA Diesel Exhaust Fluid Air Lock Actuator
DEFAP Diesel Exhaust Fluid Air Pressure

Acronyms
Acronym Meaning
DEFAVA Diesel Exhaust Fluid Air Valve Actuator
DEFDA Diesel Exhaust Fluid Doser Actuator
DEFDHA Diesel Exhaust Fluid Diffuser Heater Actuator
DEFLH Diesel Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
DEFLHA1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Line Heater Actuator 1
DEFP Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pressure
DEFPA Diesel Exhaust Fluid Pump Actuator
DEFQ Diesel Exhaust Fluid Quality
DEFT Diesel Exhaust Fluid Temperature
DEFTHA Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Heater Actuator
DEFTHVA Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Heater Valve Actuator
DEFTL Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Level
DEFTT Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Temperature
DM19 Calibration Information
EBA Exhaust Brake Actuator
EBA Engine Brake Actuator
EC Engine Coolant
ECBA Engine Compression Brake Actuator
ECBA1 Engine Compression Brake Actuator 1
ECBA2 Engine Compression Brake Actuator 2
ECBOSS Engine Crankcase Breather Oil Separator Speed
ECIT Engine Coolant Inlet Temperature
ECOT Engine Coolant Outlet Temperature
ECPA Engine Coolant Pump Actuator
ECUPSV Engine Control Unit Power Supply Voltage
ECUPSV1 Engine Control Unit Power Supply Voltage 1
ECUPSV2 Engine Control Unit Power Supply Voltage 2
EEC9 Electronic Engine Controller #9
EFL/P4 Engine Fluid Level/ Pressure #4
EFT Engine Fuel Temperature
EGRA Exhaust Gas Recirculation Actuator
EGRC Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler
EGRCA Exhaust Gas Recirculation Cooler Actuator
EGRDP Exhaust Gas Recirculation Differential Pressure
EGRM Exhaust Gas Recirculation Mass Flow
EGRP Exhaust Gas Recirculation Pressure
EGRPOS Exhaust Gas Recirculation Position
EGRT Exhaust Gas Recirculation Temperature
EOL Engine Oil Level
EONOX Engine-Out NOx (EONOX) Concentration

Acronyms
Acronym Meaning
EOP Engine Oil Pressure
EOT Engine Oil Temperature
ERPM Engine Revolutions Per Minute
ES Exhaust Soot
ESA Ether Start Actuator
F1A Fan 1 Actuator
F2A Fan 2 Actuator
FCA Fan Clutch Actuator
FIAA Fuel Injector Amplifier Actuator
FINA Fuel Injector Needle Amplifier
FM Fuel Mass
FMU Fuel Metering Unit
FPCV Fuel Pressure Control Valve
FRP Fuel Rail Pressure
FSWL Fuel Supply Water Level
FSP Fuel Supply Pressure (FPS)
HCD HC Doser
HCDIP HC Doser Inlet Pressure
HCDOP HC Doser Outlet Pressure
HCFCV HC Fuel Cutoff Valve
IAHA Intake Air Heater Actuator
IAP Intake Air Pressure
IARH Intake Air Relative Humidity
IAT Intake Air Temperature
IATA Intake Air Throttle Actuator
IATPOS Intake Air Throttle Position
IMAT Intake Manifold Air Temperature
IMP Intake Manifold Pressure
MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp
NO2S NOx O2 Sensor
O2S Oxygen Sensor
SA Starter Actuator
SSBV1 Sensor Supply Bank 1 Voltage
SSBV2 Sensor Supply Bank 2 Voltage
TBA Turbocharger Brake Actuator
TCA Turbocharger Actuator
TCCA Turbocharger Compound Actuator
TCCBA Turbocharger Compound Bypass Actuator
TCCVA Turbocharger Compound Volute Actuator
TCCVS Turbocharger Compound Volute Shutoff
TCIDP Turbocharger Inlet Differential Pressure
TCODP Turbocharger Outlet Differential Pressure
TCOP Turbocharger Outlet Pressure
TCOT Turbocharger Compressor Outlet Temperature

Acronyms
Acronym Meaning
TCWA Turbocharger Wastegate Actuator
TFAC Engine Throttle / Fuel Actuator Control Command
TPNOX Tailpipe NOX (TPNOX) Concentration
TS Thermal Switch
TCSS Turbocharger Shaft Speed
VCMA Variable Camshaft Actuator
VNTPOS Variable Nozzle Turbo Position


GHG14 DDEC13ddc SVC Man 0127

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GHG14 DDEC13ddc SVC Man 0127

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DDC-SVC-MAN-0127

GHG14 DDEC13 Electronic Controls

1 California Proposition 65 Warning and Engine Idle Notice............................................................................................... 4

2 All information subject to change without notice.

9 Communication Protocols................................................................................................................................................... 299

All information subject to change without notice. 3

1 California Proposition 65 Warning and Engine Idle Notice

4 All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice. 5

6 All information subject to change without notice.

All information subject to change without notice. 7

5.1 Safety Precautions

WARNING: HOT EXHAUST

WARNING: PERSONAL INJURY

Eliminate the possibility of a fall by:

8 All information subject to change without notice.

A fall could result in a serious injury.

WARNING: PERSONAL INJURY

• Reinstall all safety devices, guards or shields

WARNING: PERSONAL INJURY

WARNING: ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Check power tools before using.

WARNING: EYE INJURY

WARNING: PERSONAL INJURY

Fluids and Pressure

All information subject to change without notice. 9

WARNING: PERSONAL INJURY

WARNING: HOT COOLANT

WARNING: Battery Explosion and Acid Burn

Fire Extinguisher Work Environment

Type A Wood, Paper, Textile and Rubbish

Type B Flammable Liquids

Type C Electrical Equipment

10 All information subject to change without notice.

WARNING: CHEMICAL BURNS

WARNING: PERSONAL INJURY

The following caution applies to the Power Take-off Incompatibility:

WARNING: Power Takeoff (PTO) Incompatibility

All information subject to change without notice. 11

6 Hardware and Wiring

6.1 Motor Control Module 2.1

1. 21-Pin Connector (OEM Responsibility) 2. 120–pin Connector (Detroit™ Responsibility)

12 All information subject to change without notice.

6.1.1 Engine Harness

6.1.1.1 MCM2.1 120–pin Connector for Heavy Duty Engines

All information subject to change without notice. 13

Figure 2. MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector

14 All information subject to change without notice.

MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector - DD13

All information subject to change without notice. 15

MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector - DD13

16 All information subject to change without notice.

MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector - DD13

All information subject to change without notice. 17

Figure 3. MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector

18 All information subject to change without notice.

MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector - DD15

All information subject to change without notice. 19

MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector - DD15

20 All information subject to change without notice.

MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector - DD15

All information subject to change without notice. 21

Figure 4. MCM2.1 120-Pin Connector